NBR 6118 Design of Structural Concrete - Procedure

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Summary
Preface ...............................................................................................................................................................iv
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................iv
1 Objective ..........................................................................................................................................................1
2 Code references ............................................................................................................................................1
3 Definitions .......................................................................................................................................................4
4 Simbology .......................................................................................................................................................6
5 General quality requirements for structures and evaluation of design conformity .............................13
6 Guidelines for durability of concrete structures .......................................................................................15
7 Design criteria for durability ........................................................................................................................17
8 Properties of materials .................................................................................................................................21
9 Joint behavior of materials ..........................................................................................................................30
10 Safety and limit states ...............................................................................................................................50
11 Actions .........................................................................................................................................................51
12 Resistances .................................................................................................................................................63
13 Limits for dimensions, displacements and openings of cracks ............................................................66
14 Structural Analysis .....................................................................................................................................73
15 Instability and second order effects .........................................................................................................88
16 General principles for dimensioning, verification and detailing .........................................................102
17 Dimensions and verification of linear elements ....................................................................................105
18 Detailing of linear elements .....................................................................................................................130
19 Dimensions and verification of slabs ....................................................................................................141
20 Detailing of slabs ......................................................................................................................................153
21 Special zones ............................................................................................................................................157
22 Special elements ......................................................................................................................................162
23 Dynamic actions and fatigue ...................................................................................................................172
24 Plain Concrete ..........................................................................................................................................180
25 Interfaces of the design with construction, use and maintenance .....................................................187
ANNEXES
A Effect of time on structural concrete .......................................................................................................189
B Table of Contents .......................................................................................................................................198
C List of figures and tables ..........................................................................................................................205
D Index ...........................................................................................................................................................207
ABNT 2004 Todos os direitos reservados i

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Foreword
The ABNT - Associao Brasileira de Normas Tcnicas (Brazilian Association of Technical Standards) is the
National Normalization Forum. The contents of the Brazilian Codes are under the responsibility of the
Brazilian Committees (ABNT/CB) as well as of the Organisms of the Sectorial Normalization (ABNT/ONS);
that are prepared by studying committees (CE) integrated by representatives of the sectors, and includes
professionals, producers, consumers and neutrals (universities, laboratories and others).
The ABNT NBR 6118 was prepared by the Brazilian Committee for Civil Construction and by the commission
for studies of structures of plain, reinforced and prestressed concrete (ABNT/CB-02). The revision project
carried out a public consultation published through a special Announcement that took place in August 31,
2001 and was named Design NBR 6118.
The annexes A, B, C and D, which are informative, are an integral part of this Code.
As the objective of this Code has undergone changes in regard to the original document (ABNT NBR
6118:1980), the need to review the ABNT NBR 7187:1987 - Design and execution of bridges of reinforced and
prestressed concrete - Procedures - and also the ABNT NBR 8681:1984 - Actions and safety in structures, as
well as the organization of ABNT NBR 14931:2003 - Execution of concrete structures - Procedure - came
about. This information has the purpose of divulging to users the convenience of consulting the updated
editions of the documents referred to above.
So as to make the consultation and application of this Code easier, taking into consideration its extension and
range, the tables and figures are identified in accordance to the section in which they are inserted. Therefore,
the identification of the number of each table or figure begins with the section number, and is followed
sequentially by the other numbers of the section.
This complemented Version incorporates the errata N.1 of March 31, 2004.
Introduction
This Code adopted the same criteria of the earlier ones: ABNT NBR 6118 (historically known as NB-1),
ABNT NBR 7197, ABNT NBR 6119 and ABNT NB-49 so that this Code includes the definition of the general
criteria that regulates the design of concrete structures whether they are buildings, bridges, hydraulic works,
ports or airports, etc. Thus, it has to be complemented by other Codes that define the criteria for specific
structures.
ii ABNT 2004 Todos os direitos reservados

NORMA BRASILEIRA ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Design of concrete structures Procedures
1 Objective
1.1 This Code defines the basic applicable requirements for designs of plain, prestressed or reinforced
concrete structures except those, which use light and heavy concrete or other special types of concrete
3
1.2 This Code includes structures of normal concrete having specific dry mass greater than 2,000 kg/m ,
3
and not exceeding 2,800 kg/m , of the strength group I (C10 to C50), as defined in ABNT NBR 8953. Among
the special types of concrete not included in this Code are: Mass concrete and concrete without fines.
1.3 This Code establishes the general requirements to be complied with by the design as a whole as well
as the specific requirements regarding each one of the stages.
1.4 This Code does not include applicable requirements so as to avoid limit states caused by certain types
of actions such as seism, impacts, explosions and fire. For seismic actions see NBR15421 and for fire actions
see NBR15200.
1.5 With special structures such as precast elements, bridges and viaducts, hydraulic constructions, arches,
silos, chimneys, towers, off-shore structures or constructions using unconventional constructive techniques
such as sliding forms, successive cantilevers, progressive launchings, the conditions of this Code are still
applicable and shall be complemented and eventually adjusted for specific situations by specific Brazilian
Codes.
2 Code references
The following Codes include determinations which, when referred to in this text, are provisions that apply to
this Code. These editions were in force at the moment of this publication. As all Codes may be complemented
we recommend to whoever makes agreements based on this publication to verify the convenience of using
more recent editions than those referred to below. The ABNT is able to give information of the Standards in
force in any given period of time.
ABNT NBR 5674:1999 - Maintenance of constructions - Procedures
ABNT NBR 5732:1991 - Plain Portland Cement - Specifications
ABNT NBR 5733:1991 - High strength Portland cement - Specifications
ABNT NBR 5735:1991 - Blast furnace Portland cement - Specifications
ABNT NBR 5736:1991 - Pozzolan Portland cement - Specifications
ABNT NBR 5737:1992 - Portland cement resistant to Sulfate - Specifications
ABNT NBR 5738:1994 - Casting and curing of cylindrical or prismatic concrete test specimens - Procedures
ABNT NBR 5739:1994 - Concrete - Compression test of cylindrical test specimens - Testing Methods
ABNT NBR 6004:1984 - Steel wires - Test of alternate bending - Testing Methods
ABNT 2004 Todos os direitos reservados 1

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
ABNT NBR 6120:1980 - Loads for design of structures of buildings - Procedures
ABNT NBR 6122:1996 - Design and execution of foundations - Procedures
ABNT NBR 6123:1988 - Forces from wind in buildings - Procedures
ABNT NBR 6153:1988 - Metallic products - Semi-oriented bending - Testing Methods
ABNT NBR 6349:1991 - Steel wires, bars and strands for prestressed reinforcements - Tension test - Testing
Method
ABNT NBR 7190:1997 - Design of wooden structures
ABNT NBR 7222:1994 - Mortar and concrete - Determination of tension strength by diametrical compression
of cylindrical specimens. - Testing Method
ABNT NBR 7477:1982 - Determination of the coefficient of superficial conformity of steel bars and wires used
as reinforcements for reinforced concrete - Testing Method
ABNT NBR 7480:1996 - Steel bars and wires used as reinforcements to reinforced concrete - Specifications
ABNT NBR 7481:1990 Steel welded wire fabric- Reinforcement for Concrete - Specifications
ABNT NBR 7482:1991 - Steel wires for prestressed concrete - Specifications
ABNT NBR 7483:1991 - Steel strands for prestressed concrete - Specifications
ABNT NBR 7484:1991 - Steel wires, bars and strands to be used in prestressed reinforcements - Test of
isothermal relaxation - Testing Method
ABNT NBR 7680:1983 - Extraction, preparation, test and analysis of samples of concrete structures -
Procedures
ABNT NBR 8522:1984 - Concrete - Determinations of the static deformation modulus and stress-strain
diagrams - Testing Method
ABNT NBR 8548:1984 - Steel bars to be used in reinforced concrete reinforcements with mechanical or
welded connections - Determination of tension strength - Testing Method
ABNT NBR 8681:2003 - Actions and safety in structures - Procedure
ABNT NBR 8800:1986 - Design and execution of steel structures for buildings (limit states method) -
Procedure
ABNT NBR 8953:1992 - Concrete for structural use - Classification by strength groups - Classification
ABNT NBR 8965:1985 - CA 42S steel bars that may be welded for reinforced concrete reinforcement -
Specification
ABNT NBR 9062:2001 - Design and execution of precast concrete structures - Procedure
ABNT NBR 11578:1991 Blended Portland cement - Specifications
ABNT NBR 11919:1978 - Inspection of metallic connections for reinforced concrete bars - Testing Method
ABNT NBR 12142:1991 - Concrete - Determination of tension strength in bending of prismatic specimen -
Testing Methods
ABNT NBR 12654:1992 - Technological Control of materials included in concrete - Procedure
2 ABNT 2004 Todos os direitos reservados

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
ABNT NBR 12655:1996 - Concrete - Preparation, control and acceptance - Procedure
ABNT NBR 12989:1993 - White Portland cement - Specifications
ABNT NBR 13116:1994 - Low heat of hydration Portland cement - Specifications
ABNT NBR 14859-2:2002 - Precast concrete slabs - Requirements. Part 2: Bi-directional slabs
ABNT NBR 14931:2003 - Execution of concrete structures Procedure
ABNT NBR 15200:2004 - Fire design of concrete structures - Procedure
ABNT NBR 15421:2006 - Design of seismic resistant structures Procedure
ABNT NBR ISO 6892:2002 - Metallic Materials - Tension test in ambient temperature.
ABNT NBR NM 67:1998 - Concrete - Determination of consistency. Slump test.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
3 Definitions
The following definitions are applicable to this Code:
3.1 Definitions of structural concrete
3.1.1 structural concrete: Expression that refers to the whole range of applications of concrete as structural
material.
3.1.2 elements of plain structural concrete: Structural elements of concrete that do not have any type of
reinforcement or that have less reinforcement than the minimum quantity required for reinforced concrete (see
17.3.5.3.1 and table 17.3).
3.1.3 elements of reinforced concrete: Those whose structural behavior depends on the bond between the
concrete and the reinforcement, and no initial extensions are applied to the reinforcement before bonding
takes place.
3.1.4 elements of prestressed concrete: Those in which part of the reinforcements are previously extended
by prestressing special equipment aiming to avoid or limit cracks and displacements of the structure when in
use, thus enabling a better use of high strength steels when in ultimate limit state (ULS).
3.1.5 passive reinforcement: Any reinforcement that is not used to produce prestressing forces, that is to
say, that has not been previously extended.
3.1.6 active prestressed reinforcement: It is made up of bars, single wires or strands aiming to produce
prestressing forces, that is to say, in which an initial previous extension has been applied.
3.1.7 concrete with pre-tensioned active reinforcement (prestressing by initial bond): Prestressed
concrete in which the previous extension of the active reinforcement was carried out using supports that are
independent of the structural element before launching the concrete and the connection of the prestressed
reinforcement with the supports referred to above is undone after the concrete hardens; the anchorage in the
concrete takes place only by bonding.
3.1.8 concrete with post-tensioned active reinforcement (delayed prestressing bond): Prestressed
concrete in which the previous extension of the active reinforcement takes place after the concrete hardens
and parts of the structural elements themselves are used as supports; Therefore, the bonding of the concrete
takes place afterwards, through an injection in the sheaths.
3.1.9 concrete with post-tensioned active reinforcement without bonding (prestressing without
bonding): Prestressed concrete in which the previous extension of active reinforcement was carried out after
the concrete hardens and parts of the structural elements themselves are used as supports although bonding
to concrete does not take place; thus, the active reinforcement is connected to the concrete only in specific
points.
3.1.10 expansion joint: Any interruption in the concrete aiming to reduce internal tensions that may lead to
the prevention of any type of movement of the structure, especially when caused by shrinkage or drop in
temperature.
3.1.11 partial expansion joint: Reduction of thickness equal to or larger than 25% of the concrete section.
3.2 Definitions of the limiting states
3.2.1 ultimate limit state (ULS): limit state regarding the collapse or any other kind of structural ruin that
determines the interruption of the use of the structure.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
3.2.2 serviceability limit state of crack formation (SLS-F): Conditions that triggers the formation of cracks.
It is considered that this limit condition takes place when the maximum tension stress in the transversal
section reaches fct,f (see 13.4.2 and 17.3.4).
3.2.3 serviceability limit state of crack opening (SLS-W): State in which the cracks show widths equal to
the maximum specified in 13.4.2 (see 17.3.3).
3.2.4 serviceability limit state of excessive deflection (SLS-DEF): Whenever deformations reach the limits
defined for normal use as in 13.3 (see 17.3.2).
3.2.5 serviceability limit state of decompression (SLS-D): Whenever, in one or more points of the
transversal section normal stress is annulled and there is no tension in the other parts of the section. The
verification is usual in the case of prestressed concrete (see 13.4.2).
3.2.6 serviceability limit state of partial decompression (SLS-PD): Whenever the compression in the
transversal section is guaranteed in the portion where there is active reinforcement. This portion has to be
extended until a distance equal to ap on the nearer side of the strand or of the prestressing sheath (see figure
3.1 and table 13.3).
Figure 3.1 - Limit state of partial decompression
3.2.7 serviceability limit state of excessive compression (SLS-EC): Whenever the compression stresses
reach the established conventional limit. This is usual in the case of prestressed concrete at the moment of
prestress transfer (see 17.2.4.3.2.a).
3.2.8 serviceability limit state of excessive vibrations (SLS-EV): Whenever the vibrations attain the limits
defined for regular use of the construction.
3.3 Definition regarding persons involved in the construction process
3.3.1 contracting party: Natural person or corporation of public law or of private rights which, through an
appropriate commitment instrument, promotes the execution of services and/or works; the contracted party is
technically, legally and financially capacitated.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
4 Symbols
4.1 Generalities
The symbols used in this Code in regard to concrete structures are constituted by basic symbols (of the same
size and on the same level of the current text) and subscripted symbols.
The more frequently used basic symbols in this Code are defined in 4.2 and the subscripted symbols in 4.3.
Generally speaking, the symbols found in this section and the more specific ones found in some parts of this
Code are presented in the appropriated sections so as to simplify the understanding and therefore the
application of the defined concepts.
The values represented by the symbols included in this Code should always be expressed in units of the
International System (SI)
4.2 Basic Symbols
4.2.1 Generalities
The basic symbols ranging from 4.2.2 up to 4.2.4 are accompanied by subscripted symbols so as to avoid any
doubts in the understanding of their meanings.
4.2.2 Lower case letters
a - Distances or dimensions
- smallest dimension of rectangles
- Maximum displacement (deflection)
b - Width
- Dimension or distance parallel to width
- Smallest dimension of a rectangle
bw - Width of the web of a beam
c - Cover of the reinforcement in regard to the face of the element
d Effective depth of section
- Dimension or distance
e Design eccentricity caused by the applied moment and normal force MSd and NSd
- Distance
f - Strength (see section 8)
h - Dimension
- Height
i - Minimum gyration radius of the gross concrete section of the element under analysis

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
k - Coefficient
l - Total height of the structure or height of a story high column
- Length
- Span
n - Number
- Number of aligned columns
r Internal curvature radius of the hook
- Stiffness
s - Spacing of reinforcement bars
t - Length of the support, which is parallel to the span of the beam under analysis
- Time
u - Perimeter
w - Width of crack
x - Height of the neutral axis
z - Lever arm
- Distance
4.2.3 Upper case letters
A - Area of gross cross section
Ac - Area of concrete transversal section
As - Area of the transverse section of a longitudinal tension reinforcement
As - Area of the section of longitudinal compression reinforcement
D - Diameter of the bend of steel bars
E Modulus of elasticity (see section 8)
(EI) - Stiffness
F - Force
- Actions (see section 11)
G - Permanent actions (see section 11)
Gc - Transversal modulus of elasticity of concrete
H - Height
Ic Moment of inertia of concrete section

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
K - Coefficient
M - Moment
- Bending moment
M1d First order design bending moment
M2d Second order design bending moment
MRd Design resistance bending moment
MSd Design applied internal bending moment
Nd - Design normal force
NRd Design resistance normal force
NSd Design applied internal normal force
Q - Variable actions (see section 11)
R - Support reactions
Rd - Design resistance
Sd - Design value of an internal force or moment
T - Temperature
- Torsion moment
TRd - Design resistance torsion moment
TSd - Design internal torsion moment
Vd Design shear force
4.2.4 Greek letters
- Angle
- Instability parameter
- Coefficient
- Factor that defines restraint support conditions
- Angle
- Coefficient
c Partial safety factor for concrete
f Partial safety factor for actions (see section 11)
m Partial safety factor for materials (see section 12)

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
p Partial safety factor for prestressing (see table 11.1 and 17.2.4.3)
s Partial safety factor for steel
- Redistribution coefficient
- Displacement
- Specific deformation (strain)
c - Specific deformation of concrete
p - Specific deformation of active reinforcement
s - Specific deformation of steel of passive reinforcements
- Rotation
- Inclination angle
- Out of plumb
- Slenderness ratio
- Coefficient
- Non-dimensional reduced bending moment
- Poissons coefficient
- Non-dimensional normal force
- Longitudinal tension reinforcement geometrical ratio
c - Concrete specific mass
mn Minimum geometrical longitudinal reinforcement ratio for columns and beams
p - Geometrical ratio of prestressed reinforcement
s Geometrical ratio of passive bonded reinforcement
c Compression stress in concrete
ct Tension stress in concrete
p Stress in prestressed steel
Rd Design resistance normal stress
s Normal stress in passive reinforcement
Sd Design internal normal stresses
Rd Design resistance shearing stresses
Sd Design internal shearing stress

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Td - Design shearing stress through torsion
wd - Design shearing stress through shear
- Diameter of the reinforcing bars
l - Diameter of bars of longitudinal reinforcements of structural elements
n - Equivalent diameter of a bundle of bars
p - Nominal diameter of wires or strands
t - Diameter of bars in transversal reinforcement
vibr - Diameter of vibrators needle
- Creep coefficient
4.3 Subscripted symbols
4.3.1 Generalities
All the subscripted symbols only appear in 4.3.2 and 4.3.4 in the same size of the existing text so as to
facilitate their visualization.
4.3.2 Lower case letters
apo - support
c - concrete
cor - corrected
d - design value
ef - effective
e - equivalent
eq - equivalent
f - bundle
fad - fatigue
fic fictitious, notional
g - permanent actions
h - horizontal
i - sequential number
inf - inferior
j - age (in regard to the cure of concrete)

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
k - characteristic value
- sequential number
lim - limit
m - mean
max - maximum
min - minimum
nec - necessary
nom - nominal
p - steel for active reinforcement
q - variable actions
r - radial
s - steel of passive reinforcement
sec - secant
ser - service
sup - superior
t - tension
- transversal
tot - total
u - ultimate
- rupture
v - vertical
- beam
vo - span
vig - beam
w - web
- transversal
x and y - orthogonal directions
y - steel yield

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
4.3.3 Capital letters
R - Resistance
S Value of internal forces or moments
4.3.4 Numbers
0 - start
- instant when load is applied
28 - period of time of 28 days

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
5 General quality requirements for structures and evaluation of design conformity
5.1 Quality requirements of structures
5.1.1 General conditions
Concrete structures should comply with the minimum quality requirements, listed in 5.1.2, during their
construction and service, and include the additional requirements defined by the designer together with the
contracting party.
5.1.2 Classification of quality requirements of structures
The quality requirements of concrete structures are classified for the purposes of this Code in three different
groups listed from 5.1.2.1 to 5.1.2.3.
5.1.2.1 Resistant capacity
It basically regards safety against ruptures.
5.1.2.2 Serviceability
It is the capacity of structures to maintain full service conditions; they should not undergo damages that could
partial or totally obstruct the use for which they were designed.
5.1.2.3 Durability
Consists in the capacity of the structure to resist the defined and foreseen environmental influences defined
by the designer together with the contracting party in the early stages of the design.
5.2 Design quality requirements
5.2.1 Quality of the chosen solution
The chosen structural solution used in designs should comply with the quality requirements defined in the
technical Codes in regard to strength capacity, its performance when in service and the durability of the
structure.
The quality of the chosen solution should also take into account the architectural, functional, structural and
constructional conditions (see ABNT NBR 14931), as well as its integration with the other projects (electric,
hydraulic, air-conditioning and others) defined by the technicians responsible for each area of expertise and
with the agreement of the contracting party.
5.2.2 Imposed conditions to design
5.2.2.1 All the conditions the design has to comply with described in 5.2.2.2 to 5.2.2.6 should be
previously established and agreed to by the designer and the contracting party.
5.2.2.2 So as to meet the quality requirements that concrete structures should comply with, the design
should meet all the requirements included in this Code as well as in other complementary or specific
Standards in accordance with each situation.
5.2.2.3 The requirements regarding the strength capacity and performance when in service are not
complied with when their respective limit states are overcome (see sections 3 and 10).

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
5.2.2.4 The durability requirements are not complied with whenever the design criteria included in section
7 are not met.
5.2.2.5 For special types of structures specific requirements defined in the specific Brazilian Standards
should be complied with.
OBSERVATION Specific requirements may, for example, occur in the case of resistance against explosions, impact,
seism, and also regarding waterproofing, thermal and acoustic insulation.
5.2.2.6 Additional requirements may be defined for the design.
5.2.3 Documentation of the chosen solution
5.2.3.1 The final product of the structural design includes drawings, specifications and criteria used in the
design. The specifications and criteria for the design may be listed in the drawings themselves or listed in a
separated document.
5.2.3.2 The documents listed in 5.2.3.1 shall contain information that is clear, correct, and consistent
among themselves and with the requirements established in this Code.
5.2.3.3 The structural design should contain the information needed for the execution of the structure.
5.2.3.4 Aiming to guarantee the quality of the execution of a construction based on a specific design,
preventive measures should be taken from the very beginning of the work. These measures should include
the debate and approval of the decisions taken, their divulgation as well as other information given by the
persons belonging to the multidisciplinary staff as well as to the coherent program of activities, always taking
into account the logical rules of precedence.
5.3 Evaluation of design conformity
5.3.1 Depending on the size of the construction, the evaluation of the design should be required and
contracted by a professional expert; and should be registered in a specific document annexed to the
documentation of the project referred to in 5.2.3.
5.3.2 The evaluation of the design conformity should be carried out before the construction; preferentially
simultaneously with the development stages of the design as an essential condition for effective and
consistent results.
5.3.3 Section 25 establishes the acceptance criteria and the corrective procedures whenever necessary.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
6 Guidelines for durability of concrete structures
6.1 Durability requirements
Concrete structures should be designed and constructed according to the foreseen environmental conditions
at the time of design and when used be in accordance with what is established in the design to guarantee the
maintenance of their safety, stability and serviceability during the time of their required life.
6.2 Design required life
6.2.1 Design required life means the period of time throughout which the characteristics of the concrete
structures are maintained. Whenever the requirements of use and maintenance defined by the designer and
the constructor are complied with in conformity to 7.8 and 25.4, as well as the execution of the needed repairs
caused by accidental damages.
6.2.2 The concept of required life is applied to the structure as a whole as well as to its parts. Therefore,
specific parts of the structures may receive special consideration and have a required life different from the
construction as a whole
6.2.3 The durability of concrete structures require coordinated cooperation and efforts from all staff involved
in the development of design, construction and usage; whereas the minimum care required in ABNT NBR
12655 and in the provisions included in 25.4 regarding conditions of usage, inspection and maintenance are
complied with.
6.3 Mechanisms of aging and deterioration
6.3.1 Generalities
From this point of view at least the aging and deteriorating mechanisms of concrete structures should be
considered, established from 6.3.2 to 6.3.4.
6.3.2 Prevailing deterioration mechanisms regarding concrete
a) leaching: through the action of pure, carbonic, aggressive or acid waters which dissolve and carry away
the hydrated compound of the cement paste;
b) expansion through the action of water and soils that contain or are contaminated with sulfates that cause
expansive reactions which harm the hydrated cement paste;
c) expansion through the action of the reactions between alkalis of the cement and specific reagent
aggregates;
d) superficial harmful reactions of specific aggregates caused by transformations of iron products that are
present in their mineral constitution.
6.3.3 Prevailing deterioration mechanisms regarding reinforcements
a) de-passivation by carbonation, that is to say, by the action of carbonic gas in the atmosphere;
b) de-passivation by high percentage of ion chloride
6.3.4 Deterioration mechanisms of the structure itself
Deterioration mechanisms of structures are those related to mechanical actions, movements of thermal origin,
impacts, cyclic actions, shrinkage, creep and relaxation.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
6.4 Environmental aggressions
6.4.1 Environmental aggressions regarding physical and chemical actions that occur in concrete structures
are independent from mechanical actions, volumetric variations of thermal origins, hydraulic shrinkage and
other actions foreseen in the dimensioning of concrete structures.
6.4.2 In the design of current structures the environmental aggression should be classified in accordance
with data presented in table 6.1 and may be evaluated in a simplified manner according conditions of
exposure of the structures as a whole as well as of their parts.
Table 6.1 - Classes of environmental aggressions
Classes of
General classification of the type of Structures
environmental Aggression
environment in regard to the design deterioration risks
aggressions
Rural
I Weak Insignificant
Submerged
1), 2)
II Moderate Urban Small
1)
Maritime
III Strong 1), 2)
Big
Industrial
1), 3)
Industrial
IV Very strong High
Splashes of tides
1)
It is possible to admit a microclimate with a lighter aggression class (one level above) for internal dry
environments (living rooms, sleeping rooms, bathrooms, kitchens and service areas in residential apartments,
commercial offices or environments that have concrete finishing with mortar and paint).
2)
It is possible to admit a lighter aggression class (one level above) in constructions in areas of dry climate with
relative air humidity lower than or equal to 65%, parts of a structure protected from rain in mostly dry environments
or in regions where it rains rarely.
3)
Chemically aggressive environments, industrial tanks, galvanization, bleaching and cellulose and paper
industries, fertilizers warehouses, chemical industries.
6.4.3 The party responsible for the structural design having all data in regard to the environment in which
the structure will be constructed may take into consideration a classification more aggressive than the one
defined in table 6.1.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
7 Design criteria for durability
7.1 Specific symbols for this section
The more frequently used symbols, which could cause doubts, are defined below in order to simplify the
understanding and thus, the usage of concepts established in this section.
The symbols presented in this section follow the same guidelines established in section 4. Therefore, the
subscripted symbols have the same meaning as those listed in 4.3.
cmin - Minimum cover
cnom - Nominal cover (minimum cover plus the tolerance of the execution)
UR - Relative humidity of the air
c - Tolerance for the execution of the cover
7.2 Drainage
7.2.1 The presence or accumulation of rain water or water resulting from cleaning and washing should be
avoided on surfaces of concrete structures.
7.2.2 The exposed surfaces that should be horizontal such as roofs, courtyards, garages, parking and
others should be conveniently drained and have drains and conductors.
7.2.3 All the connections for movement or expansion in surfaces exposed to the action of water should be
duly sealed so as to make them waterproof.
7.2.4 All the tops of ramps and walls should be protected by single plates. All the edges should have gutters
and the encounters at different levels should be protected by flashings.
7.3 Architectural and structural forms
7.3.1 Architectural or constructive solutions that may decrease durability of the structure should be avoided.
7.3.2 The design has to include the access for inspection and maintenance of the structure parts with
required life lower than the construction as a whole such as, for example, bearing devices, boxes, inserts,
waterproofing and others.
7.4 Quality of concrete cover
7.4.1 After all the conditions defined in this section are complied with, the durability of the structures is
significantly dependent on the characteristics, thickness and quality of the concrete that covers reinforcements.
7.4.2 Tests carried out to establish the performance of durability of structures regarding the type and level
of aggression foreseen in design should establish the minimum parameters to be met. Whenever they are
lacking, due to a strong correspondence between the water/cement ratio, the resistance to compression of
concrete and its durability, it is allowed to adopt the minimum requirements defined in table 7.1.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Table 7.1 - Correspondence among classes of aggression and qualities of concrete
Class of aggression (table 6.1)

Concrete Type
I II III IV
water/ cement ratio CA 0.65 0.60 0.55 0.45

in mass
CP 0.60 0.55 0.50 0.45
Concrete class CA C20 C25 C30 C40

(ABNT NBR 8953)
CP C25 C30 C35 C40
OBSERVATIONS
1 The concrete used in the execution of structures has to comply with the requirements defined in
ABNT NBR 12655.
2 CA corresponds to structural components and elements of reinforced concrete.
3 CP corresponds to structural components and elements of prestressed concrete.
7.4.3 The requirements in tables 7.1 and 7.2 are valid for concretes using Portland cement that complies,
depending on its type and class, to the specification of ABNT NBR 5732, ABNT NBR 5733, ABNT NBR 5735,
ABNT NBR 5736, ABNT NBR 5737, ABNT NBR 11578, ABNT NBR 12989 or
ABNT NBR 13116, with minimum use of cement per cubic meter of concrete in accordance with ABNT NBR
12655.
7.4.4 The use of addictives containing chloride in their composition is not allowed in structures of reinforced
or prestressed concrete.
7.4.5 The protection of the external active reinforcements should be guaranteed by the sheath or duct
complemented with grout of Portland cement without blending additions, or grease especially made for this
purpose.
7.4.6 Special attention should be given to protection against corrosion of anchorages of active
reinforcement.
7.4.7 For cover purposes the provisions ranging from 7.4.7.1 to 7.4.7.7 should be taken into account.
7.4.7.1 To meet the requirements defined in this Code the minimum cover for reinforcement is the
smaller value that should be respected along the entire considered element, thus becoming acceptance
criteria.
7.4.7.2 To guarantee the minimum cover (cmin) the design and the execution should consider the nominal
cover (cnom), which is the minimum cover to which the tolerance of execution (c) is added. Therefore, the
dimensions of the reinforcement and the spaces should respect the nominal covers defined in table 7.2, when
c = 10 mm.
7.4.7.3 In current works the value c should be equal to or higher than10 mm.
7.4.7.4 When there is adequate quality control and rigid limits of tolerance regarding measurements
during execution, the value c = 5 mm may be adopted. However, the requirement of a rigid control has to be
explicit in the drawings of the project. In these cases it is allowed to reduce the nominal cover defined in table
7.2 by 5 mm.
7.4.7.5 The nominal and minimum cover always refers to the surface of external reinforcement and in
general to the external face of stirrups. The nominal cover of a specific bar should always be:

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
a) cnom bar;
b) cnom bundle = n = n ;
c) cnom 0.5 sheath.
7.4.7.6 The maximum characteristic dimension of the coarse aggregate used in concrete should not
exceed more than 20% the nominal thickness of the cover, that is to say:
dmx 1.2 cnom
Table 7.2 - Correspondence among classes of environmental aggression

and nominal cover for c = 10 mm
Class of environmental aggression (table 6.1)

3)
Component or I II III IV
Type of structure
element Nominal Cover
mm
2)
Slab 20 25 35 45
Reinforced concrete
Beam/Column 25 30 40 50
1)
Prestressed concrete All 30 35 45 55
1)
Nominal cover of a passive reinforcement that involves the sheath or wires, tendons and strands always higher than
the specified for elements of reinforced concrete due to risks of stress corrosion, and brittle failure.
2)
For the upper face of slabs and beams that will be coated with counter pavement mortar, with dry finishing like
carpet and wood, with mortar covers and finishing such as high performance pavements as ceramics, asphalted
pavements and others, the requirements in this table may be replaced by those in 7.4.7.5 respecting a nominal cover
of 15 mm.
3)
In the lower sides of slabs and beams of reservoirs, facilities for water and sewage treatment, sewage pipes, troughs
for effluents and other constructions in chemical and intensively aggressive environments, reinforcements should have
a nominal cover of 45 mm.
7.4.7.7 In the case of precast structural elements the values regarding the cover of reinforcements (table
7.2) should follow the provisions in ABNT NBR 9062.
7.5 Detailing of reinforcement
7.5.1 The bars should be placed within the structural component or element so as to enable and facilitate
the good quality of operations of pouring and consolidation of concrete.
7.5.2 To guarantee an adequate consolidation it is vital to foresee sufficient space for the entrance of the
needle of the vibrator when detailing the layout of the reinforcement.
7.6 Crack control
7.6.1 The risk and evolution of corrosion of steel placed in areas of bending cracks transversal to main
reinforcements depend essentially on the quality and thickness of the concrete covering reinforcement. The
characteristic limit cracks on concrete surfaces specified in 13.4.2, in components or elements of reinforced
concrete are satisfactory regarding durability requirements.
7.6.2 The control of cracks on the surface of concrete in areas of active reinforcement should comply with
the provisions in 13.4.2 as they are more vulnerable to corrosion when under stress.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
7.7 Special measures
In conditions of adverse exposure, special measures should be taken for the protection and conservation such
as: application of hydrorepelent finishing and waterproofing paints on concrete surfaces, on mortar finishing,
ceramics or others on concrete surfaces, galvanization of reinforcements, cathode protection of
reinforcements, etc..
7.8 Preventive inspection and maintenance
7.8.1 All the designs regarding a specific construction should take into consideration explicit strategies so
as to facilitate the procedures of preventive inspection and maintenance.
7.8.2 The usage, inspection and maintenance manual should be produced in accordance to 25.4.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
8 Properties of materials
fc - Compressive strength of concrete
fcd Design compressive strength of concrete
fcj Compressive strength of concrete at j days
fck Characteristic compressive strength of concrete
fcm Mean compressive strength of concrete
fct Direct tensile strength of concrete
fct,m Mean tensile strength of concrete
fct,f Concrete tensile strength in bending
fct,sp Concrete strength in indirect tension
fst Tensile strength of steel in passive reinforcement
fy Yield strength of steel in passive reinforcement
fpt Tensile strength of steel in active reinforcement
fpy Yield strength of steel in active reinforcement
Eci Modulus of elasticity or initial tangent modulus of deformation of concrete always referring to the chord
modulus at 30% fc
Ecs Modulus of secant elasticity of concrete also called secant deformation modulus of concrete.
Eci (t0) - Modulus of elasticity or initial deformation modulus of concrete at time t0

th
Eci28 - Modulus of elasticity or initial deformation modulus of concrete at 28 days.
Ep Modulus of elasticity of steel in active reinforcement
Es Modulus of elasticity of steel in passive reinforcement
Gc - Transversal modulus of elasticity of concrete
u Specific deformation of steel at rupture
y - Specific deformation of steel at yield
- Poisson coefficient

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
8.2 Concrete
8.2.1 Classes
This Code is applicable to concretes classified according to strength in classes of group I, as defined in
ABNT NBR 8953, that is to say, up to C50.
Class C20 or higher is applicable to concrete with passive reinforcements class C25 or higher to concrete with
active reinforcement. Class C15 may only be used in foundations as defined in
ABNT NBR 6122, and in temporary constructions.
8.2.2 Specific mass
This Code is applicable to concretes of normal specific mass, those that are oven-dry have specific mass (c)
3 3
ranging from 2,000 kg/m to 2,800 kg/m .
3
Whenever the specific real mass for calculation purposes is not known, the values 2,400 kg/m for plain
3
concrete and 2,500 kg/m for reinforced concrete may be assumed.
When the specific mass of concrete used is known, the value of the specific mass of reinforced concrete may
3 3
be considered as if it were plain concrete with an addition ranging from 100 kg/m to 150 kg/m .
8.2.3 Coefficient of thermal expansion
For purposes of structural analysis the coefficient of thermal expansion may be considered as equal to
-5
10 /C.
8.2.4 Compression strength
The provisions in this Code refer to compression strength obtained by cylinders tests, cast according to
ABNT NBR 5738 and to ABNT NBR 5739.
Whenever no information on the age is given, the strength refers to an age of 28 days. The estimate of the
mean compression fcmj, correspondent to a specified strength fckj should be done in compliance with
ABNT NBR 12655.
The evolution of compression strength in time should be obtained through tests carried out especially for this
purpose. In the lack of these experimental results a guideline may be adopted with the values defined in
12.3.3.
8.2.5 Tension strength
The indirect tension strength fct,sp and the tension strength in bending fct,f should be obtained in tests carried
out according to, respectively, ABNT NBR 7222 and ABNT NBR 12142.
The direct tension strength fct may be considered as equal to 0.9 fct,sp or 0.7 fct,f or, in the lack of tests to obtain
fct,sp and fct,f, their characteristic value may be evaluated using the following equations:
2/3
fct,m = 0.3 fck
fctk,inf = 0.7 fct,m
fctk,sup = 1.3 fct,m
where:
fct,m and fck are expressed in megapascal.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
considering fckj 7 MPa, these expressions may also be used for periods of time different than 28 days.
8.2.6 Resistance in multiaxial states of stress
When concrete is submitted to principal stresses 3 2 1, one should have:
1 fctk
3 fck + 4 1
and compression stresses are to be considered as positive and tension stresses as negative (see figure. 8.1).
Figure 8.1 - Resistance in multiaxial states of stress
8.2.7 Resistance to fatigue
See 11.4.2.3 and 23.5.4.
8.2.8 Modulus of elasticity
The modulus of elasticity shall be obtained according to the test specified in ABNT NBR 8522 and is to be
considered in this Code as a chord initial tangent deformation modulus at 30% fc, or any other stress specified
in the design. When tests are not carried out and there is no accurate data on the concrete used at an age of
28 days, the value of the modulus of elasticity can be evaluated through the expression:
1/2
Eci = 5 600 fck
where:
Eci and fck are expressed in megapascal.
The modulus of elasticity in the period of time j 7d may also be evaluated through the same expression,
replacing fckj. for fck.
Whenever needed, this modulus of elasticity can be specified in the design and controlled during construction.
The secant modulus of elasticity to be used in the elastic analysis of the design, especially in the
determination of the required loads and the verification of the limit states in service, should be calculated using
the following expression:
Ecs = 0.85 Eci

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
In the evaluation of the behavior of a structural element or transversal section a single modulus of elasticity
equal to the secant modulus of elasticity (Ecs) can be adopted either for tension or compression;
To evaluate the global behavior of structures and calculate prestress losses, the initial tangent modulus of
deformation (Eci) may be used in the design.
8.2.9 Poissons coefficient and transversal modulus of elasticity
For compression stresses lower than 0.5 fc and tension stresses lower than fct, the Poissons coefficient may
be considered as equal to 0.2 and the transversal modulus of elasticity Gc equal to 0.4 Ecs.
8.2.10 Diagram stress-strain
8.2.10.1 Compression
For compression stresses lower than 0.5 fc, a linear relationship between stresses and strains can be
assumed adopting for the modulus of elasticity the secant value given by the constant expression defined in
8.2.8.
For analysis of ultimate limit state, the idealized diagram stress-strain shown in figure 8.2 may be used as well
as the simplifications suggested in section 17.
Figure 8.2 - Idealized diagram stress-strain
See observation on the value of fcd in 12.3.3.
8.2.10.2 Tensions
In the case of concrete having no cracks, the bilinear stress-strain diagram in tension shown in figure 8.3 may
be used.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Figure 8.3 - Bilinear stress-strain diagram in tension
8.2.11 Creep and shrinkage
Whenever a great accuracy is not necessary, the final values of the creep coefficient (t ,t0) and of the
shrinkage specific deformation cs(t,t0) of concrete submitted to stresses lower than 0.5 fc by the time of the
first loading can be obtained by linear interpolation, according to table 8.1.
Table 8.1 supplies the value of the creep coefficient (t,t0) and of the shrinkage strain cs(t,t0) in function of
environmental humidity and equivalent thickness 2Ac/u, where Ac is the area of the transversal section and u
is the perimeter of the section in contact with atmosphere. The values of this table correspond to temperatures
of concrete ranging from 10C to 20C; however, temperatures ranging from 0C to 40C may also be
assumed. These values are valid for plastic and plain Portland cement concretes.
More accurate Specific deformations caused by creep and shrinkage may be calculated as shown in annex A.
Table 8.1 - Characteristic upper values of shrinkage strain

cs(t,t0) and of creep coefficient (t,t0)
Environmental
humidity 40 55 75 90
%
Notional size
2Ac/u 20 60 20 60 20 60 20 60
cm
5 4.4 3.9 3.8 3.3 3.0 2.6 2.3 2.1
(t,t0) 30 3.0 2.9 2.6 2.5 2.0 2.0 1.6 1.6
t0 60 3.0 2.6 2.2 2.2 1.7 1.8 1.4 1.4
days 5 0.44 0.39 0.37 0.33 0.23 0.21 0.10 0.09

cs(t,t0)
0
30 0.37 0.38 0.31 0.31 0.20 0.20 0.09 0.09
/00
60 0.32 0.36 0.27 0.30 0.17 0.19 0.08 0.09

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
8.3 Steel for passive reinforcement
8.3.1 Category
In designs of structures of reinforced concrete the steel to be used is classified in ABNT NBR 7480 with a
characteristic value of yield strength in the categories CA-25, CA-50 and CA-60. The diameters and nominal
transversal sections should be the established in ABNT NBR 7480.
8.3.2 Type of surface
Wires and bars can be plain, smooth or have ribs or indentations. For each category of steel the coefficient of
minimum superficial conformation, b, determined by tests in compliance with ABNT NBR 7477, and
ABNT NBR 7480. The configuration and geometry of the ribs or indentations should also meet the
specifications in this Code in sections 9 and 23, whenever important cyclical loads exist.
In regard to this Code, the superficial conformation is measured by the coefficient 1, whose value is related to
the coefficient of superficial conformation b, as established in table 8.2.
Table 8.2 - Relationship between 1 and b
Coefficient of superficial conformation

Type of bar
b 1
Smooth (CA-25) 1.0 1.0
Indented (CA-60) 1.2 1.4
High bond (CA-50) 1.5 2.25
8.3.3 Specific mass

3
For passive reinforcement the specific mass of steel is taken equal to the value of 7,850 kg/m .

-5
The value 10 /C may be considered for the coefficient of therma l expansion of steel for temperature intervals
ranging from 20C to 150C.
When tests or values supplied by the manufacturer are lacking, the modulus of elasticity of steel can be
considered as equal to 210 GPa.
8.3.6 Stress-strain diagram, yield and tension strength
In stress-strain the diagram of steel, the characteristic values of yield strength fyk, of tensile strength fstk and of
strain at rupture uk should be obtained by tension tests made in accordance to ABNT NBR ISO 6892. The
value of fyk for steels without yield plateau is the value of the corresponding stress to the permanent strain of
0.2%.
To calculate the serviceability and ultimate limit states the simplified diagram shown in figure 8.4 for steels
with or without yield plateau may be used.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Figure 8.4 - Diagram stress-strain for steel in passive reinforcement
This diagram is valid for temperatures intervals ranging from 20C to 150C and may be used for tens ion
and compression.
8.3.7 Ductility characteristics
The steels CA-25 and CA-50, that meet the minimum values of fyk/fstk and uk defined in ABNT NBR 7480, may
be considered as having high ductility. The steels CA-60 that meet the specifications in this Code may be
considered as having a normal ductility.
In bending tests at 180 carried out according to A BNT NBR 6153 and using the diameters of the pins
indicated in ABNT NBR 7480 no cracking or rupture should occur.
See 23.5.5
8.3.9 Weldability
For steels to be considered as weldable their composition should comply with limits defined in ABNT NBR
8965.
Joints of welded steel should be tested through tension according to ABNT NBR 8548. The load for minimum
rupture, measured in the welded bar should meet the specifications of ABNT NBR 7480 and the elongation
under load should not endanger the ductility of the reinforcement. The total plastic elongation measured in the
welded bar should have a minimum of 2%.
8.4 Steel for active reinforcement
8.4.1 Classification
The characteristic strength values in tension, diameter and areas of the wires and strands as well as the
classification regarding relaxation to be adopted in the design are the nominal values indicated in ABNT NBR
7482 and ABNT NBR 7483, respectively.
8.4.2 Specific mass

3
For specific mass of steel in active reinforcements the value 7,850 kg/m may be adopted.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003

-5
The value of 10 /C may be considered for the coefficient of therma l expansion of steel for temperatures
intervals ranging from 20C to 100C.
The modulus of elasticity should be obtained through tests or supplied by the manufacturer. In the lack of
specific data the value of 200 GPa for wires and strands may be considered.
8.4.5 Stress-strain diagram, yield and tension strength
The stress-strain diagram should be supplied by the manufacturer or obtained through tests carried out in
accordance with ABNT NBR 6349.
The characteristic values of conventional yield strength fptk tensile strength fpyk, and the elongation of strands
after rupture uk should meet the minimum values required by ABNT NBR 7483. The values of fpyk, fptk and of
the elongation after rupture wires uk should meet provisions in ABNT NBR 7482.
To design of service and ultimate limit states the simplified diagram shown in figure 8.5 may be used.
Figure 8.5 - Stress-strain diagram for steel in active reinforcement
This diagram may be used in temperatures ranging from 20C to 150C.
8.4.6 Characteristics of ductility
Wires and strands whose value of uk is greater than the minimum defined in ABNT NBR 7482 and
ABNT NBR 7483 respectively, may be considered as having normal ductility.
The minimum numbers of alternate bendings of wires for prestressing can be obtained through tests in
accordance to ABNT NBR 6004 and ABNT NBR 7482.
See 23.5.5.
8.4.8 Relaxation
The relaxation of wires and strands after 1,000 h at 20C ( 1000) for stresses ranging from 0.5 fptk to 0.8 fptk,
obtained in tests described in ABNT NBR 7484 should not be greater than the values given in ABNT NBR
7482 and ABNT NBR 7483, respectively.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
For design purposes the values of 1000 in table 8.3 may be adopted.
Table 8.3 - Values of 1000, in percentage
Strands Wires
po Bars
RN RB RN RB
0.5 fptk 0 0 0 0 0
0.6 fptk 3.5 1.3 2.5 1.0 1.5
0.7 fptk 7.0 2.5 5.0 2.0 4.0
0.8 fptk 12.0 3.5 8.5 3.0 7.0
Where:
RN is normal relaxation;
RB is low relaxation.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
9 Joint behavior of materials
fbd - Design bond strength of passive reinforcement
fbpd - Design bond strength of active reinforcement
k - Coefficient of loss per meter of tendon resulting from unintentional curvatures of tendon.
l b - Basic length of anchorage
l bp - Basic length of anchorage for active reinforcement
l bpd - Length of anchorage for active reinforcement
l bpt - Length of transference of pre-tensioned reinforcement
l oc - Length of the part of splicing for isolated compressed bars
l ot - Length of the part of splicing for isolated tensioned bars
l p - Regularization distance of prestress forces
t - Period of time counted after finishing prestress operations
t0 - Instant of application of load
t - Required life of the structure
x - Abscissa counted from the section of the tendon in which it is assumed that prestress was applied to
concrete.
P(x) - Normal prestress force
P0(x) - Force in the prestressed reinforcement at time t = 0, in the section of abscissa x
Pd,t - Design prestressing force at time t
Pi - Maximum force applied to prestressed reinforcement through the tensioning equipment
Pk,t (x) - Characteristic force in prestressed reinforcement at time t, in the section of abscissa x
Pt(x) - Force in prestressed reinforcements at time t, in the section of abscissa x
- Design coefficient of anchorage length
p - Relationship between Ep and Eci

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
p - Partial safety factor of loads originated from prestress
f - Diameter of the bars that make up a bundle
n - Diameter equivalent to a bundle of bars
t - Diameter of the bars in transversal reinforcement
1, 2, 3 - Design coefficient of bond stress in passive reinforcement
p1, p2, p3 - Design coefficients of bond stress in active reinforcement
cp - Initial stress in concrete at barycenter level of the prestressed reinforcement due to simultaneous
prestress of n tendons
cg - Stress in concrete at barycenter level of the prestressed reinforcement due to the permanent load
mobilized by prestress or simultaneously applied with prestress.
p - Prestressing stress
pi - Stress on active reinforcement immediately after the application of prestress
p0 - Stress on active reinforcement corresponding to P0
p - Stress in active reinforcement after all the losses acquired through time
P(x) - Losses of prestress through friction, measured from Pi, in the section of abscissa x.
P0(x) - Immediate loss of prestress measured from Pi at time t = 0, in the section of abscissa x
Pt(x) - Loss of prestress in the section of abscissa x at time t, calculated after time t = 0
p - Mean loss of prestress per tendon due to the immediate shortening of the concrete
9.2 General Dispositions
9.2.1 Generalities
The requirements established in this section should be complied with in design regarding bond, anchorage
and connections of reinforcements. The specific conditions concerning the protection of reinforcements in
specific anchorage and connection situations and their limitations to the nature of internal forces applied in
areas of discontinuity and in special elements are focused in sections 7, 18, 21 and 22, respectively.
9.2.2 Prestress levels
Prestress levels are related to intensity levels of prestress forces, which are, themselves, function of the
proportion of active reinforcements used in relation to passive reinforcements (see 3.1.4 and table 13.3).
9.3 Verification of bonding
9.3.1 Position of bars during pouring of concrete
It is considered good condition of bond when the parts of the bars are in one of the following positions
a) with inclination larger than 45 over horizontal;

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
b) horizontal bars or with inclination lower than 45 over horizontal bars, whenever:
for structural elements with h < 60 cm, placed up at a maximum of 30 cm above the lower face of the
element or of the nearer concrete joint;
for structural elements with h 60 cm, placed at a minimum of 30 cm below the upper face of the
element or of nearer concrete joint.
It should be considered as bad bond situations when parts of bars are in other positions than the above
described and when sliding forms are being used.
9.3.2 Values of bond strength
9.3.2.1 The design bond strength between reinforcement and concrete in the anchorage of passive
reinforcements shall be obtained by the following expression:
fbd = 1 2 3 fctd
where:
fctd = fctk,inf/c (see 8.2.5);
1 = 1.0 for plain bars (see table 8.2);
1 = 1.4 for indented bars (see table 8.2);
1 = 2.25 for ribbed bars (see table 8.2);
2 = 1.0 for good bond situations (see 9.3.1);
2 = 0.7 for bad bond situations (see 9.3.1);
3 = 1.0 for < 32 mm;
3 = (132 )/100, for 32 mm;
where:
is the diameter of the bar in millimeters.
9.3.2.2 Design bond strength between reinforcement and concrete in the anchorage of prestressed active
reinforcement shall be obtained by the following expression:
fbpd = p1 p2 fctd
where:
fctd = fctk,inf/c (see 8.2.5) calculated at time of:
application of prestress to calculate the transference length (see 9.4.5);
28 days, to calculate the anchorage length (see 9.4.5);
p1 = 1.0 for smooth wires;
p1 = 1.2 for strands having three and seven wires;

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
p1 = 1.4 for dented wires;
p2 = 1.0 for situations of good bonding (see 9.3.1);
p2 = 0.7 for situations of bad bonding (see 9.3.1).
9.3.2.3 At sliding of reinforcement in flexural structural elements, the values of bonding stress defined in
9.3.2.1 and 9.3.2.2 should be multiplied per 1.75.
9.4 Anchorage of reinforcement
9.4.1 General conditions
All reinforcement bars should be anchored in such a manner that the internal forces to which they are
submitted are totally transferred to the concrete either by bonding or mechanical devices or by a combination
of both.
9.4.1.1 Anchorage through bonding
Anchorage through bonding happens when the internal forces are anchored through a straight length or a
large curvature radius either followed or not by a hook.
Except for areas located over direct supports the anchorage through bonding should be confined by
transversal reinforcements (see 9.4.2.6) or by concrete itself, considering this case when the cover of the
anchored bar is larger or equal to 3 and the distance among the anchored bars is larger or equal to 3 .
9.4.1.2 Anchorage through mechanical devices
Anchorage through mechanical devices happens when the internal forces to be anchored are transmitted to
concrete through the mechanical devices coupled to the bar.
9.4.2 Anchorage of passive reinforcements through bonding
9.4.2.1 Straight extension of bar or large curvature radius
The tensioned bars may be anchored along a straight length or with a great curvature radius in its extremity in
accordance with the following conditions.
a) necessarily with hook (see 9.4.2.3) for plain bars ;
b) without hook in the bars that alternate tension and compression;
c) in other situations, with or without hook; hook not recommended for bars of > 32 mm or for bundle of
bars.
The compressed bars should be anchored without hooks.
9.4.2.2 Welded transversal bars
Several welded transversal bars may be used to anchor bars, whenever (see figure 9.1):
a) diameter of the welded bar t 0.60 ;
b) the distance of the transversal bar to the point where the anchorage starts is 5 ;
c) the resistance to shearing of weld has to be greater than the minimum force of 0.3 As fyd (30% of the
resistance of the anchored bar).

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
OBSERVATION In the case of a single transversal bar, see 9.4.7.1.
Figure 9.1 - Anchorage with welded transversal bars
9.4.2.3 Hooks of tension reinforcement
The hooks at the extremities of bars used in longitudinal tension reinforcement may be:
a) semicircular, with straight tip of length not lower than 2 ;
b) at angle of 45 (internal), with straight tip n ot lower than 4 ;
c) at 90 angle, with straight tip of length not lower than 8 .

o
For plain bars, the hooks should be semi-circular.
The internal diameter of the curvature of hooks of longitudinal tension reinforcement should be at least equal
to dispositions in table 9.1.
Table 9.1 - Diameter of bending pins (D)
Bar diameter Type of steel

mm CA-25 CA-50 CA-60
< 20 4 5 6
20 5 8 -
For hooks of stirrups, see 9.4.6.1.
When there is a welded bar transversal to the hook and the bending operation takes place after welding, the
diameters of bending pins should follow the values in table 9.1 when the point of weld is located at the straight
part of the bar at a minimum distance of 4 from the beginning of the curve.
If this distance is smaller or the point is located on the curved part, the diameter of the bending pin should be
at least equal to 20 .
When the welding operation takes place after bending, the diameters shown in table 9.1are to be maintained.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
9.4.2.4 Length of basic anchorages
The length of basic anchorages is defined as the straight length of a bar of passive reinforcements necessary
to anchor the limit force Asfyd in this bar, assuming, along this length, uniform bond strength equal to fbd, as in
9.3.2.1.
The basic anchorage length is obtained by:
f yd
lb =
4 fbd
9.4.2.5 Necessary anchorage length
The necessary anchorage length may be calculated by:
As,calc
l b,nec = l b l b,min
As,ef
where:
= 1.0 for bars without hook;
= 0.7 for tensioned bars with hook with cover at the normal plane to hook 3;
= 0.7 when there are welded transversal bars as in 9.4.2.2;
= 0.5 when there are welded transversal bars as in 9.4.2.2 and the hook with cover at the normal plane
to hook 3;
l b is designed according to 9.4.2.4;
l b,min is the larger value between 0.3 l b , 10 and 100 mm.
In special cases it is valid to take into consideration other factors that reduce the necessary anchorage length.
9.4.2.6 Transversal reinforcement in anchorage
In regard to this sub-section and in compliance with provisions in 9.4.1.1, transversal reinforcements along the
length of the anchorage is considered when the sum of the areas of this reinforcement is larger or equal to
those specified in 9.4.2.6.1 and 9.4.2.6.2.
9.4.2.6.1 Bars with < 32 mm
Transversal reinforcements able to resist 25% of the longitudinal force of one of the anchored bars should be
foreseen along the length of anchorage. If the anchorage includes different bars, the one of larger diameter
prevails.
9.4.2.6.2 Bars with 32mm
Reinforcements have to be verified in two transversal directions regarding the set of anchored bars. These
transversal reinforcements should be able to support the internal forces of cracking according to the critical
planes, respecting maximum spaces of 5 (where is the diameter of the anchored bar).

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
For compressed bars, at least one of the bars that make up a transversal reinforcement should be placed at a
distance equal to four diameters (of the anchored bar) beyond the extremity of the bar.
9.4.3 Anchorage of bundles of bars through bonding
A bundle is considered a bar of diameter equivalent to:
n = f n
Bars of bundles should have straight anchorage, without hooks and should comply with the following
conditions:
a) when the equivalent diameter of the bundle is smaller or equal to 25 mm, the bundle may be considered
as a single bar of diameter equal to n, for which the provisions in 9.4.2. are valid;
b) when the equivalent diameter is larger than 25 mm, the anchorage has to be calculated for each one of
the isolated bars, providing a distance of their extremities so as to minimize the effects of concentration of
bonding stresses; the distance between the extremities of the bars from the bundle may not be less than
1.2 times the length of the anchorage of each individual bar.
c) whenever, for construction reasons, it is not possible to comply with the recommendations of b), the
anchorage may be calculated for bundles as if it were a single bar with diameter equivalent to n. The
additional transversal reinforcement is mandatory and has to comply with provisions of 9.4.2.6, whether
n is smaller, equal or larger than 32 mm.
9.4.4 Anchorage of welded wire fabric through bonding
The provisions from 9.3.1 to 9.4.2 should be complied with.
If the welded wire fabric has smooth wires or indentations the same criteria established for bars with ribs may
be used, whenever the necessary number of transversal wires welded along the length of the anchorage is
calculated by the expression:
As,calc
n4
As,ef
9.4.5 Anchorage of active reinforcements (prestressed wires and strands) through bonding
9.4.5.1 Basic anchorage length
The basic anchorage length should be obtained by:
for single wires:
fpyd
l bp =
4 fbpd
for strands of three or seven wires:
7 fpyd
l bp =
36 fbpd
where:

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
fbpd should be calculated in accordance with 9.3.2, considering the age of the concrete at the day it was
prestressed so as to calculate the length of transference and 28 days to calculate the length of the
anchorage.
9.4.5.2 Length of transference ( l bpt )
To calculate the necessary length to transfer the total prestress force in the wire by bond into the concrete
mass one should simultaneously consider:
a) if in the act of prestressing the liberation of the tensioning device is gradual. In this case, the length of
transference has to be calculated by the expressions:
for indented or smooth wires:
pi
l bpt = 0,7l bp
fpyd
for strands of three or seven wires:
pi
l bpt = 0,5l bp
fpyd
b) if in the act of prestressing the liberation is not gradual. In this case the values calculated in a) should be
multiplied by 1.25.
9.4.5.3 Necessary length of anchorage
The necessary length of anchorage is obtained by the expression:
fpyd p
l bpd = l bpt + l bp
fpyd
9.4.5.4 Transversal reinforcement in anchorage areas
The transversal reinforcement in anchorage areas shall be calculated in accordance with 21.2.
9.4.6 Anchorage of stirrups
The anchorage of the stirrups should be guaranteed through hooks or welded longitudinal bars.
9.4.6.1 Hooks of stirrups
The hooks of the stirrups may be:
a) semicircular or at an internal angle of 45 (internal) with straight tip of length equal to 5 t, but not lower
than 5 cm;
b) at a 90 angle, with straight tip of length larger or equal to 10 t, but not lower than 7 cm (this type of hook
o
should not be used for smooth bars and wires.)
The internal diameter of the stirrup curvatures should be at least equal to the established in table 9.2.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Table 9.2 - Diameter of bending pins for stirrups
Bar diameter Type of steel

mm CA-25 CA-50 CA-60
10 3 t 3 t 3 t
10 < < 20 4 t 5 t
20 5 t 8 t
9.4.6.2 Welded transversal bars
If the resistance to shearing of weld for a minimum force of Asfyd is proved by test, stirrup anchorages may be
carried out through welded transversal bars, as in figure 9.2 in accordance with the following conditions:
a) two welded bars with diameter t > 0.7 for stirrups having one or two legs;
b) a welded bar with diameter t 1.4 , for stirrups of two legs.
where:
Asfyd is the resistance of anchored bars.
Figure 9.2 - Anchorage of transversal reinforcement through welded bars
9.4.7 Anchorage through mechanical devices
Whenever mechanical devices coupled to reinforcement to be anchored are used the efficiency of the set
should be warranted and when needed, proved through tests.
Sliding between bars and concrete near the anchorage device should neither exceed 0.1 mm for 70% of
ultimate limit loads nor 0.5 mm for 95% of this load.
Design resistance to anchorage should neither exceed 50% of the tested limit load, when the effects of fatigue
are not to be taken into account; nor 70% of the obtained limit load through fatigue tests.
Design should foresee the localized effects of these devices through the verification of the resistance of
concrete and of an adequate placement of reinforcements in order to resist the generated internal forces and
to maintain the openings of cracks within the specified limits as defined in 21.2.
9.4.7.1 Single transversal bars
A welded transversal bar may be used as an anchorage device of the bar whenever:
t = anchored bar;

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
is not larger than 1/6 of the smallest dimension of the structural element in the anchorage area
or 25 mm;
the spaces between anchored bars should not be larger than 20 ;
the weld linking the bars is done in the longitudinal and transversal direction of the bars surrounding
the area of contact of the bars completely.
the weld complies with provisions in 9.5.4.
9.5 Union or joints of bars
9.5.1 Types
by splicing;
by threaded connections with metallic filling, screwing or pressing;
by welding;
by other duly warranted devices.
9.5.2 Lap splices
This type of union is not allowed for bars with bar diameters larger than 32 mm, it is also not allowed for ties or
kingpost (linear structural elements of entirely tensioned section).
In cases of bundles having circular diameters of the same area for each bundle, they should not be larger than
45 mm in accordance to the criteria defined in 9.5.2.5.
9.5.2.1 Proportions of lapped bars
It is considered as in the same transversal section the joints that overlap or which nearer extremities are
distant from each other less than 20% of the length of the lapped part.
When bars have different diameters the lapped length has to be calculated based on the bar having the larger
diameter (see figure 9.3).
Figure 9.3 - Joints considered as in the same transversal section
The maximum proportion of tensioned bars of main reinforcement joined by splicing in the same transversal
section of the structural element should be the indicated in table 9.3.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
The use of larger proportions than those indicated should be warranted in regard to the integrity of the
concrete in the transmission of the internal forces and to the resistance capacity of the joint as a set, taking
into consideration the nature of the actions that require them.
Table 9.3 - Maximal proportion of jointed tensioned bars
Type of loads
Type of bar Situation
Static Dynamic
on one layer 100% 100%

High bonding
on more than one layer 50% 50%
< 16 mm 50% 25%
Plain, smooth
16 mm 25% 25%
In the case of permanently compressed or distributing reinforcement, all the bars may be jointed in the same
section.
9.5.2.2 Splicing length of isolated tensioned bars
9.5.2.2.1 When the free distance between joined bars is within 0 and 4 , the length of the splicing part for
tensioned bars should be:
l 0 t = 0 t l b,nec l 0 t,min
where:
l 0 t,min is the larger value among 0.3 0t l b , 15 and 200 mm;
0t is the coefficient function of the percentage of joined bars in the same section as in table 9.4.
9.5.2.2.2 When the free distance among joined bars is larger than 4 to the length calculated in 9.5.2.2.1,
the free distance among the joined bars should be added. The transversal reinforcement in the joint should be
justified and the joint behavior of concrete and steel has to be considered in compliance with provisions in
9.5.2.4.
Table 9.4 Values of coefficient 0t
Joined bars in the same section

20 25 33 50 > 50
%
Values of 0t 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
9.5.2.3 Length by splicing of isolated compressed bars
When bars are compressed the expression to calculate the splicing length is:
l 0c = l b,nec l 0c,min where:
l 0c,min is the larger value among 0.6 l b , 15 and 200 mm.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
9.5.2.4 Transversal reinforcement in lapped joints, in isolated bars
9.5.2.4.1 Joints of tensioned bars of main reinforcement (see figure 9.4)
When < 16 mm or the proportion of lapped bars in the same section are smaller than 25% the transversal
reinforcement should comply with provisions in 9.4.2.6.
When 16 mm or the proportion of the lapped bars in the same section is larger or equal to 25% the
transversal reinforcement should
be able to resist a force equal to that of a lapped bar considering the parallel legs at the plane of the
joints;
be made up of closed bars if the distance between the two bars that are nearer to two laps in the
same section is < 10 ( = diameter of the lapped bar);
to concentrate prevailingly in the one third extreme edges of the joints.
9.5.2.4.2 Joint of compressed bars (see figure 9.4)
The criteria defined above should be maintained with at least one bar of transversal reinforcement positioned
4 beyond the extremities of the joint.
Figure 9.4 - Transversal reinforcement in joints
9.5.2.4.3 Joints of bars in secondary reinforcements
Transversal reinforcements have to comply with provisions in 9.4.2.6.
9.5.2.5 Splicing joints in bundles of bars
Joints may be made using splicing in bundles of bars when respecting the established in 9.5.2, the bars that
integrate the bundle are joined one by one whenever resulting more than four bars in every section of the
joined bundle.
Joints of the bars of bundles should be separated from one another 1.3 times the length of the individual joint
of each one.
9.5.3 Union through mechanical devices
For this type of joint the mechanical devices should have greater resistance than joined bars.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
9.5.4 Joints through welding
Welded joints require special care regarding welding procedures and should comply with the control
specifications for heating and cooling of the bar in compliance with the specific standards.
The welded joints may be:
butt weld, by fusion, for bar diameters not smaller than 10 mm;
butt weld, with electrodes for bar diameters not smaller than 20 mm;
by lapped splicing with at least two fillet welds, each one of them having a length not smaller than 5 and
at a distance from each other of at least 5 (see figure 9.5);
with other bars placed side by side (joint cover), with longitudinal fillet welds, making the barycenter axis
of the set coincide with the longitudinal axis of the joined bars and each fillet having the length of at least 5
(see figure 9.5).
Figure 9.5 - Joints through welding

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Joints through welding may be used in all bars of transversal sections of structural elements.
Joints that from center to center are distant at least 15 from each other measured along the axis of the bar
should be considered as being in the same section.
The strength of each jointed bar is to be considered without reduction.
In the case of tensioned bars and when accidental loads prevail, the resistance should be reduced by 20%.
9.6 Prestressing
9.6.1 Prestressing forces
9.6.1.1 Generalities
The mean force in the prestressed reinforcement in the abscissa x and at the time t is obtained by the
expression:
Pt (x) = P0 (x) Pt (x) = Pi P0 (x) Pt (x)
where:
P0(x) = Pi P0(x)
9.6.1.2 Limit values of forces in prestressed reinforcement
During prestressing, the tension force on the reinforcement may not exceed the values established by the
limitation of the stresses in steel that correspond to this transitory situation as shown in 9.6.1.2.1 and 9.6.1.2.3.
After prestressing operations are finished, safety procedures should take into consideration the limit states
according to section 10.
9.6.1.2.1 Limit values during prestressing operations
The following provisions of this Code should be considered:
a) pre-tensioned reinforcement:
during application of Pi, force, the pi stress of the prestressed reinforcement at the output of the
tensioning apparatus should comply with the limits 0.77 fptk and 0.90 fpyk for steels listed in the
regular relaxation class and 0.77 fptk and 0.85 fpyk for steels listed in the low relaxation class;
b) post-tensioned reinforcement:
during application of Pi, force, the pi stress of the prestressed reinforcement at the output of the
tensioning apparatus should comply with the limits 0.74 fptk and 0.87 fpyk for steels listed in the
regular relaxation class and 0.74 fptk and 0.82 fpyk for steels listed in low relaxation class;
for CP-85/105 steels, supplied in bars, the limits are 0.72 fptk and 0.88 fpyk, respectively.
9.6.1.2.2 Limit values at the end of prestressing operations
At the end of prestressing operations the p0(x) stress of pre-tensioned or post-tensioned reinforcement
arising from the force P0(x), cannot exceed the limits determined in 9.6.1.2.1-b).

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
9.6.1.2.3 Tolerance of execution
If irregularities in prestressing are found when force Pi, is applied, caused by execution faults in the structural
elements having post-tensioned reinforcement, the tension force in any tendon may be augmented, limiting pi
stress to the values established in 9.6.1.2.1-b) to which up to 10% may be added until the limit of 50% of the
tendons, whenever the safety of the structure is guaranteed, especially near the anchorages zones.
9.6.1.3 Representative values of prestressing forces
The mean values calculated in accordance with 9.6.1.1 may be applied in the calculation of the characteristic
values of the hyper static effects of prestressing.
For constructions in general the characteristic values Pk,t(x) of prestressing forces may be considered as equal
to the mean value, except when the maximum loss [P0(x) + Pt(x)]max is larger than 0.35 Pi. In this case and
in the case of special constructions that should be designed in accordance with specific Codes considering
the upper and lower values of the prestressing force, the following values should be used:
[Pk,t(x)]sup = 1.05 Pt(x)
[Pk,t(x)]inf = 0.95 Pt(x)
9.6.1.4 Design values of prestressing forces
The design values of prestressing forces in time t are obtained by the expression:
Pd,t(x) = p Pt(x)
and the value of p is defined in section 11.
9.6.2 Introduction of prestressing forces
The stresses induced in concrete by prestressing anchorages may only be considered when linearly
distributed in the transversal section of the structural element at a distance of the extremities of these
reinforcements, called regularization distance. This is determined based on provisions in 9.6.2.2 and 9.6.2.3.
The passive reinforcement in these zones where the forces are applied should be calculated in accordance
with the provisions in section 21.
9.6.2.2 Cases of post-tensioning
In the case of post-tensioned elements, the regularization distance of stresses may be determined assuming
that the diffusion of the force takes place from the anchorage, in the inner side of an opening angle , so that
tg = 2/3 (see figure 9.6).
When such diffusion, arising from the web attains the mean plane of the flange it may be assumed that the
diffusion along the flange also occurs in accordance with the angle .

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Figure 9.6 - Introduction of prestressing
9.6.2.3 Cases of pre-tensioning
In the case of pre-tensioned elements the regularization distance l p is obtained by the expression:
l p = h 2 + (0,6l bpt ) 2 l bpt
where:
h is the height of the structural element.
For non-rectangular sections the regularization length may be calculated similarly to the indicated in 9.6.2.2.
9.6.3 Losses of prestressing force
The design should foresee the loss of prestressing forces regarding the initial value applied by the stressing
device that occurred before the transference of prestressing to the concrete (initial losses in pretensioning);
during this transfer (immediate losses) and in the passing of time (progressive losses).
9.6.3.2 Initial losses of prestressing force
Initial losses are those that take place in pre-tensioning before liberation of the tensioning device originated
from:
a) friction at the deviation points of the polygonal reinforcement, of which the assessment should be carried
out experimentally in function of the type of deviation apparatus used.
b) sliding of wires at anchorage of which the determination should be experimental, or the values supplied by
the manufacturer of the anchorage devices should be adopted
c) initial relaxation of the reinforcement, function of the time spent between the elongation of the
reinforcement and the liberation of the tensioning device.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
d) initial shrinkage of the concrete taking into consideration the time spent between pouring of concrete of
the structural element and the liberation of the tensioning device.
The assessment of the initial losses should take into account the effects caused by temperature when the
concrete is thermally cured.
9.6.3.3 Immediate losses of prestressing force
9.6.3.3.1 Case of pre-tensioning
The variation of prestressing force in pre-tensioned structural elements should be calculated in the elastic
state, taking into consideration the deformation of the homogenous section at the time the prestressing is
applied to concrete due to its shortening. The modulus of elasticity of concrete to be considered corresponds
to the prestressing date and should be corrected in case of thermal curing.
9.6.3.3.2 Cases of post-tensioning
For regular prestressing systems, immediate losses are caused by immediate shortening of the concrete; by
friction between tendons and sheaths or concrete; by sliding of the tendons at the anchorage; and by
adjustment of the anchorage devices as detailed in 9.6.3.3.2.1 to 9.6.3.3.2.3.
9.6.3.3.2.1 Immediate shortening of concrete
In post-tensioned structural elements, the successive prestressing of each one of the n tendons causes an
immediate deformation in the concrete and, consequently, the loosening of the tendons that were first
prestressed. The mean loss of prestress, per tendon, may be calculated by the expression:
p ( cp + cg )(n 1)
p =
2n
9.6.3.3.2.2 Losses through friction
In post-tensioned structural elements the loss through friction may be determined by the expression:
[
P ( x ) = Pi 1 e (+ kx ) ]
where
Pi is the value defined in 9.6.1.2.1;
x is the abscissa of the point where P is measured from the anchorage, in meters;
is the sum of the deviation angles between the anchorage and the point of abscissa x, in radians;
is the apparent friction coefficient between tendon and sheath. In the lack of experimental data, it may
be estimated as follows: (values in 1/radians):
= 0.50 between tendon and concrete (without sheath);
= 0.30 between bars or wires deformed or indented and metallic sheath;
= 0.20 between smooth wires or strands and metallic sheath.
= 0.10 between smooth wires or strands and lubricated metallic sheath;
= 0.05 between strand and polypropylene lubricated sheath;

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
k is the coefficient of loss per meter caused by unintentional curves of the tendon. In the lack of
experimental data the value 0.01 (1/m) may be used.
9.6.3.3.2.3 Losses by sliding of tendons in anchorage and anchorage accommodation
Losses have to be determined experimentally or the values suggested by manufacturers of the anchorage
devices adopted.
9.6.3.4 Progressive losses
9.6.3.4.1 Generalities
Partial and total values of progressive losses of prestress arising from shrinkage and creep of the concrete
and relaxation of the prestressing steel should be determined taking into consideration the interaction of these
causes. The processes shown from 9.6.3.4.2 to 9.6.3.4.5 may be used. In these processes it is assumed that
there is bonding between reinforcement and concrete and that the structural element maintains its state 1.
9.6.3.4.2 Simplified process in single operation situations
This case is applicable when the following conditions are met:
a) pouring of concrete of the structural element, as well as prestressing are carried out in phases close
enough to ignore the reciprocal effects of one phase on the other.
b) tendons have spaces among each other that are sufficiently short in regard to the height of the section of
the structural element so that their effects are assumed as equivalent to one single tendon, whereas the
area of the transversal section is equal to the sum of the areas of the sections of the component tendons.
The tendon is located at the resultant position of internal forces acting on the component tendons
(resultant tendon).
In this case it is assumed that at time t the progressive losses and deformations of concrete and prestressed
steel, in the position of the resultant tendon, with stresses in concrete c,p0g positive for compression and with
stresses in steel p0 positive for tension, are given by:
cs (t , t 0 )E p p c,p0g (t , t 0 ) p0 (t , t 0 )
p (t , t 0 ) =
p + c p p
p0 p (t , t 0 )
pt = (t , t 0 ) + p
Ep Ep
c , p0 g c (t , t 0 )
ct = (t , t 0 ) + c + cs (t , t 0 )
E ci28 E ci28
where:
(t,t0) = ln [ 1 (t, t0)]
c = 1 + 0,5 (t, to)
p = 1 + (t,t0 )
Ac
= 1 + ep2
Ic
p= Ap/Ac

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Ep
p =
Eci28
where
c,p0g is the stress on the concrete adjacent to the resultant tendon and is caused by prestress and
permanent load mobilized at the moment t0, being positive in case of compression.
(t,t0) is the creep coefficient of concrete at the instant t for prestress and permanent load, applied at the
instant t0;
p0 is the stress on the active reinforcement due to prestress and mobilized permanent load at instant t0,
being positive in case of tension.
(t,t0) is the creep coefficient of steel
cs(t,t0) is the shrinkage at instant t, diminished of the shrinkage occurred until instant t0, in accordance to
8.2.11;
(t,t0) is the relaxation coefficient of steel at instant t for prestress and mobilized permanent load at
instant t0;
c(t,t0) is the variation of the tension in the concrete adjacent to the resultant tendon between t0 and t;
p(t,t0) is the stress variation in the prestressing steel between t0 and t;
p is the geometrical rate of the prestress reinforcement.
ep is the resultant tendon eccentricity in regard to the barycenter of the concrete section.
Ap is the area of the transversal section of the resultant tendon;
Ac is the area of the transversal section of the concrete.
Ic is the central moment of inertia of the concrete section .
9.6.3.4.3 Approximated process
This process may replace the established in 9.6.3.4.2, whenever the same application conditions are satisfied
and the shrinkage does not vary more than 25% from the value [ 8 x 10 (,t0)].
5
The absolute value of loss of stress due to creep, shrinkage and relaxation, with c,p0g in megapascal and
considered positive if compressive, is obtained by:
a) for steels with normal relaxation (NR) (values in percentage)
p (t , t 0 ) p
= 18,1 + [(t , t 0 )]1,57 (3 + c,p0g )
p0 47
b) for steels with low relaxation (LR) (values in percentage)
p (t , t 0 ) p
= 7,4 + [(t , t 0 )]1,07 (3 + c,p0g )
p0 18,7
where

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
p0 is the stress on the prestress reinforcement due exclusively to the prestress force at instant t0.
9.6.3.4.4 General method of calculation
When the permanent actions (permanent load or prestress) are applied in phases and in different periods of
time (thus not complying with provisions in 9.6.3.4.2) the creep of each one of the concrete layers and the
relaxation of each tendon should be considered separately:
Isolated relaxation of each tendon may be considered independently of the posterior application of other
permanent loads.
9.6.3.4.5 Relaxation of steel
The intensity of the relaxation of steel should be determined through the coefficient (t,t0) calculated by:
pr (t, t 0 )
(t , t 0 ) =
pi
where
pr (t,t0) is the loss of stress due to pure relaxation from the instant t0 of the reinforcement elongation
until the considered instant t .
The mean values of relaxation measured after 1,000 h at a constant temperature of 20C, for losses
concerning the basic values of initial stress ranging from 50% to 80% of the characteristic strength fptk (1000),
are reproduced in table 8.3.
The values corresponding to times different from 1,000 h, always at 20C, may be determined through the
following expression, where time should be expressed in days.
0,15
t t0
(t, t 0 ) = 1000
41,67
For stresses lower than 0.5 fptk, it is admitted that there is no loss of tension per relaxation.
Intermediary stresses among the values in table 8.3 may be carried out by a linear interpolation.
It may be assumed that for infinite time the value of (t,t0) is given by (t, t0) 2.5 1000.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
10 Safety and limit states
10.1 Safety criteria
The safety criteria in this Code are based in ABNT NBR 8681.
10.2 Limit states
For this Code the ultimate limit states and the serviceability limit states are to be considered.
10.3 Ultimate limit states (ULS)
The safety of concrete structures should always be verified regarding the following ultimate limit states:
a) ultimate limit state of loss of equilibrium of the structure, assumed as rigid body;
b) ultimate limit state of exhaustion of the structural resistance capacity, either in its whole or in parts due to
the applied normal and tangential forces considering the redistribution of internal forces and moments
always respecting the capacity of plastic adaptation defined in section 14 and assuming, in general, the
verifications carried out separately of the tangential and normal applied internal forces. However when the
interaction among them is important it will be explicitly indicated in this Code;
c) ultimate state of exhaustion of the resistance capacity of the structure, either in its whole or in parts taking
into acount the effects of second order;
d) ultimate limit state caused by dynamic requirements (see section 23);
e) ultimate limit state of progressive collapse;
f) ultimate state of exhaustion of the resistance capacity of the structure, either in its whole or in parts taking
into acount the expositon to fire, according to NBR 15200;
g) ultimate state of exhaustion of the resistance capacity of the structure, taking into acount seismic actions,
according to NBR 15421;
h) other ultimate limit states that may eventually occur in special cases.
10.4 Serviceability limit states (SLS)
Serviceability limit states are those related to the durability of the structures, appearance, comfort of the user,
and their good functional use regarding the users and also the machines and equipment.
The safety of the concrete structures may require the verification of some serviceability limit states whose
concepts are found in section 3.
In special constructions it might be necessary to verify the safety regarding other serviceability limit states not
defined in this Code.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
11 Actions
F - Actions (see tables 11.3 and 11.4)
M1d,min - Minimum first order total moment that allows meeting the verification of localized imperfections in a
story of a column.
f1 - Part of the partial safety factor of actions f, which considers the variability of actions
f2 - Part of the partial safety factor of actions f, which considers the simultaneity of actions
f3 - Part of the partial safety factor of actions f, which considers the deviations generated in constructions and
the approximations carried out in designs from the point of view of internal forces and moments
q Partial safety factor for direct variable actions
qs - Partial safety factor for the stabilizing variable action
gn - Partial safety factor for non-stabilizing permanent actions
g - Partial safety factor for permanent indirect actions (shrinkage or creep)
q - Partial safety factor for variable indirect actions (temperature)
n - Adjustment coefficient of f, which considers the increase in the probability of occurring significant relative
deviation in construction (applied in walls and columns with dimensions lower than certain values)
1 - Non-alignment in respect to plumb of a continuous vertical element
oj - Reduction factor of combination for direct variable actions
o - Reduction factor of combination for indirect variable actions
o Reduction factor of combination for ULS
1 - Reduction factor of frequent combination for SLS
2 - Reduction factor of quasi-permanent combination for SLS
11.2 Actions to consider
11.2.1 Generalities
In structural analysis the influence of all actions that could lead to significant effects on the safety of the
structure under examination should be considered, including the possible ultimate limit states and
serviceability limit states.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
11.2.2 Classification of actions
The actions to be considered in accordance to ABNT NBR 8681 are classified as permanent, variable and
exceptional.
For each type of construction the actions to be considered should comply with their peculiarities and
applicable Codes.
11.3 Permanent actions
11.3.1 Generalities
Permanent actions are those that take place with practically constant values during all the required life of the
construction. Actions that increase in time tending towards a constant limit value are also considered as
permanent.
For safety reasons, permanent actions should be considered with their most unfavorable representative
values.
11.3.2 Direct permanent actions
Direct permanent actions are those made up by the structure dead weight and by the weights of fixed
constructive elements and of permanent installations.
11.3.2.1 Dead weight
In the common constructions it is admitted that the weight of the construction itself is evaluated in compliance
with 8.2.2.
Special concretes should have their specific mass experimentally determined in each particular case (see
ABNT NBR 12654) and the effect of reinforcements evaluated as shown in 8.2.2.
11.3.2.2 Weight of fixed constructive elements and of permanent installations
The specific masses of the construction materials in use may be evaluated based on the values shown in
ABNT NBR 6120.
The weights of permanent installations are considered with the nominal values indicated by the respective
suppliers.
11.3.2.3 Permanent thrusts
The earth thrusts as well as other granular materials are considered as permanent when it is assumed that
they are not removable.
The characteristic values Fk.sup or Fk.inf c should be considered as representatives in compliance with
ABNT NBR 8681.
11.3.3 Indirect permanent actions
The indirect permanent actions are deformations imposed by shrinkage or creep of concrete, displacements in
support, geometric imperfections and prestressing.
11.3.3.1 Concrete shrinkage
The specific deformation regarding concrete shrinkage may be calculated as shown in annex A.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
In most cases it may be calculated in a simplified manner through interpolation using table 8.1. This table
supplies the upper characteristic value of shrinkage strain between the instants t0 and t, cs (t,t0), in some
usual situations (see section 8).
In cases of current constructions of reinforced concrete, in function of restriction to concrete shrinkage

imposed by the reinforcement meeting the minimum specified by this Code, the value of cs (t, t0) may be
adopted as being equal to 15 x 10 . This value assumes structural elements of usual dimensions, ranging
-5
from 10 cm to 100 cm and subjected to an environmental humidity not lower than 75%.
The characteristic lower value of concrete shrinkage is considered as null.
In structural elements permanently submitted to different humidity conditions in opposed faces, linear variation
of shrinkage is assumed along the thickness of the structural element between the two values corresponding
to each of the faces.
11.3.3.2 Concrete creep
The deformations due to concrete creep may be calculated as shown in annex A.
In cases in which the stress c(t0) does not vary significantly, it is allowed that these deformations are
calculated in a simplified manner by the expression:
(t , t 0 )
c (t , t 0 ) = c (t 0 ). 1 +
E (
ci 0t ) E ci ( 28 )
where:
c (t,t0) is the total specific deformation of concrete between the instants t0 and t;
c (t0) is the stress in concrete due to applied load at t0;
(t, t0) is the limit into which the coefficient of creep caused by applied load at t0 tends.
The value of (t, t0).can be calculated with the interpolation of values of table 8.1. This table supplies the
upper characteristic value of (t, t0) in some usual situations (see section 8).
The lower characteristic value of (t,t0) is considered null.
11.3.3.3 Displacements of supports
Displacements of supports should only be considered when generating significant internal forces regarding
the set of other actions, that is to say, when the structure is hyperstatic and very rigid.
The displacement of each support should be evaluated in function of physical characteristics of the
corresponding foundation material. The upper characteristic values ksup, should be considered as
representatives of theses displacements and calculated with a pessimistic evaluation of rigidity of the
foundation material, which corresponds theoretically to quantile 5% of the respective probability distribution.
The lower characteristic values may be considered as null.
The set of these displacements is considered as a single action assuming that all of them are augmented by
the same partial safety factor.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
11.3.3.4 Geometrical imperfections
In the verification of the ultimate limit state of the reticulated structures, geometrical imperfections of the axis
of the structural elements of the unloaded structure should be considered. These imperfections may be
divided into two groups: global and local imperfections.
11.3.3.4.1 Global imperfections
In the global analysis of these structures whether they are braced or not, the vertical non-alignment of the
elements should be considered as shown in figure 11.1.
Where:
1min = 1/400 for structures with fixed nodes;
1min = 1/300 for structures of mobile nodes and local imperfections;
1mx=1/200;
H is the total height of the construction in meters;
n is the number of alignments of columns.
Figure 11.1 - Global geometrical imperfections
The non-alignment should not necessarily be superposed with wind loads. Between the two, wind and non-
alignment, only the most unfavorable should be considered and it may be defined as that which causes the
greatest total moment in the base of the construction.
11.3.3.4.2 Local imperfections
In the case of elements that connect braced columns to bracing columns, usually beams and slabs, only the
tension caused by a braced column out of plumb should be taken into consideration [see figure 11.2-a)].
In order to verify a one story column, non-alignment or lack of straightness effects of the column axis should
be considered [see figures 11.2-b) and 11.2-c) respectively].

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Figure 11.2 - Local geometrical imperfections
The consideration of the lack of straightness along the story of a column is assumed as sufficient in regular
situations.
11.3.3.4.3 Minimum moment
The effect of local imperfections in columns may be replaced in reticulated structures by considering the first
order minimum moment as follows:
M1d,mn = Nd (0.015 + 0.03h)
where:
h is the total depth in meters of the transversal section in the considered direction.
In regular reticulated structures it is assumed that the effect of local imperfections is complied with whenever
this value of the minimum total moment is taken into account. To this moment second order moments from
section 15 should be added.
11.3.3.5 Prestress
The prestress action should be considered for all prestressed structures, including, besides the prestress
elements themselves, also those that undergo indirect action of prestress, that is to say, of prestress
hyperstatic internal forces.
The value of the prestress force should be calculated taking into consideration the initial force and the
prestress losses as established in 9.6.3.
The required internal forces generated by the action of this prestress may be directly calculated based on the
eccentricity of the tendon in the transversal section of the structural element and of the prestress force or
through a set of equivalent external loads or still through the introduction of the imposed deformations
corresponding to the pre-elongation of the reinforcements.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
11.4 Variable actions
11.4.1 Direct variable actions
The direct variable actions are made up by the variable loads foreseen in the use of the construction and by
the action of wind and water, always in accordance with the specific Brazilian Codes.
11.4.1.1 Variable loads foreseen in the use of the construction
The variable loads usually correspond to:
vertical loads in the use of the of construction;
mobile loads, considering the vertical impact;
lateral impact;
braking or accelerating longitudinal force;
centrifuge force.
These loads should be applied in the most unfavorable positions in regard to the element in study, except
when simplifications are allowed in the specific Brazilian Codes.
11.4.1.2 Action of wind
The internal forces caused by the action of wind should be taken into consideration and it is recommended
that it be determined in accordance with ABNT NBR 6123; allowing the use of simplified calculations foreseen
in specific Brazilian Standards.
11.4.1.3 Action of water
The level of water adopted for the design of reservoirs, tanks, decanting and others should be equal as much
as possible as well as compatible with the overflow system, considering only the coefficient f = f3 = 1.2
according to ABNT NBR 8681 (see 11.7 and 11.8). In the structures in which rainwater is withheld, a layer of
water corresponding to the effectively guaranteed drainage level for the construction should be provided by
the construction.
11.4.1.4 Variable actions during construction
Structures in which all the constructive phases do not have their safety guaranteed by the verification of the
ready construction work, should have included in the design the verification of the more significant
constructive phases as well as their influence in the final phase.
The verification of each one of these phases should be carried out considering the part of the structures
already constructed as well as the auxiliary temporary structures with their respective dead weights. Besides,
the variable loads of construction should also be taken into consideration.
11.4.2 Indirect variable actions
11.4.2.1 Uniform temperature variations
The variation of the structure temperature globally caused by the variation of temperature in the atmosphere
and by the incidence of direct sunrays is considered as being uniform. It depends on the place the
construction is to be located and on the dimension of its structural elements.
Generically speaking the following values may be adopted:

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
a) for structural elements whose smaller dimension is not larger than 50 cm, an oscillation of temperature
around a mean of 10C to15C;
b) for massive or void structural elements with completely closed empty spaces, of which the smaller
dimension is not higher than 70 cm it is assumed that this oscillation may be reduced respectively from
5C to 10C;
c) for structural elements whose smaller dimension is between 50 cm to 70 cm it is assumed that a linear
interpolation between the above mentioned values could be adopted.
The choice of a value between these two limits may be carried out considering 50% of the difference between
the mean temperatures in summer and winter, in the construction site.
In buildings having several stories the construction requirements in this Code should be met so as to minimize
the effects of variations of temperature on the construction structure.
11.4.2.2 Non-uniform variations in temperature
In the structural elements in which the temperature may have a distribution significantly different from the
uniform, the effects of these distributions should be taken into consideration. In the lack of more accurate data,
a linear variation among the values of temperature adopted may be assumed, whenever the variation of the
temperature considered between one face of the structure and the other is not lower than 5C.
11.4.2.3 Dynamic actions
When the structure due to its usage conditions is subjected to shocks or vibrations, the respective effects
should be considered in the internal forces and moments determination as well as in the possibility of fatigue;
these conditions should be taken into account when dimensioning structural elements, in accordance with
section 23.
11.5 Exceptional actions
In the design of structures subjected to exceptional load conditions of which the effects may not be controlled
by other means, exceptional actions with values defined, in each particular case, in the specific Brazilian
Codes should be taken into consideration.
11.6 Values of actions
11.6.1 Characteristic values
The characteristic values Fk of the actions are established in this section as a function of the variability of their
intensities.
11.6.1.1 Permanent actions
In the case of permanent actions the characteristic values should be adopted as equal to the mean values of
the respective probability distributions whether they are upper or lower characteristic values.
These values are defined in this section or in the specific Brazilian Codes as ABNT NBR 6120.
11.6.1.2 Variable actions
The characteristic values of the variable actions Fqk, established by consensus and indicated in specific
Brazilian Codes correspond to values whose unfavorable probabilities of being overcome range from25% to
35% during a period of 50 years, which means that the characteristic value Fqk is the value having a mean
return period ranging from 200 to 140 years respectively. .

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
These values are defined in this section or in the specific Brazilian Codes as ABNT NBR 6120.
11.6.2 Representative values
The actions are quantified by their representative values, which could be:
a) characteristic values as shown in 11.6.1;
b) exceptional conventional values which are values defined for exceptional actions;
c) reduced values resulting from the combination of actions such as:
d) verification of the ultimate limit states when the action under consideration combines with the principal
action. The reduced values are determined based on the characteristic values by the expression 0Fk,
that considers as very low the probability of simultaneous occurrence of characteristic values of two or
more variable actions of different natures (see 11.7);
e) verifications of serviceability limit states. These reduced values are determined based on the
characteristic values by the expressions 1Fk e 2Fk, which estimate frequent and quasi-permanent
values, respectively, of an action that accompanies main action.
11.6.3 Design values
The design values Fd of the actions are obtained based on the representative values multiplying them by the
respective partial safety factor f defined in 11.7.
11.7 Partial safety factor of actions
Actions should be augmented by the coefficient f , whose values are established in 11.7.1, 11.7.2 and in
tables11.1 and 11.2.
f = f1 f2 f3
11.7.1 Partial safety factors of actions at ultimate limit states (ULS)
The basic values for verification are the ones presented in the tables 11.1 and 11.2 forf1.f3 and f2,
respectively.
For the structural walls with width lower than 19 cm but not lower than 12 cm, and for columns having their
smaller dimension lower than 19 cm, the coefficient has to be augmented by the adjustment coefficient n (see
13.2.3). This correction should be undertaken due to an increase in the probability of occurrence of relative
deviances and defects in the construction.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Table 11.1 - Coefficient f = f1.f3
Actions
Permanent Variable Prestress Settlement of

Combination of
support and
actions (g) (q) (p) shrinkage
U F G T U F U F
1)
Regular 1.4 1.0 1.4 1.2 1.2 0.9 1.2 0
Specials or for
1.3 1.0 1.2 1.0 1.2 0.9 1.2 0
construction
Exceptionals 1.2 1.0 1.0 0 1.2 0.9 0 0

Where:
U refers to unfavorable, F refers to favorable, G represents the variable loads in general and T refers to
temperature.
1)
For permanent loads with small variability, as the dead weight of structures, especially the precasted, this
coefficient may be reduced to 1.3.
Table 11.2 - Values of coefficient f2
f2
Action
o 1 2
1)
Places in which there is neither a prevalence

of weight of equipment that remains fixed for
0.5 0.4 0.3
a long time nor the presence of many
2)
people ,
Variable loads Places where the weight of the equipment
in buildings that remain fixed for a long period of time
0.7 0.6 0.4
prevail as well as the permanence of many
3)
people
Libraries, file furniture, workshops and
0.8 0.7 0.6
parking
General dynamic pressure of wind in the
Wind 0.6 0.3 0
structures
Uniform variations in temperature in regard
Temperature 0.6 0.5 0.3
to the local annual mean
For values of 1 regarding bridges and especially fatigue problems, see section 23.
1)
2)
Residential buildings.
3)
Commercial offices, stations and public buildings.
The values in tables 11.1 and 11.2 may be changed in special cases not discussed in this document, in
accordance to ABNT NBR 8681.
The value of partial safety factor of permanent loads having the same origin, given a specific load, should be
the same all along the structure. The only exception is the case of verification of stability as a rigid body.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
11.7.2 Partial safety factor of actions in serviceability limit states (SLS)
In general the partial safety factor of actions in serviceability limit states is given by the expression:
f = f2
where:
f2 has a variable value in accordance with the desired verification (table 11.2):
f2 = 1 for unfrequent combinations;
f2 = 1 for frequent combinations;
f2 = 2 for quasi-permanent combinations.
11.8 Combination of actions
11.8.1 Generalities
A load is defined by the combination of actions that have significant probabilities of acting simultaneously on
the structure during a foreseen period of time.
The combination of actions should be carried out in such a way that the more unfavorable effects on the
structure may be determined. The verification of the safety regarding ultimate limit states and ultimate
serviceability limit states should be carried out based on combinations of ultimate and service states,
respectively.
11.8.2 Ultimate combinations
An ultimate combination may be classified as regular, special or of construction and exceptional.
11.8.2.1 Regular ultimate combinations
Each combination should include the permanent actions and the principal variable action with their
characteristic values as well as the other variable actions considered secondary with their combination values
reduced as in ABNT NBR 8681.
11.8.2.2 Special or for construction ultimate combinations
Each combination has to include the permanent actions and the special variable action when it exists, with
their characteristic values and the other variable actions having not to be disregarded probability of occurring
simultaneously, with their reduced combination values as in ABNT NBR 8681.
11.8.2.3 Exceptional ultimate combinations
Each combination has to include the permanent action and the special variable action, when it exists, with
their representative values and other variable actions with not to be disregarded probability of occurring
simultaneously, with their reduced combination values, according to ABNT NBR 8681. In these cases are
included, among others, seism, fire and progressive collapse.
11.8.2.4 Usual Ultimate combinations
These combinations are easy to see at table 11.3.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Table 11.3 Ultimate combinations
Ultimate
combinations Description Design of requirements
(ULS)
Exhaustion of resistance
capacity in structural elements Fd = gFgk + gFgk + q (Fq1k + ojFqjk) + q o Fqk
1)
of reinforced concrete
Exhaustion of resistance When necessary prestress force should be considered as
capacity in structural elements an external load with values Pkmx and Pkmin for unfavorable
Regular of prestressed concrete and favorable forces, respectively, as defined in section 9.
S (Fsd) S (Fnd)
Loss of equilibrium as a rigid Fsd = gs Gsk + Rd
body
Fnd = gn Gnk + q Qnk qs Qs,min, where: Qnk = Q1k + oj
Qjk
Special or of
2) Fd = g Fgk + g Fgk + q (Fq1k + oj Fqjk) + q o Fqk
construction
2)
Excepcionals Fd = g Fgk + g Fgk + Fq1exc + q oj Fqjk + q o Fqk
where:
Fd refers to the calculation of actions for ultimate combination;
Fgk represents the direct permanent actions;
Fk represents the permanent indirect actions as shrinkage Fgk and variables as temperature Fqk;
Fqk represents the direct variable actions out of which Fq1k is chosen as the principal;
g, g, q, q see table 11.1;
oj, o - see table 11.2;
Fsd represents the stabilizing actions;
Fnd represents the non-stabilizing actions;
Gsk is the characteristic value of the stabilizing permanent action;
Rd is the resistance internal force considered as stabilizing, whenever applicable;
Gnk is the characteristic value of the non-stabilizing permanent action;
m
Qnk = Q1k + ojQjk ;
j=2
Qnk is the characteristic value of the non-stabilizing variable actions;

Q1k is the characteristic value of the non-stabilizing variable action considered as the principal;
oj and Qjk are the other non-stabilizing variable actions, considered with their reduced value;
Qs,min is the minimum characteristic value of a stabilizing variable action that follows mandatorily a non-stabilizing variable
action.
1)
In general combinations should be considered in which favorable effects of permanent loads is reduced by considering
g = 1.0. In case of regular structures of buildings, these combinations considering g reduced (1.0) do not need to be
taken into consideration.
When Fg1k or Fg1exc act during a very short period of time or have a very low probability of occurring, 0j, may be
2)
replaced by 2j. That might be the case for fire and seismic actions.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
11.8.3 Service combinations
11.8.3.1 Classification
They are classified in accordance with their permanence in the structure and should be verified as is
established in the following:
a) quasi-permanent: they can act during a great part of the required life of the structure and its consideration
may be needed to verify the limit state of excessive deformations;
b) frequent: they are repeated several times during the required life of a structure and its consideration may
be needed for the verification of the limit states in the formation of cracks, of width of cracks and of
excessive vibrations. They can also be taken into considerations to verify the limit states of excessive
deformations caused by wind or temperature, which may damage walls;
c) unfrequent: they take place sometimes during the required life of the structure and its consideration may
be necessary in the verification of the limit state of formation of cracks.
11.8.3.2 Usual service combinations
These combinations are easy to see at table 11.4.
Table 11.4 - Service combinations
Service
combinations Description Requirements calculations
(SC)
Quasi-
permanent In nearly permanent service combinations all variable
service actions are considered with their quasi-permanent Fd, ser = Fgi,k + 2j Fqj,k
combinations values 2 Fqk
(QPC)
Frequent In frequent service combinations the action of the
service principal variable Fq1 is used with its frequent value 1
Fd,ser = Fgik + 1 Fq1k + 2j Fqjk
combinations Fq1k and all other variable actions are used with its
(FC) quasi-permanent values 2 Fqk
Unfrequent In the unfrequent service combinations the principal
service variable action Fq1 is used with its characteristic value of
Fq1k and all other actions are used with the frequent Fd,ser = Fgik + Fq1k + 1j Fqjk
combinations
(UC) values 1 Fqk
where:
Fd,ser is the design value of actions for service combinations;
Fq1k is the characteristic value of direct principal variable actions;
1 is the reduction factor of frequent combinations for ULS;
2 is the reduction factor of quasi-permanent combinations for ULS.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
12 Resistances
f Resistance (strength) (see section 8)
m1 - Part of partial safety factor of resistance m that considers the strength variability of materials under
consideration.
m2 - Part of partial safety factor of resistances m that considers the difference between the resistance of
materials in the specimen and in the structure.
m3 - Part of partial safety factor of resistances m that considers the deviations generated during construction
and the approximations in design from the strength point of view.
12.2 Characteristic values
The characteristic values fk of resistances are those which, in a set of materials, have a certain probability of
being unfavorably exceed regarding safety.
Usually, it is interesting to use the lower characteristic of resistance fk,inf, which value is smaller than the mean
resistance fm, although sometimes, it is interesting to use the upper characteristic resistance fk,sup, which value
is higher than fm.
Regarding this Code, the lower characteristic resistance is assumed as being the value that has only 5%
probability of not being attained by the elements of a specific set of materials.
12.3 Design values
12.3.1 Design resistance
The design resistance fd is given by the expression:
fk
fd =
m
12.3.2 Design resistance stresses
Design resistance stresses Rd or Rd are established to determine the required design resistances that do not
depend directly of the resistances measured conventionally in patterned specimens of the materials used. The
values of Rd and Rd are established in each particular case based on the theories of resistance of the
structural elements under consideration.
12.3.3 Design resistance of concrete
In the specific case of design resistance of concrete (fcd), some additional details are necessary, as following:
a) when the verification is carried out in a date j equal or longer than 28 days, the adopted expression is:

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
f ck
f cd =
c
In this case, the control of resistance to concrete compression should be done at the 28th day, so as to
confirm the value of fck used in the design;
b) when the verification is carried out in a date j shorter than 28 days, the adopted expression is:
f ckj f ck
f cd = 1
c c
where 1 the relation fckj/fck is given by:
1 = exp { s [ 1 (28/t)
1/2
]}
where:
s = 0.38 for CPIII and IV cement concrete
s = 0.25 for CPI and II cement concrete;
s = 0.20 for CPV-ARI cement concrete;
t is the effective age of the concrete calculated in days.
This verification should be carried out at t days for loads used until this date.
The verification of the total of applied loads also has to be carried out at the 28th days.
In this case, the control of the resistance to concrete compression should be carried out in two different dates,
at t days and at the 28th day, so as to confirm the values of fckj and fck adopted in the design.
12.4 Partial safety factors of resistances
The resistances should be diminished by the coefficient:
m = m1 m2 m3
12.4.1 Partial safety factors of resistances in the ultimate limit state (ULS)
The values to verify the ultimate limit state are indicated in table 12.1.
Table 12.1 - Coefficient values c e s
Concrete Steel
Combinations
c s
Regular 1.4 1.15
Specials or for construction 1.2 1.15
Exceptionals 1.2 1.0

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
In order to verify structural elements in which unfavorable conditions are foreseen (for example, bad
transportation conditions, manual consolidation or deficient pouring of concrete due to concentration of
reinforcements) the coefficient c should be multiplied by 1.1.
For precast and pre-fabricated structural elements the ABNT NBR 9062 should be consulted.
It is admitted that in case of cores extracted from the structure, the value of c should be divided by 1.1.
In small constructions it is assumed the usage of steel CA-25 without the quality control defined in
ABNT NBR 7480 whenever the partial safety factor for steel is multiplied by 1.1.
12.4.2 Partial safety factors of resistances in the serviceability limit state (SLS)
The limits established for the serviceability limit states (see sections17, 19 and 23) do not have to be
diminished, therefore, m = 1.0.
12.5 Safety verification
In the verification of safety, the concrete structures should comply with the constructive and analytic safety
conditions.
12.5.1 Safety constructive conditions
The following requirements should be complied with:
detailing criteria in sections 18 and 20;
Codes of materials control, specially ABNT NBR 12655;
execution control of the construction according to ABNT NBR 14931 and specific Brazilian Codes.
12.5.2 Analytic safety conditions
The analytic safety conditions defines that resistances can not be lower than internal forces and moments and
should be verified regarding all the limit states and all the specified loadings for the type of construction; under
any case the following condition has to be complied with:
Rd Sd
For the verification of the ultimate limit state of loss of equilibrium as a rigid body Rd and Sd should assume the
design values of the stabilizing and destabilizing actions, respectively.
12.5.3 Design resistance
Design resistance values of internal forces are determined based on design values of the resistances of
materials adopted in the project or of the design resistance stresses as defined in 12.3.1.
For specific applications see sections 17, 19 and 23.
12.5.4 Design internal forces and moments
The design internal forces and moments are calculated according to the structural analysis so as to consider
the combination of the actions under consideration (see section 14).

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
13 Limits for dimensions, displacements and width of cracks
wk - Characteristic width of cracks on the surface of concrete
13.2 Limit dimensions
13.2.1 Introduction
The provisions on the minimum limited values for dimensions of concrete structural elements have the
purpose to avoid an unacceptable performance of structural elements and to enable adequate construction
conditions.
13.2.2 Beams and deep-beams
Transversal section of beams cannot have width smaller than 12 cm and deep-beams lower than15 cm.
These limits may be reduced when an absolute minimum of 10 cm in exceptional cases is taken into account.
The following conditions are mandatory:
a) placement of reinforcements and their interference with reinforcements of other structural elements,
complying with the spaces and covers defined in this Code;
b) pouring and vibration of concrete in accordance with ABNT NBR 14931.
13.2.3 Columns and wall-columns
The transversal section of massive columns and wall-columns, whatever their shapes, should not be smaller
than 19cm.
In special cases it is allowed to consider dimensions between 19 cm and 12 cm, if the actions to be
considered are multiplied in the dimensioning by an additional coefficient n in accordance with table 13.1 and
2
section 11. In any case, no column with transversal section having an area lower than 360 cm is allowed.
Table 13.1 Values of the additional coefficient n
b
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12
cm
n 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35
where:
n = 1.95 0.05 b;
b is the smaller dimension of the transversal section of the column.
OBSERVATION: The coefficient n should multiply the final required internal forces when dimensioning the
columns.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
13.2.4 Slabs
13.2.4.1 Solid slabs
In solid slabs the following limit minimum thickness should be complied with:
a) 5 cm for roof slabs that are not cantilever;
b) 7 cm for floor or cantilever roof slabs;
c) 10 cm for slabs that support load of vehicles which total weight is smaller or equal to 30 kN;
d) 12 cm for slabs that support load of vehicles which total weight is higher than 30 kN;
l l
e) 15 cm for prestressed slabs supported by beams for simply-supported floor slabs and for
42 50
continuous floor slabs;
f) 16 cm for flat slabs and 14 cm for slabs with drop panels.
13.2.4.2 Ribbed slabs
The flange thickness, when there are no embedded horizontal pipes, should be larger or equal to1/15 of the
distance among ribs and not smaller than 3 cm.
When there are embedded pipes of a maximum diameter of 12.5 mm, the absolute minimum value should be
4 cm.
The thickness of the ribs should not be lower than 5 cm.
Ribs with thickness lower than 8 cm should not have compression reinforcements.
For the design of ribbed slabs the following conditions should be complied with:
a) for slabs with spaces between axis of ribs lower or equal to 65 cm it is not necessary to verify the bending
of the flange and it is allowed to consider the same criteria as for the slabs to verify the shearing of ribs.
b) for slabs with spaces among axis of ribs ranging from 65 cm and 110 cm, the bending of the flange and
the ribs should be verified regarding their shearing in the same way as beams; this verification for slabs is
allowed whenever the spaces among the axis of the ribs is up to 90 cm and the mean width of the ribs is
larger than 12 cm;
c) in case of ribbed slabs with spaces among the axis of ribs larger than 110 cm, the flange should be
designed as a solid slab supported by a grid of beams, always taking into account their minimum
thickness limit.
13.2.5 Holes and openings
When holes and openings are foreseen in design of structural elements, their effect in resistance and
deformation should be verified and the applicable limits in this Code should not be exceeded, in accordance
with provisions in 21.3.
In general, holes have small dimensions if compared to the structural elements whereas openings do not. A
set of holes located very near to each other should be considered as an opening.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
13.2.5.1 Holes that cross beams in the direction of their width
In any case, the minimum distance of a hole to the nearest face of the beam should be at least equal to 5 cm
and twice the cover for this face. The remaining section in this zone, after subtracting the area occupied by the
hole, should be able to resist internal forces foreseen in design besides enabling a good pouring of concrete.
So as to avoid verification, the following conditions should be followed simultaneously:
a) holes in zones of tension should be placed at a distance from the support of at least 2 h, where h is the
depth of the beam;
b) maximum dimension of the hole of 12 cm and h/3;
c) minimum distance of 2 h between the faces of the holes, in a same span,
d) sufficient covers and non-sectioning of reinforcements (see section 7).
13.2.5.2 Openings that cross slabs in the direction of their thickness
In flat or drop panel slabs the verification of resistance or deformation described in 13.2.5 should be always
carried out.
Other types of slabs may be exempted of this verification, however, they should be reinforced in two directions
and the following conditions should be verified simultaneously:
a) the dimensions of openings should correspond at most to 1/10 of the smaller span (lx) (see fig. 13.1);
b) the distance between the face of an opening and the free edge of a slab should be equal to or larger than
1/4 of the span in the direction considered;
c) the distance between faces of adjacent openings should be larger than half of the smaller span.
Figure 13.1 - Limit dimensions for slab openings exempting verification
13.2.6 Embedded pipes
Embedded pipes are openings that follow the longitudinal axis of linear elements, contained in an element of
surface or immersed in the interior of an element of volume.
Structural elements should not have embedded pipes in the following cases:
a) pipes without adequate insulation or special verification when aimed at the passage of fluids having
temperature higher than 15C of the environmental temperature;

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
b) pipes designated to support internal pressures higher than 0.3 MPa;
c) pipes embedded in concrete columns either immersed in the material or in internal void spaces of
structural elements, without openings for drainage.
13.3 Limit displacements
Limit displacements are practical values used to verify, in service, the limit state of excessive deflections of a
structure. In regard to this Code four basic groups are classified and are listed below, and should comply with
the limits established in table 13.2:
a) sensorial acceptability: the limit is characterized by undesirable vibrations or disagreeable visual effect.
The limitation of deflection to prevent these vibrations, in special situations of usability, should comply
with section 23;
b) specific effects: the displacements may impede the adequate utilization of the construction;
c) effects in non-structural elements: structural displacements may cause mal-functioning of the elements
which, although not being a part of the structure, are connected to it;
d) effects in structural elements: the displacements may affect the behavior of structural elements, causing
deviation regarding the adopted design hypotheses. If the displacements are relevant to the considered
element, their effects on the stresses or on the structure stability should be considered and added to the
adopted structural model.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Table 13.2 - Limits for displacements

Displacements to be
Type of effects Reason for limits Examples Limit displacements
considered
Visible displacements in
Sensorial Visual Total l /250
structural elements
acceptability
Other Vibrations felt on the floor Due to variable loads l /350
Surfaces that
should drain Roofs and balconies Total l /2501)
water
Stories that Total l /350+ camber2)
Structural Gymnasium and bowling
should remain Occurred after the
effects when in alleys l /600
flat construction of the floor.
service
Elements that In accordance with
supports Occurred after the leveling of recommendations of
Laboratories
sensitive the equipment. equipment
equipment manufacturers
l /5003) or
Masonry, window
After construction of the wall 10 mm or
frameworks and finishing
= 0.0017 rad
4)
Light partitions and

Occurred after the installation l /2503) or
telescopic window
of partition 25 mm
Walls frameworks.
Caused by the action of wind H/1 700 or
Lateral movement of 5)
for frequent combination Hi/850 between
buildings 6)
Effects in non- (1=0.30) stories
7)
structural Vertical thermal Caused by differences in l /400 or
elements movements temperature 15 mm
Horizontal thermal Caused by differences in
Hi/500
movements temperature
Occurred after construction of
Ceiling Glued finishing l /350
ceiling
Hanged or jointed Displacement occurred after
l /175
finishing construction of ceiling
Trails out of line Displacement caused by
Traveling cranes H/400
actions arising from braking.
Effects in Deviation
If the displacements are relevant to the considered element, their effects on the
structural regarding the
stresses or on the structure stability should be considered and added to the
elements adopted design
adopted structural model.
hypotheses
1)
Surfaces should be sufficiently steep or the foreseen displacement compensated by camber and should not accumulate water.
2)
Displacements may be partially compensated by the specification of camber. However, the isolated action of the camber cannot
cause a plane deviation larger than l /350.
3)
Span l should follow the direction in which the wall or partition is being built.
4)
Rotation in the elements that support walls.
5)
H is the total height of the building and Hi is the difference of level between two neighboring stories.
6)
This limit is appropriate for the lateral displacement between two consecutive stories caused by horizontal actions. Displacements
caused by axial deformations in columns should not be included. The limit is also applicable to the relative vertical displacement of
the extremities of lintels connected to two bracing walls when Hi represents the lintel length.
7)
The value l refers to the distance between the external column and the first internal column.
OBSERVATIONS:
1 All the limit values of displacements include span elements l supported at both edges by supports that do not move. When dealing
with cantilevers, the equivalent span to be taken into consideration should be twice the length of the cantilever.
2 In surface elements, the prescribed limits consider that the value l is the smaller span, except in cases of verification of walls and
partitions in which the direction of the wall or partition is being built, limiting this value to twice the smaller span.
3 The total displacement shall be obtained from the combination of characteristic actions increased by the coefficients defined in
section 11.
4 Excessive displacements may be partially compensated by camber deflection.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
13.4 Control of cracking and protection of reinforcement
13.4.1 Introduction
Cracking in structural elements of reinforced concrete is unavoidable due to the great variability and the low
resistance of concrete in regard to tension; even under service loads (usage), critical values of tension
stresses are attained. Aiming to obtain a good performance regarding the protection of reinforcement from
corrosion and the sensorial acceptability of the users, the purpose is to try to control cracks.
In structures with active reinforcement (prestressed concrete) there also exists the possibility of cracks
although with less probability. In this case, the cracks may be more damaging because there is the possibility
of stress corrosion in reinforcement.
In general, the existence of crackings with openings that are within the limits established in 13.4.2 in well
designed and constructed structures submitted to loads foreseen in the codes do not show loss of durability or
of safety in regard to ultimate limit states.
The cracks may also occur as the result of other causes as for example, thermal plastic shrinkage or due to
internal chemical reactions in the concrete in the first ages; these cracks should be avoided or limited through
technological means, as for example, when proportioning the proportioning and curing of the concrete.
13.4.2 Limit for cracks and protection of reinforcements regarding durability
The maximum characteristic width of cracks wk, when not exceeding values of 0.2 mm to
0.4 mm, (as in table 13.3) under the action of frequent combinations, does not have significant importance in
the corrosion of passive reinforcement.
In active reinforcements there is the possibility of occurring stress corrosion, these limits have to be more
restrictive and direct function of the environment, which is given in the environmental aggression class (see
section 6).
In table 13.3 limit values for characteristic width wk of cracks are given, as well as other procedures aiming to
guarantee adequate protection to reinforcement regarding corrosion. However, due to the current state of
knowledge and to the high variability of properties involved, these limits should be observed only as criteria for
an adequate design of structures.
Although the estimates of the width of cracks shown in 17.3.3.2 have to comply with these limits, one should
expect that the widths of real cracks strictly correspond to their estimated values, that is to say, real cracks
may eventually exceed these limits.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Table 13.3 - Durability requirements regarding cracks and protection of the reinforcement in
accordance to classes of environmental aggressions
Class of environmental
Type of structural Requirements Combination of actions in
aggression (CEA) and type of
concrete regarding cracks service
prestress
Plain concrete CEA I and CEA IV None --
CEA I SLS-W wk 0.4 mm
Reinforced concrete CEA II and CEA III SLS-W wk 0.3 mm Frequent combination
CEA IV SLS-W wk 0.2 mm
Pre-tensioning with CEA I
Prestressed concrete
or
level 1 SLS-W wk 0.2 mm Frequent combination
Post-tensioning with CEA I
(partial prestress)
and II
Verify the two following conditions
Pre-tensioning with CEA II
or SLS-F Frequent combination
level 2
Post-tensioning with CEA III
(limited prestress) 1) Quasi-permanent
and IV SLS-D
combination
Verify the two following conditions
Pre-tensioning with CEA III
level 3 SLS-F Rare combination
and IV
(complete prestress) 1)
SLS-D Frequent combination
1)
according to the designer, SLS-D may be replaced by SLS-D with ap = 25 mm (figure 3.1).
OBSERVATIONS
1 Definitions of SLS-W, SLS-F and SLS-D may be found in 3.2.
2 for classes of environmental aggression CEA-3 and 4 it is required that strands that do not bind have a special
protection in the area of their anchorages.
13.4.3 Control of cracks regarding sensorial acceptability and usage
Whenever cracks affect the functionality of the structure, as for example, in the case of waterproofing of
reservoirs, smaller limits have to be chosen for the width of cracks. For more effective control of cracking in
these structures it is convenient the use of prestressing.
Control of cracking for acceptable sensitivity refers to the situation in which crackings may cause
psychological discomfort to users, although not representing less safety to the structure. More severe limits for
width of cracks may be established with the contracting party.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
14 Structural analysis
a - Distance between sections of null bending moment
bef - Effective width
bf - Collaborating width of the flange of a beam
bw - Width of the web of beams
d - Effective depth of section
l 0 - Distance between faces of two consecutive supports
l e - Equivalent length of compressed elements (columns) assumed as connected at both extremities
rinf - Rigidity of the lower length of column in a lower length of column-beam-upper length of column connection.
rsup - Rigidity of the upper length of column in a lower length of column-beam-upper length of column
connection.
rvig - Rigidity of a beam in a lower length of column-beam-upper length of column connection
t - Length of support parallel to the span of the beam being analyzed
x - Depth of the neutral axis
I - Moment of inertia
pl - Plastic rotation
M - Part of moment reduced at rounding
14.2 General principles of structural analysis
14.2.1 Objectives of structural analysis
The purpose of structural analysis is to determine the effects of actions in a structure aiming at verifications of
ultimate limit states and serviceability limit states.
Structural analysis allows establishing the distribution of internal forces, stresses, deformations and
displacements in a part or in the whole structure.
14.2.2 Necessary premises to structural analysis
The analysis should be carried out with a realistic structural model that allows a clear representation of all the
paths followed by the actions until reaching the supports of the structure and it also allows the representation
of a non-linear response of materials.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
In more complex cases, the interaction ground-structure should be included in the model.
In the case of application of prestress, an adequate displacement for its effective realization should be
guaranteed, thus minimizing the transmission of undesired internal forces to adjacent elements.
Complementary local analysis should also be carried out when the hypothesis of a plane section is
inapplicable (see sections 21 and 22).
Complementary local analysis should also be carried out whenever the non-linearity caused by cracking is
significant, as for example, in the evaluation of deflections.
14.3 Basic hypotheses
14.3.1 Equilibrium conditions
The equilibrium conditions should be complied with:
Equilibrium equations may be defined based on the undeformed geometry of the structure (theory of first
order) except in cases when the displacements significantly alter the internal forces (theory of second order,
see section 15).
14.3.2 Compatibility conditions
When compatibility conditions are not verified in the limit state under consideration, measures should be
adopted so as to guarantee an adequate ductility of the structure in the ultimate limit state whereas
guaranteeing an adequate performance in serviceability limit states.
14.3.3 Monotonical loads
Monotonical loads are assumed until the considered limit state in regular structures is reached, whenever the
response to cycles of charge and discharge in service does not submit the concrete to compressive stresses
above 0.5 fck.
14.4 Structural elements
Structures may be designed as a composition of basic structural elements classified and defined in
accordance with their geometrical shape and structural function, complying with 14.4.1 and 14.4.2.
14.4.1 Linear elements
Linear elements are those in which the longitudinal length exceeds at least three times the larger dimension of
the transversal section; also called bars. They are designated according to their structural function from
14.4.1.1 to 14.4.1.4.
14.4.1.1 Beams
Linear elements in which bending prevails.
14.4.1.2 Columns
Linear elements of straight axis, usually vertically placed, in which normal compressive forces prevail.
14.4.1.3 Ties
Linear elements of straight axis in which normal tension forces prevail.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
14.4.1.4 Arches
Curved linear elements in which normal compressive forces prevail, whether or not simultaneously acting with
internal bending moments which actions are contained in their plane.
14.4.2 Surface elements
Elements in which one dimension, usually called thickness, is relatively small as opposed to the others, whose
designations are presented from 14.4.2.1 to 14.4.2.4.
14.4.2.1 Plates
Elements having plane surfaces mainly subjected to actions normal to their plane. Concrete plates are usually
called slabs. Plates with thickness larger than 1/3 of the span should be studied as thick plates.
14.4.2.2 Plates loaded in their own plane
Elements having plane surfaces, mainly subjected to actions contained in their plane. Concrete plates whose
smaller span is three times the largest dimension of the transversal section are usually called deep-beams.
14.4.2.3 Shells.
Elements of non-plane surfaces.
14.4.2.4 Wall-columns
Wall-columns are elements having plane surfaces or cylindrical shells, usually placed vertically and
prevailingly submitted to compression. They may be made up of one or more associated surfaces. In order to
obtain a wall-column, in one of these surfaces, the smaller dimension should be smaller than 1/5 of the largest,
both considered in the transversal section of the structural element.
14.5 Types of structural analysis
14.5.1 Generalities
From the point of view of design, structural analysis may be obtained by one of the methods described from
14.5.2 to 14.5.6, and are differentiated from one another by the assumed behavior of structural materials,
taking into consideration their corresponding limitations.
In situations of verification of design or of already constructed buildings, lack of conformity identified through
one of these models of structural analysis impugnation will not be accepted. To accept these designs or
constructions it is enough to prove its conformity with the code using one of the other structural analysis
models.
All these models assume, in regard to this section, that structure displacements are small.
14.5.2 Linear analysis
The elastic-linear behavior for materials is accepted.
In global analysis, the geometrical characteristics may be determined by the gross section of concrete of
structural elements. In order to calculate displacements in local analysis, eventual occurrence of cracks
should be taken into consideration.
The values for the modulus of elasticity and the Poissons coefficient should be adopted in accordance with
8.2.8 and 8.2.9, and the secant modulus of elasticity of Ecs.should be considered.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
The results of a linear analysis are usually used to verify the serviceability limit states.
It is possible to extend the results for verifications of ultimate limit states even with elevated stress levels
whenever the ductility of the structural elements is guaranteed.
14.5.3 Linear analysis with redistribution
In linear analysis with redistribution, the effects of actions determined through a linear analysis are
redistributed in the structure for load combinations of ULS.
In this case, the equilibrium and ductility conditions should mandatorily be complied with.
All internal forces should be redesigned so as to guarantee the equilibrium of each of the structural elements
and of the structure as a whole. The redistribution effects should be considered in all aspects of the structural
project, including anchorage conditions and plan of reinforcements as well as the internal forces to be
anchored.
Special care should be taken regarding loads having great variability.
The verifications of load combinations of SLS or fatigue may be based on linear analysis without redistribution.
In general, no redistribution of internal forces in service is recommended.
14.5.4 Plastic analysis
The structural analysis is called plastic when non-linearity may be considered, assuming materials with perfect
rigid-plastic or elasto-plastic behavior.
The plastic analysis of reticulated structures may not be done when:
a) second order global effects are considered;
b) there is no sufficient ductility so as to attain the adopted configurations.
In cases of cyclical loads with possibility of fatigue, plastic design should be avoided, and provisions in section
23 should be complied with.
14.5.5 Non-linear analysis
In non-linear analysis the non-linear behavior of materials is considered.
All the geometry of the structure as well as all its reinforcements have to be known so as to apply non-linear
analysis, as the response of the structure depends on how it was reinforced.
Equilibrium conditions as well as compatibility and ductility have to be complied with. Non-linear analysis may
be adopted to verify ultimate limit states as well as serviceability limit states.
14.5.6 Analysis through physical models
In the analysis using physical models, the structural behavior is determined based on experiments using
concrete physical models, considering the criteria of mechanical similarity.
The methodology used in the tests should ensure the possibility of obtaining a correct interpretation of the
results.
In this case, the interpretation of the results should be warranted by a theoretical model of equilibrium in the
critical sections and by a statistical analysis of the results.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Whenever an adequate estimate of the variability of results is possible, the safety measures described in this
Code in sections 11 and 12 may be adopted. Whenever it is only possible to estimate the mean value of
results, the referred safety margin should be enlarged including, verifying the variability estimated by other
means.
It is mandatory to obtain results for all the ultimate limit states and serviceability limit states to be used in the
analysis of the structure.
All the actions, conditions and possible influences that may occur during the required life of the structure
should be adequately reproduced in the tests.
This kind of analysis is appropriated whenever the design models are insufficient or are outside the scope of
this Code.
For load tests the provisions in section 25 should be complied with.
14.6 Structures of linear elements
14.6.1 Basic hypothesis
Structures or parts of structures that may be assimilated to linear elements, (beams, columns, ties, arches,
frames, grids, trusses) may also be analyzed admitting the following hypothesis:
a) maintenance of the plane section after deformation;
b) representation of the elements by its longitudinal axes;
c) length limited by the centers of the supports or by crossing an axis of other structural element.
14.6.2 Characterization of geometry
14.6.2.1 Rigid parts
The parts of linear elements pertaining to the area in common with the crossing of two or more elements may
be considered as rigid (nodes of finite dimensions) as shown in figure 14.1.
Figure 14.1 - Rigid portions
14.6.2.2 Collaborating width in beams of T sections
When the structures are modeled without an automatic consideration of the joint actions of slabs and beams,
this effect may be considered through the use of a collaborating width of the slab associated to the beam, thus
configuring a transversal section T.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
The consideration of section T may be made so as to establish the distributions of internal loads, stresses,
deformations and displacements in structures in a more realistic way.
The collaborating width bf is given by the width of beam bw added of a maximum of 10% of the distance a
between points of null bending moment, for each side of the beam having a collaborating slab.
Distance a may be estimated in function of length l of the considered leg presented as following:
Beams simply supported as in: a = 1.00 l ;
length with moment in only one extremity: a = 0.75 l ;
length with moments in both extremities: a = 0.60 l ;
length in cantilever: a = 2.00 l .
Alternatively, the calculation of distance a may be made or verified through an examination of the diagrams of
bending moments of the structure.
In case of continuous beams, it is allowed to design them with a unique collaborating width for all sections,
including the supports under negative moments, whenever this width is designed based on the portion of
positive moments where the width results minimum.
The limits b1 and b3 should be respected according with figure 14.2.
Figure 14.2 - Width of the collaborating flange
When slabs present openings or interruptions in the area of the collaborating flange the variation of the
effective width (bef) of the flange should comply with maximum bf and with the limitations imposed by the
openings as shown in figure 14.3.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Figure 14.3 - Effective width with opening
14.6.2.3 Haunches and sudden variation of sections
In the occurrence of haunches or sudden variations of transversal sections only the effective part of the
section shown in figure 14.4 should be considered.
Figure 14.4 - Effective depth and width of transversal sections
14.6.2.4 Effective spans of beams
Effective spans may be calculated by:
l ef = l 0 + a1 + a2
with a1 being equivalent to the smaller value between (t1/2 and 0,3h) and a2 being equal to the smaller value
as shown in figure14.5.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
a) Support of extreme span b) Support of intermediary span
Figure 14.5 - Effective span
14.6.3 Rounding of the diagram of bending moments
The diagram of bending moments may be rounded over the supports and points of application of forces
considered as concentrated and at nodes of frames. This rounding operation may be done in an approximate
manner as shown in figure 14.6.
Figure 14.6 - Rounding of the diagram of bending moments

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
14.6.4 Linear analysis with or without redistribution
The general conditions expressed in 14.5.2 and 14.5.3 as well as the specific conditions shown in14.6.4.1 and
14.6.4.3 may be applied to structures of linear elements.
14.6.4.1 Rigidity values
To calculate the rigidity of structural elements it is allowed, as approximation, to use the secant modulus of
elasticity (Ecs) (see 8.2.8) and the moment of inertia of the concrete gross section.
To verify deflections, the criteria in 17.3.2.1 may be used, for mandatory consideration of cracking and creep.
14.6.4.2 Restrictions to redistribution
The redistribution of bending moments and torsion of columns, linear elements with prevalence of
compression and corbels and brackets may only be adopted when originated by redistributions of moments of
beams connected to them.
When approximate procedures are used, only a small redistribution is allowed in structures with mobile nodes
(see 14.6.4.3).
The implicit redistributions in an analysis of second order should take place according to section 15.
14.6.4.3 Limits for redistribution of moments and ductility conditions
The rotation capacity of structural elements is function of the ULS neutral axis position. The smaller x/d , the
larger this capacity will be.
To increase ductility of structures in the support areas of beams or connections with other structural elements,
even when redistribution of required internal forces were not made, the position of ULS neutral axis should
comply with the following limits:
a) x/d 0.50 for concretes with fck 35 MPa; or
b) x/d 0.40 for concretes with fck > 35 MPa.
These limits may be altered if special details of reinforcements are used, for example, those leading to
confinement in these areas.
When redistribution is made through the reduction of bending moment from M to M, in a specific transversal
section, the relation between the redistribution coefficient and the position of the neutral axis in this section
x/d for the reduced moment M should be obtained as follows.
a) 0.44 + 1.25 x/d for concrete with fck 35 MPa; or
b) 0.56 + 1.25 x/d for concrete with fck > 35 MPa.
The redistribution coefficient should also comply with the following limits:
a) 0.90 for structures with mobile nodes;
b) 0.75 in any other case.
A redistribution that does not comply with the limits imposed by this Code may be used whenever the
structure is designed using non-linear or plastic analysis, with an explicit verification of the rotation capacity of
the plastic hinge.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
To verify the ultimate limit states a plastic analysis of the structure may be adopted with a simulation of plastic
hinge located in critical sections.
The verification of the rotation of plastic hinges that correspond to the adopted mechanisms is mandatory and
cannot exceed the capacity of plastic rotation of the corresponding transversal sections.
This limit, which is a function of the relative depth x/d of the neutral line in the section for the bending moment
considered in the plastic hinge, may be determined through figure 14.7, for ratio a/d equal to 6 (where: a is the
distance between points of null moment in the area that contains the plastified section). For other a/d,
relations, multiply the values obtained in figure 14.7 by (a / d ) / 6 .
Traced curves:
Curve 1: for x/d 0.17 1 000 pl = 2 d/x
Curve 2: for x/d 0.15 1 000 pl = 3.5 d/x
Figure 14.7 - Rotation capacity of plastic hinges
The verification of the rotation capacity of plastic hinges should be done for each one of the load combinations
under consideration. Special attention should be given to the verification of cracking in the plastic hinges for
service conditions.
Non-linear analysis is allowed for verification of ultimate limit states and for serviceability limit states.
14.6.7 Usual structures of buildings - Allowed approximations
14.6.7.1 Continuous Beams
In the classic model of continuous beams only simply supported on columns the study of vertical loads
observing the need to follow the additional corrections are mandatory:
a) positive moments smaller than those that would be obtained in the case of a perfect continuity of the
beams at the internal supports may not be considered;
b) when the beam is built in the intermediate column and the width of the support measured in the direction
of the axis of the beam, is larger than the fourth part of the height of the column, it cannot be considered a
negative moment of a smaller absolute value than the perfect continuity of this support;

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
c) when an accurate design of the influence of solidarity of columns with the beams, a bending moment
equal to the moment of a perfect continuity multiplied by the coefficients in the extreme supports should
be considered as follows:
in the beam:
rinf + r sup
r vig + rinf + r sup
in the upper stretch of the column:
r sup
r vig + rinf + r sup
in the lower stretch of the column:
r inf
r vig + r inf + r sup
where :
Ii
ri =
li
where:
ri is the rigidity of the element i in the considered node estimated as in figure 14.8.
Figure 14.8 - Approximation in extreme supports
Alternatively, the model of continuous beams may be improved if we consider the solidarity of the columns
with the beams through the introduction of rigidity in bending at extreme and intermediary columns.
The adequate level of the model used should be verified through a careful analysis of the results obtained
Some measures should be applied so as to guarantee the equilibrium of the moments at the nodes beam-
column, especially in the simpler models such as continuous beams.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
14.6.7.2 Grids and spatial frames
The floors of the buildings may be modeled as grids, to study the vertical loads considering the rigidity in
bending of the columns in an analogous way to the one indicated for continuous beams.
In an approximate manner in spatial grids and frames the rigidity in torsion of the beams after cracking may be
reduced using 15% of the elastic rigidity, except for structural elements with limited or complete prestress
(levels 2 or 3).
Opened profiles in thin walls may be modeled considering provisions in 17.5.
14.6.7.3 Consideration of variable loads
For structures in buildings in which the variable loads are at most equal to 20% of the total load, the structural
analysis may be done without considering the alternation of the loads.
14.6.7.4 Structure of lateral bracing
The slab of a pavement may be considered as a totally rigid plate in its plane if it does not have large
openings and whose larger side of the rectangle circumscribed to the floor plan does not exceed three times
the smaller side.
14.7 Structures with plate elements
Plate structures may be analyzed if the following hypotheses are admitted:
a) plane sections remain plane after deformation, in sufficiently narrow strips;
b) representation of the elements by their medium plane.
14.7.2 Characterization of the geometry
14.7.2.1 Haunches and sudden variations in thickness
The effective height to be considered is shown in figure 14.4.
14.7.2.2 Effective spans of slabs or plates
When the supports may be considered as rigid enough in regard to vertical translation, the effective span
should be calculated by the following expression:
lef = l0 + a1 + a2
The values of a1 e a2, in each edge of the span may be determined by appropriate values for ai in figure 14.5.
14.7.3 Linear analysis with or without redistribution
Methods based on the elasticity theory are applied to plate structures with a Poissons coefficient equal to 0.2.
The general provisions shown in 14.5.2 and 14.5.3 should be complied with as well as the specific conditions
included in 14.7.3.1 and 14.7.3.2

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
14.7.3.1 Rigidity values
To verify the limit state of excessive deformation limit, the rigidity values of stage I may be used taking into
consideration the secant modulus of elasticity of concrete whenever the bending moments are smaller than
those of cracking.
The eventual effects of cracking and time dependent deformation should be considered in an analogous way
to the procedures defined in section 17.
14.7.3.2 Redistribution of moments and ductility conditions
When redistribution is done, the relation between coefficient (according to 14.6.4.3) and the: position of the
neutral axis is obtained by:
a) 0.44 + 1.25 x/d for concrete with fck 35 MPa;
b) 0.56 + 1.25 x/d for concrete with fck > 35 MPa.
The redistribution coefficient should also comply with the limit 0.75.
To consider the ultimate limit state the analysis of the internal forces may be done through the theory of plastic.
So as to guarantee the appropriate ductility conditions without an explicit verification of the capacity of plastic
rotation described in 14.6.5 the position of the neutral axis should be limited as:
x/d 0.30
For rectangular slabs, in the lack of good experimental data, the ratio of 1.5:1 should be addopted between
moments at the edge (with continuity and support that cannot be displaced) and moments at the span.
Special care should be taken in regard to cracking and the verification of SLS deflections, especially if the
relation among moments are very different from the results of elastic analysis.
Non-linear analysis are allowed to verify the ultimate limit states as well as for serviceability limit states.
14.7.6 Solid slabs
14.7.6.1 Reactions at the supports
To calculate the reactions at the supports of rectangular solid slabs with uniform loads, the following
approximations may be done:
a) the reactions in each support correspond to the acting loads in triangles or trapezoid shapes are
determined through plastic lines of rupture that correspond to the analysis made with the criteria
described in 14.7.4; these reactions can be, in an approximated manner, considered as uniformly
distributed on the structural elements that support them;
b) when the plastic analysis is not done, the lines of rupture may be approximated by inclined straight lines
from the vertex, with the following angles:
45 between two supports of the same type;
60 from the support considered as fixed if the ot her is considered as simply supported;

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
90 from the support, when the neighboring edge is free,
14.7.6.2 Approximations for diagrams of bending moments
When permanent loads prevail the neighboring slabs may be considered as isolated. In this case the
compatibility of the moments at the supports is achieved in an approximated manner.
In the case of plastic analysis, the compatibilizatoin may be achieved through the change of the ratios
between moments at edges and spans in an interactive procedure until equilibrated values at the edges are
obtained.
In a simplified manner, it is allowed to adopt the higher value of a negative moment instead of equilibrating the
moments of different slabs on a common edge.
14.7.7 Ribbed slabs
Ribbed slabs are slabs cast in place or precast ribs whose tension zone for positive moments is located in the
ribs, so that among them inert material may be placed.
Slabs with pre-cast ribs should comply with the provisions of the applicable specific Brazilian Codes.
All the provisions above regarding slabs can be considered as valid whenever complying with conditions
defined in 13.2.4.2.
When these hypotheses are not verified, the ribbed slab should be analyzed considering the top layer as a
solid slab supported by a grid of beams.
The ribbed uni-directional slabs should be calculated according to the direction of the ribs, disregarding the
transversal rigidity and torsion rigidity.
The bi-directional rib slabs, (according to ABNT NBR 14859-2) may be calculated, for purposes of required
internal forces and moments, as solid slabs.
14.7.8 Flat and drop panel slabs
Flat slabs and drop panel slabs are directly support by columns.
The structural analysis of flat and drop panel slabs should be accomplished using an adequate numeric
procedure as for example, finite differences, finite elements and contour elements.
Whenever the columns are placed in orthogonal lines, in a regular manner and with spans having small
differences in length, the design of internal forces can be done through an approximate elastic process with
redistribution which means adopting multiple frames in each direction so as to obtain internal forces and
moments.
For each frame the total load should be considered. The distribution of the moments obtained for each
direction according to the indicated strips in figure 14.9 should be done as follows:
a) 45% of the positive moments for the two internal strips;
b) 27,5% of the positive moments for each one of the external strips;
c) 25% of the negative moments for each one of the two internal strips;
d) 37.5% of the negative moments for each one of the external strips.
The connections between columns and slabs should be carefully analyzed with special attention to the cases
where there is no symmetry in shape or load of the slab in regard to the support.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
The moments of connection between slabs and extreme columns should be considered mandatory.
The punching shear should be verified in accordance with 19.5.
Figure 14.9 - Strips of slabs for internal forces and moments distribution in multiple frames
14.8 Structures containing other elements
14.8.1 Deep-beams and wall-columns
For deep-beams and wall-columns either linear analysis or non-linear analysis may be used.
Linear analysis, in most cases, should be made using the adequate numeric procedure, as for example, finite
differences, finite elements and contour elements.
To consider a deep-beam or a wall-column as component of a structural system, it is allowed to represent it by

a linear element whenever the deformation through shearing is considered and an adjustment of its bending
rigidity to its real behavior is done.
14.8.2 Blocks
Linear, plastic or non-linear analysis may be used for blocks.
The linear analysis, in most cases, should be undertaken considering an adequate numeric procedure, as for
example, finite differences and finite elements.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
15 Instability and second order effects
To simplify the understanding and therefore the application of the concepts in this section, the more frequently
used symbols or those who could cause doubts are defined as follows.
The symbols presented in this section follow the same concepts used in section 4. Thus, the subscripted
symbols have the same meaning presented in 4.3.
e1 - Eccentricity of first order (accidental eccentricities are not included)
ecc - Eccentricity caused by the phenomenon of creep
(EI)sec - Secant rigidity
(EI)eq - Equivalent rigidity
Myid - Bending moment of first order in strip i, direction y
- Parameter of instability
z - Factoring coefficient of first order final global internal forces and moments to obtain the final ones of
second order
- Non-dimensional secant rigidity
1 - Limit value for slenderness ratio (contemplates accidental eccentricities of columns)
1 - Vertical continuous element out of plumb
- One story column out of plumb, of height l
15.2 Field of application and fundamental concepts
This section focuses prevailingly the structures made up of bars that undergo compression and bending in
which the contribution of torsion in the effects of second order may be ignored.
The principles of this section may be used for other types of structural elements as shells, walls, and wall-
beams.
In structures of reinforced concrete the ultimate limit state of instability is attained whenever an increase of
loading intensity and consequent deformations takes place there are elements submitted to bending and
compression in which the increase of the resistance capacity becomes lower than the increase of the internal
forces and moments.
There are three types of instability in structures:
a) in structures without initial geometrical imperfections (for special loading cases), loss of stability caused by
bifurcation of the equilibrium (buckling) may occur;
b) in special situations (flattened structures), loss of stability without bifurcation of the equilibrium through a
sudden passage from one configuration to another, that is, to the reverse of the former one (limit point
with reversion) may occur;
c) in structures of materials with non-linear behavior with initial geometric imperfections there is no loss of
stability by bifurcation of the equilibrium; however a loss of stability may occur when there is an increase

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
loading intensity, the increase of the resistance capacity of the structure becomes lower than the increase
of internal forces and moments ( limit point without reversion).
Cases a) and b) may occur in structures of materials with linear or non-linear behavior.
Effects of the second order are those that are added to those obtained in an analysis of the first order (in
which the equilibrium of the structure is studied in the initial geometrical configurations), when the analysis of
the equilibrium considers the deformed configuration.
Effects of the second order, whose determination should consider the non-linear behavior of materials, may
be ignored whenever they do not represent an addition higher than 10% in reactions and in relevant internal
forces and moments of the structure.
15.3 Basic principle for calculation
Structural analysis with effects of second order should ensure that for the most unfavorable combinations of
design actions neither loss of stability nor exceeding its capacity of design resistance occur.
The physical non-linearity present in structures of reinforced concrete should be mandatorily considered.
Deformability of elements should be calculated based on stress-deformation diagrams of the materials listed
in section 8. The maximum stress of concrete should be equal to 1.10 fcd, already included the effect of
sustained load (Rsch) and of steel equal to fyd, with ULS values of c and s.
The verification of the resistance capacity should be made according to provisions in section 17.
Eventual uncertainties in characteristics of structure supports and of deformability of the structure should be
considered in the analysis.
15.3.1 Moment-curvature relations
The principal effect of non-linearity may, in general, be considered through the construction of moment-
curvature relation for each section, with assumed reinforcement known, and for values of the acting normal
force.
The formulation of safety in which the second order effects of the factored loads by f/f3, that later are factored
by f3, with f3 = 1.1, may be considered using the following equation:
Sd,tot = 1,10 Sd (F)
where:
f n
F = f F gk + F q 1k + oj F qjk
1,10 1,10
2
To choose the combination of actions and coefficients f and 0, see section 11.
Therefore the moment-curvature relation presents the aspect of figure 15.1.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Figure 15.1 - Moment-curvature relation
The AB full curve that from the point of view of safety may be made linear by the AB straight line, is used to
calculate deformations.
The traced curve obtained by the design values of resistance of concrete and steel is used only to define the
resistance MRd and NRd (maximum point).
The AB straight line is characterized by the secant rigidity (EI)sec that can be used in approximated processes
for normal or oblique compression-bending.
For a non-dimensional secant rigidity the value is given by:
= (EI )sec /( Ac h2fcd )
where:
h is the depth of the section under consideration.
The value of the adimensional secant rigidity may be placed together with the ultimate values of NRd and MRd,
in diagrams of normal force-bending moment interaction.
15.3.2 Geometrical imperfections
The geometrical imperfections (global and local) have to comply with provisions in 11.3.3.4.
15.4 Definition and classification of structures
15.4.1 Global, local and localized second order effects
Under the action of vertical and horizontal loads, the nodes of the structure undergo a horizontal displacement.
The internal forces and moments of second order caused by these displacements are called global effects of
second order. In the bars of the structure, as for example, in a story column, the respective axis do not
maintain straight lines, therefore causing local effects of second order which in principal affect mainly the
internal forces and moments along them.
In wall-columns (plain or associated) an area that does not present a straight line larger than that of the axis of
the column as a whole may occur. In these areas larger effects of second order called localized second order
effects may occur (see figure 15.2). The localized second order effects, besides increasing the longitudinal
bending of the area, also increases transversal bending, therefore increasing the need for stirrups in these
areas.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Figure 15.2 Localized second order effects
15.4.2 Sway and non-sway structures
Non-sway structures are considered for design purposes as having fixed nodes when the horizontal
displacements of the nodes are small and therefore the second order global effects are insignificant (lower
than 10% of the respective first order internal forces). In these structures it is enough to consider the local and
localized second order effects.
Sway structures are considered for design purposes as having mobile nodes where the horizontal
displacements are not small and therefore the second order global effects are important (higher than 10% of
the respective first order internal forces). In these structures the second order global internal forces and
moments as well as those local and localized should be considered.
However, in some structures in which the horizontal displacements are large and that, despite this condition,
do not demand the consideration of second order effects, as the normal forces are small and thus the
increases in the displacements produced by them are also small; this may happen, for example, in poles and
certain columns of industrial plants.
15.4.3 Bracing
From the point of view of analysis it is possible to identify within the structure substructures that due to their
great rigidity to horizontal actions resist to the majority of internal forces and moments arising from these
actions. These substructures are called bracing substructures.
The elements that do not participate in the bracing substructure are called braced elements.
The bracing substructures may either have fixed or mobile nodes according to definitions in 15.4.2.
15.4.4 Isolated elements
Isolated elements are considered as following:
a) isostatic structural elements;
b) braced elements;
c) elements of bracing structures having fixed nodes;

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
d) elements of bracing substructures having mobile nodes whenever to the internal forces and moments
obtained in a first order analysis are added those determined by a second order global analysis.
15.5 Exemption of consideration of second order global internal forces and moments
15.5.1 Generalities
The approximated processes presented in 15.5.2 and 15.5.3 may be used to verify the possibility of not
considering the second order global internal forces and moments, which means, to indicate if the structure
may be classified as having fixed nodes without the need of an accurate calculation.
15.5.2 Instability parameter
A symmetrical reticulated structure may be considered as having fixed nodes if its instability parameter is
lower than the value 1, according to the following expression:
= H tot N k /( E cs I c )
where:
1 = 0.2+ 0.1n if: n 3
1 = 0.6 if: n 4
where:
n is the number of levels of horizontal bars (stories) above the foundation or of an underground level of
little displacement;
Htot is the total height of the structure measured from the top of the foundation or from an underground
level of little displacement;
Nk is the total sum of all vertical loads acting on the structure (from the level considered for the calculation
of Htot ) with its characteristic value;
EcsIc represents the total sum of the rigidity values of all columns in the considered direction. In the case
of structures of frames, trusses or mixed, or with columns of variable rigidity along its height, the value of
the expression EcsIc of an equivalent column of constant section may be considered.
OBSERVATION In the analysis of global stability, the value of the modulus of elasticity or of the initial tangent
deformation modulus shown in 8.2.8 may be adopted.
The value Ic should be calculated considering the gross sections of the columns.
The rigidity of the equivalent column should be determined as follows:
calculate the displacement of the top of the bracing structure under the action of the horizontal load;
calculate the rigidity of an equivalent column of constant section built at the basis and free at the top,
having the same height Htot , so that under the action of the same load the same displacement at the top
occurs.
The limit value 1 = 0.6 recommended for n 4 is, in general, applicable to regular structures of buildings. It
may be adopted for associations of wall-columns and for frames associated to wall-columns. It may be
augmented to 1 = 0.7 when the bracing is exclusively made up of wall-columns and should be reduced to
1 = 0.5 whenever there are only frames.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
15.5.3 Coefficient z
The evaluation coefficient z that estimates the importance of second order global internal forces and
moments is valid for reticulated structures of at least four stories. It may be determined based on the results of
first order linear analysis of each loading situation, adopting the rigidity values shown in 15.7.2.
The value of z for each load combination is given by the expression:
1
z =
M tot,d
1
M 1,tot,d
where:
M1,tot,d is the tumbling moment, that is, the sum of the moments of all horizontal forces of the considered
combination, with their design values, referred to the base of the structure;
Mtot,d is the sum of the products of all vertical forces acting on the structure of the considered
combination, with their design values, by the horizontal displacement of their respective application points
obtained from the analysis of first order;
The structure is considered of fixed nodes whenever the condition z 1.1 is complied with.
15.6 Analysis of structures of fixed nodes
In structures of fixed nodes the design can consider each single compressed element as a bar connected at
their extremities to other structural elements, where the internal forces and moments obtained through
analysis of the structure, according to the first order theory, are applied
The analysis of second order local effects should be carried out in accordance with 15.8.
Whenever the structure is under horizontal forces it is designed as displaceable. The fact that structures are
classified as having fixed nodes exempts only the consideration of second order global internal forces and
moments.
The equivalent length le of the compressed element (column), supposed to be connected at both extremities,
should be the lower of the following values:
le = l 0 + h
le = l
where:
l0 is the distance between the internal faces of the structural elements, supposed horizontal, that
connects the column;
h is the depth of the column transversal section measured in the structure plan being studied;
l is the distance between the axis of the structural elements in which the column is connected.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
15.7 Analysis of structures of mobile nodes
15.7.1 Generalities
In the analysis of structures of mobile nodes, the effects of geometrical non-linearity and of the physical non-
linearity should be mandatorily considered; therefore, in the design of dimensions, second order global and
local effects should be mandatorily considered.
15.7.2 Non-linear analysis with second order
An approximated solution to determine the second order global internal forces consists in evaluating the final
internal forces (first order + second order) from the additional factoring of the horizontal internal forces and
moments of the load combination considered as 0.95z. This process is only valid for z 1.3.
15.7.3 Approximate consideration of the physical non-linearity
To analyze second order global internal forces and moments in reticulated structures having at least four
stories, the approximated physical non-linearity may be considered taking the rigidity of the structural
elements with the following values:
slabs : (EI)sec= 0.3EciIc
beams: (EI)sec= 0.4EciIc for As As e
(EI)sec = 0.5 EciIc for As = As
columns: (EI)sec=0.8EciIc
where:
Ic is the moment of inertia of the gross section of concrete including, whenever necessary, collaborating
flanges.
When the bracing structure is made up only of beams and columns and when z is smaller than 1.3, it is
allowed to calculate the rigidity of beams and columns by:
(EI)sec = 0,7 EciIc
The rigidity values adopted in this sub-section are approximated and cannot be used to estimate second order
local internal forces and moments even with a finer discretization of the modeling.
15.7.4 Analysis of the second order local effects
The analysis of second order local effects only supplies the internal forces at the extremities of the bars, and
an analysis of the second order local effects along the axis of the compressed bars should be made in
accordance with provisions in 15.8.
The isolated elements, considering local verification, should be formed by compressed bars taken from the
structure with length le, according with provisions in 15.6, although applying the internal forces and moments,
obtained through the second order global analysis, to its extremities.
15.8 Analysis of isolated elements
15.8.1 Generalities
The sub-sections 15.8.2, 15.8.3.2 and 15.8.4 are only applicable to isolated elements of constant section and
constant reinforcement along its axis, submitted to compression and bending.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
The columns should have slenderness ratio lower or equal to 200 ( 200). Only in the case of poles with
normal force lower than 0,10 fcd Ac, the slenderness ratio may be larger than 200.
15.8.2 Exemption from analysis of second order local effects
Second order local internal forces and moments in isolated elements may be ignored when the slenderness
ratio is smaller than the limit value 1 established in this subsection.
The slenderness ratio should be calculated by the expression:
= l e /i
In the case of the column built in at the base and free at the top, the value of l e is equal to 2 l . In the other
cases the values calculated in accordance to 15.6 are to be adopted.
The value of 1 depends on several factors, however the prevailing ones are:
the first order relative eccentricity e1/h;
the link of the extremities of the isolated column;
the shape of the diagram of first order moments.
The value of 1 may be calculated by the expression:
25 +12,5e /h
1 = 1

b
where:
35 1 90
where the value of b should be obtained as follows:
a) for bi-supported columns without transversal loads:
MB
b = 0,60 + 0,40 0,40
MA
where:
1.0 b 0.4
where:
MA and MB are the first order moments at the extremities of the column. For MA it should be adopted the
larger absolute value along the bi-supported column and for MB the positive sign, if tensioning the same
face as in MA, and negative in the opposite case.
b) for bi-supported columns with significant transversal loads along the height:
b = 1.0

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
c) for cantilever columns;
MC
b = 0,80 + 0,20 0,85
MA
where:
1.0 b 0.85
where:
MA is the first order moment in the built inside and MC is the first order moment in the middle of the
cantilever column.
d) for bi-supported columns or in cantilever with moments smaller than the minimum moment established in
11.3.3.4.3:
b = 1.0
15.8.3 Determination of second order local effects
15.8.3.1 Bars submitted to normal compression and bending
The design may be done through the general method or approximated methods as defined in 15.8.3.2 or
15.8.3.3.
The consideration of creep is mandatory for > 90, and the parcel corresponding to eccentricity ecc defined in
15.8.4 should be added to M1d.
15.8.3.2 General method
It consists of the second order non-linear analysis undertaken with an adequate discretization of the bar,
considering the real moment-curvature relation in each section and considering the geometrical non-linearity
in a non-approximated manner.
The general method is mandatory for >140.
15.8.3.3 Approximated methods
The determination of second order local internal forces and moments may be made with approximated
methods as, for example, that of standard column and of improved standard-column.
15.8.3.3.2 Method of standard-column with approximated curvature
It may only be used to calculate columns with 90, having a constant section and symmetric reinforcement
as well as being constant along its axis.
The geometrical non-linearity is considered in an approximate manner supposing that the deformation of the
bar is senoidal.
The physical non-linearity is considered through an approximated expression of the curvature in the critical
section.
The maximum total moment of the column should be calculated by:

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
l 2e 1
M d, tot = b M 1d,A + N d M 1d,A
10 r
where 1/r is the curvature in the critical section that may be estimated by the approximated expression:
1 0,005 0,005
=
r h ( + 0,5) h
where:
= NSd / (Acfcd)
M1d,A M1d,min
where:
h is the depth of the section in the considered direction;
is the adimensional normal force;
M1d,min has the meaning and value defined in 11.3.3.4.3.
The moment M1d,A and the coefficient b have the same definitions of 15.8.2, where M1d,A is the calculation
value of the first order moment MA.
15.8.3.3.3 Method standard-column with approximated rigidity
It may only be used to calculate columns with 90, of constant rectangular section, symmetrical
reinforcement as well as constant along its entire axis.
The geometrical non-linearity should be approximately considered assuming the deformation of the bar as
senoidal.
The physical non-linearity should consider an approximated expression of rigidity.
The maximum total moment in the column should be calculated based on the factoring of the first order
moment by the expression:
b M 1d,A M 1d,A
M d,tot =
2 M 1d, min
1
120 /
being the value of the adimensional rigidity approximately given by the expression:
M d,tot
= 32 1 + 5

h Nd
The variables h, , M1d,A and b are the same that were defined in the last subsection. Usually two or three
iteractions are enough when the iteractive calculation is chosen.
15.8.3.3.4 Method of standard-column coupled to diagrams M, N , 1/r
The determination of the second order local internal forces and moments in columns with 140 may be
done through the improved method of the standard-column using the values obtained from diagrams M, N, 1/r ,
specific for the curvature of the critical section.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
If > 90, it is mandatory to consider the effects of creep in accordance with 15.8.4.
15.8.3.3.5 Method of the standard-column of rectangular section submitted to oblique

compression- bending
When the slenderness of a column of rectangular section, submitted to oblique compression-bending, is

smaller than 90 ( < 90) in the two principal directions, the approximated process described in 15.8.3.3.3 may
be simultaneously applied in each of the two directions.
The factoring of the first order moments in each direction is different as it depends on different values of
rigidity and slenderness.
Once the distribution of first and second order total moments, in each direction, are obtained, it should be
verified, in each section along the axis, if the composition of these internal forces and moments stays within
the envelope of the resistance moments for the chosen reinforcement. This verification may be done in only
three sections: at the extremities A and B and at an intermediary point where it is admitted that the moments
Md,tot act simultaneously in both directions (x and y).
15.8.4 Consideration of creep
The consideration of creep is mandatory in columns with slenderness ratio equal to > 90 and may be
obtained in an approximated manner considering the additional eccentricity ecc as follows:
NSg
M Sg Ne NSg
ecc = + ea 2,718 1
N Sg

where:
10E ci I c
Ne =
l 2e
ea is the eccentricity caused by local imperfections as in figure 11.2;
Msg and Nsg are the internal forces and moments due to a quasi-permanent combination;
is the creep coefficient;
Eci is according to 8.1;
Ic is according to 4.2.3;
le is defined in 15.6.
The consideration of second order effects should be obtained according to 15.8.3, as if it were an immediate
effect added to eccentricity e1.
15.9 Analysis of the wall-columns
15.9.1 Generalities
In order to consider wall-columns as linear elements of resistance for the structure, its transversal section
should have its shape maintained by adequate bracing in all the stories and the localized second order effects
should be conveniently evaluated.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
15.9.2 Exemption of the analysis of localized second order effects
The localized second order effects of wall-columns may be ignored if, for each component plate of the wall-
column the following conditions are complied with:
a) the base and the top of each plate should be conveniently fixed to the slabs of the building, that have for
the whole the effect of horizontal diaphragm;
b) the slenderness i of each plate should be smaller than 35, and the calculation of this slenderness i may
be obtained through the expression:
l ei
i = 3,46
hi
where for each plate:
l ei is the equivalent length;
hi is the thickness.
The value of le depends on the connections of each one of the vertical extremities of the plate, according to
figure 15.3.
Figure 15.3 - Equivalent length le
If the top and the base are built in 1, the values of i may be multiplied by 0.85.
15.9.3 Approximated process for consideration of localized second order effects
In simple or associated wall-columns, with slenderness of each plate smaller than 90, the approximated
procedure described bellow for a simple wall-column may be used.
The second order effects should be considered through the decomposition of the wall-columns in vertical
strips of width ai, The strips should be analyzed as single columns submitted to internal forces Ni and Myid,
where:
ai = 3h 100 cm

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Myid = m1yd ai M1dmin
where:
ai is the width of strip i;
Ni is the normal force in strip i, calculated based on nd (x) as in figure 15.4;
M1d,min has the meaning and value defined in 11.3.3.4.3;
Myid is the bending moment in strip i;
m1yd and h are defined in figure 15.4.
Figure 15.4 - Approximate evaluation of localized second order effects

The second order effects found in i is assimilated to the second order local effects of the isolated column
equivalent to each one of these strips.
15.10 Lateral instability of beams
Safety regarding the lateral instability of beams should be guaranteed through adequate procedures.
For concrete beams with passive or active reinforcements, subjected to lateral buckling, an approximated
procedure may be adopted, as following:
b l0 /50
b fl h
where:
b is the width of the compressed zone;
h is the total height of the beam;
l0 is the length of the compressed flange measured among supports that guarantee the lateral bracing;
fl is the coefficient that depends of the shape of the beam (see table 15.1).

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Table 15.1 - Values of fl

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
16 General principles of dimensioning, verification and detailing
16.1 Purpose
The purpose of these three stages (dimensioning, verification and detailing) that take place soon after the
structural analysis is to guarantee safety in regard to the ultimate limit estate (ULS) and serviceability limit
state (SLS) of structures as a whole as well as each one of their parts.
This safety requires the compliance with analytical conditions such as:
Sd Rd
Where the design internal forces and moments be smaller than the design resistance for all the limit states
considered as important for the considered structure.
This safety also requires the accordance with constructive rules.
Besides a structural layout that guarantees safety to the whole construction, rules such as the minimum
dimensions for the definition of formwork, as well as the rules for the detailing of reinforcements should be
applied.
16.2 General principles
16.2.1 Generalities
The guidelines of the three stages of the design are the general principles established in 16.2.2 and 16.2.4.
16.2.2 Global and local approach
These three stages should always be based on a global approach to the structure even when a single node is
being designed (connection area between two structural elements).
This node must do its part for the safety of the whole.
On the other hand the detailing of a single element should take into account that its performance depends on
local aspects that were not considered in the global analysis.
The verification of the deflection of a beam should take into account rigidity smaller than the mean of the
structure, as well as the loss of rigidity through cracking.
This also happens when the ULS of a column in a story is being verified. It is important to take into account
the local construction errors and second order effects that were not considered in the global analysis.
16.2.3 Safety in regard to the ULS
When dimensioning or verifying a structure, it is important to remember that what is being effectively verified
are cross sections of elements.
It is the safety of this cross section that may usually be expressed analytically.
It is important that this safety is extended to the other elements through an adequate detailing. The adequate
detailing allows binding parts of the same element as well as elements that reach the same node.
There are two types of rules for the detailing, as follows: those elements as slabs, beams, columns, etc. and
those for special areas in which geometrical or static singularities exist.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Besides guaranteeing an adequate safety, the ULS also has to foresee a small enough probability of ruin, it is
also necessary to guaranty a good ductility so that, if an eventual collapse takes place, it will be adequately
foreseen warning the users in good time.
16.2.4 Safety in regard to SLS (performance in service)
In the verification of safety in regard to SLS, analytic expressions of safety as well as of construction rules also
have to be complied with.
The models to be used in this SLS are different from those used for ULS. Besides having to support smaller
loads of service they have a different rigidity which is usually larger.
To guarantee a good performance of a structure in service, it is usually necessary to comply with the limitation
of deflection, crack openings and vibrations but it is also possible to have to think about impermeability,
thermal or acoustic comfort, etc.
16.3 Design criteria
Based on these general principles, this Code establishes design criteria to be complied with in regard to
dimensioning and detailing of each one of the structural elements and with the connections that enable the
construction of the structure as a whole.
To facilitate the application of the design this criteria were organized in sections.
In section 17, that regards the dimensioning and verification of linear elements, criteria that refer both to ULS
and SLS can be found in regard to internal normal forces and bending moments as well as to tangential
internal shearing forces and torsion.
It is important to remember that these criteria are supplied in regard to structural concrete ranging from
reinforced concrete until prestressed concrete.
It also important to take into account that the dimensioning of columns having centered loads is not admitted.
This section also defines the minimum ductility criteria including minimum reinforcement.
In section 18 that focuses the detailing of linear elements, the minimum criteria to detail elements
dimensioned according to section 17.
Criteria for detailing longitudinal and transversal passive reinforcement as well as prestressed reinforcement
are included.
In section 19 that focuses the dimensioning and verification of slabs, criteria for ULS and SLS whether
reinforced or prestressed may be found.
These criteria include normal and tangential requirements including punctioning shear.
Section 17 has provisions for the dimensioning of columns always with eccentric load, if not oblique; and
section 19 focuses corresponding cases of eccentric punctioning.
Only in specific cases punctioning should be verified as centered.
Regarding the detailing of slabs, section 20 gathers the minimum criteria to detail these structural elements,
dimensioned in accordance to section 19, whether reinforced or prestressed slabs.
Regarding special areas, criteria to verify regions of singularity, whether geometrical or static, may be found in
section 21.
Very often these criteria establishes only qualitative requirements to be complied with in these areas.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Section 22 that focuses special elements only defines the more common special elements and suggests the
use of specialized bibliography for their dimensioning and detailing.
Section 23, regarding dynamic actions and fatigue, includes criteria to estimate the damages generated in the
structures by cyclic actions that have to be considered during the SLS verification as well as criteria to verify
ULS fatigue.
The verification of fatigue in reinforcement has to be examined from the point of view of bending and shearing
as well as the concrete compression or tensioned fatigue (in bending or in shear forces), especially in the
calculation of partial shear force that only affects the concrete without reinforcement Vc.
Section 24 that focuses plain concrete defines the structural elements that may be made in plain concrete and
establishes the criteria to be complied with for their verification.
16.4 Durability
To guarantee that the safety verified in accordance with 16.2.3 and 16.2.4 lasts for all the required life of the
structure it is fundamental that the durability requirements that limit the deterioration of the structure caused by
the aggression of the surrounding environment be complied with (see sections 6 and 7).
16.5 Case of cyclic loads
In the specific case of significant cyclic loads special attention has to be given to the damaging effects
generated by these loads as for example on bridges, viaducts in general and also on the beams supporting
the tracks of traveling cranes.
To verify the SLS it should be taken into account that the cyclic loads lead to an increased micro-cracking in
the concrete causing the structural elements to deform more easily.
To verify the ULS it is necessary to verify the ULS of fatigue.
The damaging effect of cyclic loads besides increasing the deformation of structural elements, that is to say,
making them relatively damaged, may also enlarge the damage causing rupture due to fatigue. Section 23
focuses both these problems.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
17 Dimensioning and verification of linear elements
To simplify the understanding and therefore the application of the concepts in this section, the more frequently
used symbols or those who could cause doubts are defined as follows.
The symbols presented in this section follow the same concepts used in section 4. Thus, the subscripted
symbols have the same meaning presented in 4.3.
al - Displacement of the diagram of bending moments, parallel to the axis of the element, replaces the effects
caused by oblique cracking
bw - Width of the web of beams
c1 - Distance between the axis of the longitudinal reinforcement of the corner and the lateral face of the
structural element
d - Distance between the axis of a compressive reinforcement and the nearest face of the element
he - Real thickness of walls for hollow sections or equivalent for gross sections (studied as equivalent hollow
sections).
s - Spaces among axis of stirrups measured according to the longitudinal axis of the element.
ue - Perimeter Ae
A - Area of the gross section.
A90 - Area of the transversal section of the legs of stirrups contained in an equivalent wall.
Ac,web - Area of the transversal section of web.
Acri - Area of the concrete involving the bar i of the reinforcement
Ae - Area limited by the mean line of the wall of the hollow, real or equivalent section, including the hollow area.
Ap - Area of the transversal section of the resultant tendon
Asl - Sum of the areas of the sections of the longitudinal torsion bars
Asw - Area of the transversal section of the stirrups of shearing force;
III - Moment of inertia of the cracked section of the concrete in stage II.
Ic - Moment of inertia of the gross section of concrete.
M0 - Value of the bending moment that annuls the normal compressive stress at the edge of the section
(tensioned by Md,max), caused by normal forces of different origins, concomitant with Vd
Md,min - Minimum design bending moment that enables to calculate the minimum tension reinforcement (either
passive or active)
MSd,eq - Design internal equivalent bending moment;
NSd,eq - Design internal equivalent normal force

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
TRd - Design resistance torsion moment
TRd2 - Design resistant torsion moment that represents the limit of the resistance of compressed diagonals of
concrete;
TRd3 - Design resistant torsion moment that represents the limit of the portion resisted by stirrups normal to
axis of the element;
TRd4 - Design resistant torsion moment that represents the limit for the portion resisted by longitudinal bars;
TSd - Design internal torsion moment;
TSdi - Portion of TSd to be resisted by each rectangle of the section made up of rectangles;
Vc - Portion of shearing force resisted by complementing mechanisms to the truss model;
Vc0 - Reference value of Vc, when = 45
Vc1 - Reference value of Vc, when 30 45
VRd - Design resistant shearing force;
VRd1 - Design resistant shearing force regarding elements without reinforcement for shearing force;
VRd2 - Design resistant shearing force regarding the ruin of compressed diagonals of concrete;
VRd3 - Design resistant shearing force regarding the ruin of diagonal tension;
VSd - Design internal shearing force;
Vsw - Portion of shearing force resisted by transversal reinforcement;
- Coefficient function of s (defined in 17.2.5.1) and of the type of the analyzed transversal section (either
rectangular or circular);
e - Relation between the modulus of elasticity of steel and concrete;
l- Geometric ratio of bonded longitudinal reinforcement at a distance of 2d from the face of the support
considering the bars of the span effectively anchored in the support;
mn - Minimum geometric ratio of longitudinal reinforcement of beams and columns (As,min/Ac);
sw - Geometric ratio of transversal reinforcement;
- Geometric ratio of compressive longitudinal reinforcement;
si - Tension stress at the center of gravity of the reinforcement under consideration calculated in stage I;
p - Variation of stress in prestressed steel between t0 and t;
Td - Design shearing stress of torsion;
As min f yd
min - Mechanical minimum ratio of bending longitudinal reinforcement of beams min =
Ac f cd


ABNT NBR 6118:2003
17.2 Linear elements subjected to normal internal forces and moments - Ultimate limit state
17.2.1 Introduction
This section establishes criteria to determine the resistance internal forces and moments of the sections of
beams, columns and ties, submitted to normal force and bending moments.
The dimensioning of longitudinal reinforcement should lead to a set of resistance internal forces and moments
(NRd, MRd) that constitute an envelope of the internal forces and moments (NSd, MSd) obtained in the structural
analysis (see sections 14 and 15).
To calculate the resistance internal forces and moments of T or L beams, the values of the collaborating
flange defined in 14.6.2.2 may be adopted.
In the analysis of the resistance internal forces and moments of a section of beam or column the following
basic hypothesis should be taken into consideration:
a) the transversal sections remain plane after deformation;
b) the deformation of bonded passive bars or the increase in deformation of bonded active bars in tension or
compression should be the same as the deformation of the concrete in its surroundings;
c) in the case of non-bonded active reinforcement when experimental values and non-linear analysis are
lacking the values of the increase in the stresses in normal structures of buildings follows, however, they
have to be divided by the due partial safety coefficients:
for elements with relation span/ effective depth of section equal to or smaller than 35:
o p = 70 + fck/100p, in megapascal, up to 420 MPa
for elements with relation span/ effective depth of section larger than 35:
p = 70 + fck/300p, in megapascal, up to 210 MPa
where:
Ap
p =
bc d p
where:
p and fck are expressed in megapascal;
p is the geometrical ratio of active reinforcements;
bc is the width of the compression flange;
dp is the effective depth in regard to active reinforcements;
d) the tension stresses of concrete normal to the transversal sections must be ignored in the ULS;
e) the distribution of stresses in concrete is done in accordance with the diagram parable-rectangle defined
in 8.2.10, with peak stress equal to 0.85 fcd, with fcd in accordance with definition of 12.3.3. This diagram
may be replaced by the rectangle having a height of 0.8 x (where x is the depth of neutral axis) with the
following stress:

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
0.85 fcd in the case of the width of the section measured in parallel to the neutral axis; this width may not
be diminished in the direction of the compressed edge;
0.80 fcd in the opposite case.
The differences in the results obtained in these two diagrams are small and acceptable not needing an
additional coefficient of correction.
f) the stress in the reinforcement must be obtained based in the stress-deformation diagrams with
calculation values defined in 8.3.6 and 8.4.5.
g) the ultimate limit state is characterized when the distribution of deformations in the transversal section is
included in one of the domains defined in figure 17.1.
Conventional rupture due to excessive plastic deformation:

straight line a: uniform tension;
domain 1: non- uniform tension, without compression;
domain 2: simple or compression-bending without rupture at the compression of concrete (c < 3,5 /oo and with maximum
o
elongation allowed);
Conventional rupture caused by limited shortening of the concrete:
domain 3: simple bending (under reinforced section) or compression-bending with rupture by compression of the
concrete and with steel yield (s yd);
domain 4: simple bending (over reinforced section) or compression-bending with rupture by compression of the concrete
and tensioned steel without yield (s < yd);
domain 4a: compression-bending with compressed reinforcements;
domain 5: non uniform compression without tension;
straight line b: uniform compression.
Figure 17.1 - Domains of ultimate limit states of transversal sections
17.2.3 Ductility in beams
It is important to guarantee good conditions of ductility in the beams, especially in the support areas or when
internal forces are redistributed; if necessary compression reinforcement can be adopted so as to guarantee
an adequate position of the neutral axis (x) taking into consideration the limits in 14.6.4.3.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
The introduction of a compressed reinforcement so as too guarantee the compliance with the smaller values
of the position of the neutral axis (x) that are in domains 2 or 3 does not lead to structural elements having
brittle rupture (usually called over-reinforced). The brittle rupture is associated to positions of the neutral axis
in domain 4 either with or without compressed reinforcement.
17.2.4 Active and passive reinforcements
Internal forces in reinforcement may be considered as concentrated in the corresponding center of gravity
whenever the distance of this center to the point of reinforcement section further from the neutral axis is
smaller than 10% of h.
Lateral reinforcement of beams may be considered in the design of resistance internal forces if they are
adequately anchored and spliced.
17.2.4.2 Prestressing
In the verification of the ULS besides the effect of other actions, only the prestressing hyperstatic internal
forces must be considered. The isostatic prestress should not be included.
The consideration of active reinforcements in the resistance internal forces should be based on the stress-
deformations diagrams defined in 8.4.5 and on the considerations of their pre-elongations.
These pre-elongations should be designed based on the initial stress of prestressing with design values (see
11.7.1) and taking into consideration the losses at age t under analysis (see 9.6.3).
17.2.4.3 Ultimate limit state at the act of prestressing
Besides the basic hypothesis presented in 17.2.3, the following complementary hypothesis have to be
complied with:
a) it is considered as a characteristic resistance of concrete fckj that which corresponds to the notional age j
(counted in days) in the act of pre-stressing and resistance fckj should be clearly specified in the design;
b) for this verification only the following values for the partial safety factors are admitted, with the loads that
effectively act in this occasion:
c = 1.2;
s = 1.15;
p = 1.0 in pre-tensioning;
p = 1.1 in post-tensioning;
f = 1.0 for unfavorable actions;
f = 0.9 for favorable actions.
17.2.4.3.2 Simplified verification
It is admitted that the safety regarding the ultimate limit state in the act of prestressing may be verified in
stage I (uncracked concrete and linear elastic behavior of the materials) once the following conditions are met:

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
a) the maximum compression stress in the concrete section, obtained through the internal forces and
moments by partial safety factor of p = 1.1 and f = 1.0 may not exceed 70% of the characteristic
resistance fckj foreseen for the age when prestressing is to be applied [(17.2.4.3.1-a)];
b) the maximum tension stress of the tension in the concrete may not exceed 1.2 times the resistance to
tension fctm which corresponds to the specified value fckj;
c) when there are tension stresses in transversal sections, a tensioned reinforcement should be designed in
stage II. From the design point of view, in this phase of the construction, the force in this reinforcement
may be considered as equal to the resulting tension stresses in the concrete in stage I. In the
corresponding reinforcement this force should not cause increase of stresses higher than 150 MPa for
wires or smooth bars, and 250 MPa for ribbed bars.
17.2.5 Approximated processes for dimensioning compression-bending
17.2.5.1 Normal compression-bending
The calculation to design the rectangular or circular sections with symmetric reinforcement submitted to
normal compression-bending in which the reduced normal force () is greater or equal to 0.7, the design can
be considered as a case of equivalent centered compression where:
e
N =N (1 + )
Sd,eq Sd h
MSd,eq = 0
where:
N Sd
=
Ac f cd
e M Sd
=
h N Sd h
1
=
d
(0,39 + 0,01) 0,8
h
where the value is given by:
= 1/s, se s < 1, in rectangular sections;
= s, se 1 s 6, in rectangular sections;
= 6, se s > 6, in rectangular sections;
= 4, in circular sections ;
supposing that all the bars are equal, s may be obtained by:
(n h 1)
s =
(n v 1)

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
The design of the reinforcement adopted for detailing (see figure 17.2) should respect the values of s and
d/h.
Figure 17.2 - Design of reinforcement characterized by the parameter s
17.2.5.2 Oblique compression-bending
In the situations of simple or oblique compression-bending, the approximation given by the following
interaction expression may be used:

M Rd,x M Rd,y
+ = 1
M Rd,xx M Rd,yy
where:
MRd,x; MRd,y are components of the design resistance moment in oblique compression-bending according
to the two normal inertia axes x and y of the gross section with a design resistance normal internal force
of NRd equal to the normal required NSd. These are the values that should be obtained;
MRd,xx; MRd,yy are the design resistance moments in regard to each one of the referred to axes in normal
compression-bending, with the same value of NRd. These values are calculated based on the design and
the quantity of reinforcement been studied;
is an exponent whose value depends on several aspects, among them: the value of normal force, the
shape of the section, the design of the reinforcement and its percentages. In general = 1 may be used
for safety matters. In the case of rectangular sections = 1.2 may be adopted.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
17.3 Linear elements subjected to normal internal forces and moments - Serviceability limit
state
17.3.1 Generalities
In the serviceability limit states the structures work partially in stage I and also partially in stage II. The
separation between these two parts is defined by the cracking moment. This moment may be calculated by
the following approximate expression:
fct I c
Mr =
yt
where:
= 1.2 for T or double T sections;
= 1.5 for rectangular sections
where:
is the factor that approximately correlates the resistance to tension in bending with resistance to direct
tension;
yt is the distance from the center of gravity of the section to the most tensioned fiber;
Ic is the moment of inertia of the gross section of concrete;
fct is the resistance to direct tension of the concrete according to 8.2.5, with appropriated quantile for each
specific verification. To determine cracking moment fctk,inf should be used in the limit state of cracking
opening and fct,m in the limit state of excessive deformation (see 8.2.5).
When active reinforcements are used, the effect of prestress in the calculation of the cracking moment should
be taken into consideration.
17.3.2 Limit state of deformation
The verification of the limit values defined in table 13.2 for deformation in structures, or more accurately
rotations and displacements in linear structural elements, analyzed one by one and submitted to the
combination of actions in accordance to section 11 should be done through models that take into account the
effective rigidity of the section of the structural elements that take into consideration the presence of the
reinforcement, the existence of cracks in the concrete along this reinforcement and time dependent
deformations.
The real deformation of the structure also depends on the construction process as well as on the
characteristics of materials (mainly modulus of elasticity and of resistance to tension) in the moment of its
effective going into action. Taking into account the great variability of the referred parameters, there is great
variability in real deformations. Therefore, accuracy in the anticipated displacements that result from the
analytical processes described below should not be expected.
17.3.2.1 Approximate evaluation of the deflection in beams
The behavior model of the structure may admit concrete and steel as materials with elastic and linear behavior,
so that the sections along the structural element may have the specific deformations determined in stage I,
whenever the internal forces are not greater than those that cause cracking; and in stage II in the opposite
case.
The design of the value of the secant modulus of elasticity Ecs defined in section 8 should be used and the
consideration of the effect of creep is mandatory.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
17.3.2.1.1 Immediate deflection in beams of reinforced concrete
To make an approximated evaluation of the immediate deflections in beams, the following expression of
equivalent rigidity may be used:

M 3 Mr
3

(EI ) eq = E cs r Ic + 1
M
III E cs I c

Ma a

where:
Ic is the moment of inertia of the concrete gross section;
Es
III is the moment of inertia of the cracked section of concrete in stage II, calculated with e = ;
Ecs
Ma is the bending moment in the critical section of the considered span, maximum moment in span for
simply supported or continuous beams and moment in the support for cantilevers, for the combination of
actions considered in this evaluation;
Mr is the cracking moment of the structural element whose value should be reduced to the half in case of
using smooth bars;
Ecs is the secant modulus of elasticity of concrete.
17.3.2.1.2 Calculation of the time dependent deflexion of beams of reinforced concrete
The differed additional deflection caused by long duration loads due creep may be calculated in an
approximately by the multiplication of the immediate deflection by factor f given by the expression:

f =
1 + 50
where:

As
=
bd
is a coefficient function of time that may be obtained directly in table 17.1 or calculated by the following
expressions:
= (t ) (t 0 )
(t) = 0,68 (0,996 t ) t 0,32 for t 70 months
(t) = 2 for t > 70 months
Table 17.1 - Values of coefficient in function of time
Time (t)
0 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 40 70
months
Coefficient
0 0.54 0.68 0.84 0.95 1.04 1.12 1.36 1.64 1.89 2
(t)

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
where:
t is the time, expressed in months when aiming at the value of the time dependent deflection;
t0 is the age expressed in months regarding the date of application of the long duration load. In the case
of portions of long duration loads being applied in different ages, the average value t0 may be used as
follows:
Pi t 0 i
t0 =
Pi
where:
Pi represents the load portions;
t0i is the age when each portion of Pi, was applied in months.
The value of total deflection should be obtained multiplying the immediate deflection by (1 + f).
17.3.2.1.3 Deflection in beams with active reinforcements
In the structural elements with active reinforcements it is enough to consider (EI)eq = EcsIc, whenever the limit
state of cracking formation is not exceeded. In the opposite case, the complete expression in 17.3.2.1.1 may
be applied whenever III, Mr and Ma are calculated. It should consider the structural element of concrete
submitted to the chosen combinations of actions, to which prestressing represented as an equivalent external
action (generating normal force and bending moment) is added (see 11.3.3.5).
To consider time dependent deformation it is enough to multiply the permanent portion of the immediate
deflection referred to above by (1 + ), where is the creep coefficient (see 8.2.11).
17.3.3 Limit state of cracking
This section defines the criteria to verify the limit values defined in13.4 for the opening of crackings in linear
structural elements analyzed one by one and submitted to the combination of actions described in section 11.
17.3.3.2 Control of cracking through limitation of estimated crack openings
The value of crack openings may undergo the influence of restrictions in regard to the volumetric variations of
the structure, which are difficult to be considered in this evaluation with sufficient accuracy. Besides, this
opening also undergoes influence of the conditions of the structure construction.
For these reasons, the criteria that follow should be approached as acceptable evaluations for the general
behavior of elements but they do not guarantee an accurate evaluation of a specific crack opening.
For each element or group of elements of passive and bonded active reinforcements (except prestressed
tendons that are within sheaths) that control structural element cracks, an area Acr of the enclosing concrete
constituted by a rectangle whose sides are not further than 7.5 from the reinforcement bar axis should be
considered (see figure 17.3).
OBSERVATION It is convenient that all the surface reinforcement i of the beam, in its tensioned zone, limits the
opening of cracks in the corresponding region Acri and that a space smaller or equal to 15 is maintained.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Figure 17.3 - Concrete envelope of reinforcement
The characteristic value of the opening of cracks wk, determined for each part of the enclosing space is the
smallest among those obtained by the expressions that follow:
i si 3 si
wk =
12,51 E si fctm
i si 4
wk = + 45
12,51 E si ri
where:
si, i, Esi, ri are defined for each enclosing space under examination;
Acri is the area of the enclosing space protected by the bar i;
Esi is the modulus of elasticity of the considered steel bar with diameter equal to i;
i is the diameter of the bar that protects the enclosing space under consideration;
ri is the ratio of the passive or bonded active reinforcement (that is not within the sheath) in regard to the
enclosing space (Acri);
si is the tension stress in the center of gravity of the reinforcement under consideration calculated in
stage II.
In the structural elements with prestress si is the increase in stress in the center of gravity of the
reinforcement, between the limit state of decompression and the load under consideration. It should be
calculated in stage II considering all the active reinforcement including that within the sheaths.
Calculation in stage II (that admits a linear behavior of the materials and ignores the concrete resistance to
tension) may be done considering the relation e between steel and concrete modulus of elasticity equal to 15.
1 is the coefficient of the superficial indentation or ribs of the reinforcement under consideration shown in
9.3.2.1 for passive and replaced by p1 for active reinforcement as in 9.3.2.2.
In the normal beams with depth smaller than 1.2 m, it may be considered as complied with the condition of
crack opening along the tensioned surface when the opening of cracks calculated in the area of most
tensioned bars is verified and if a lateral reinforcement that complies with provisions in 17.3.5.2.3 exists.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
17.3.3.3 Control of cracking without the verification of crack opening
To ignore the evaluation of the width of crack opening and to comply with the limit state of cracking (maximum
expected openings at levels of 0.3 mm for reinforced concrete and of 0.2 mm for concrete with active
reinforcements, a structural element should be dimensioned taking into account the restrictions in table 17.2 in
regard to the maximum diameter (mx) and the maximum space of reinforcements as well as covering
requirements (section7) and of minimum reinforcement (see 17.3.5.2). The stress s should be determined in
stage II.
Table 17.2 - Maximum values of diameter and spaces with high bond bars
Maximum values
Stress in bars
Concrete without active reinforcement Concrete with active reinforcement
s max smax max smax

MPa mm cm mm cm
160 32 30 25 20
200 25 25 16 15
240 20 20 12.5 10
280 16 15 8 5
320 12.5 10 6 -
360 10 5 - -
400 8 - - -
17.3.4 Limit state of decompression and crack formation
In structural elements where prestressed reinforcement is used it may be necessary to verify safety in regard
to the limit states of decompression and of crack formation.
This verification may be done calculating the maximum stress of tension of concrete in stage I (concrete
without cracks and linear elastic behavior of materials).
In the lack of more accurate values the following may be adopted:
e = 15 for the ratio between the steel and concrete modulus of elasticity with frequent or quasi-
permanent loads;
e = 10 for the ratio between steel and concrete modulus of elasticity with rare loads.
17.3.5 Maximum and minimum longitudinal reinforcements
17.3.5.1 Basic principles
The brittle rupture of transversal sections when the first crack is formed should be avoided considering for the
calculation of reinforcement, a minimum moment defined by the value correspondent to the one that would
produce the rupture of the section of plain concrete supposing that concrete resistance to tension is calculated
through fctk,sup.; it is also important to comply with the conditions regarding the control of crack openings in
17.3.3.
The specification of maximum values of reinforcement ensures ductility conditions and to complies with the
validity range of tests that originated the provisions for steel concrete joint behavior.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
17.3.5.2 Limit values for longitudinal reinforcements of beams
17.3.5.2.1 Tensioned reinforcement
The minimum tension in reinforcement, in reinforced or prestressed structural elements should be determined
by dimensioning of section for a minimum bending moment given by the following expression and complying
with the absolute minimum ratio of 0.15%:
Md,min = 0.8W0 fctk,sup
where:
W0 is resistance modulus of concrete gross transversal section regarding the most tensioned fiber;
fctk,sup is the concrete upper characteristic resistance to tension (see 8.2.5).
The dimensioning of Md,min may be considered when the minimum ratio of reinforcement is complied with as in
table 17.3.
Table 17.3 - Minimum ratios for bending reinforcement for beams
Values of min (As,min/Ac)

1)
%
Form of the section
fck
20 25 30 35 40 45 50
min
Rectangular 0.035 0.150 0.150 0.173 0.201 0.230 0.259 0.288
T
0.024 0.150 0.150 0.150 0.150 0.158 0.177 0.197
(compressed flange)
T
0.031 0.150 0.150 0.153 0.178 0.204 0.229 0.255
(tensioned flange)
Circular 0.070 0.230 0.288 0.345 0.403 0.460 0.518 0.575
The values of min defined in this table consider only the use of CA-50 steel, c = 1.4 and s = 1.15. If these factors
1)
are different, the min may be recalculated based on the value reached through min.
OBSERVATION: In T sections the area of the section to be considered should be characterized by the web to which is
added the collaborating flange.
In over-dimensioned structural elements a smaller than the minimum reinforcement may be used with the
value obtained from a bending moment equal to twice Md. In this case the determination of the internal forces
and moments should consider rigorously all the possible load combinations as well as the effects of
temperature, time dependent deformations and support settlements. Special attention should also be given to
the diameter and spaces of reinforcements that limit cracking.
17.3.5.2.2 Minimum values for tensioned reinforcements submitted to imposed deflections
In structural elements where the cracking control is basic for waterproofing or aesthetic reasons, in the lack of
a more rigorous evaluation method for internal forces and moments generated by the imposed restrictive
deformations and whenever technological measures that restrict these internal forces and moments are taken,
the minimum tensioned reinforcement to control cracking can be calculated by the following expression:
AS = k kc fct,ef Act/s

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
where:
AS is the part of the reinforcement in the tensioned area;
Act is the area of the concrete in the tensioned area;
s is maximum stress allowed in reinforcement immediately after the formation of a crack. A lower value
than the resistance to yield might be necessary to meet the limits of crack openings (see table 17.2);
fct,ef is the mean effective resistance of concrete to tension at the instant when the first cracks are formed.
In many cases, such as those in which prevailing imposed deformations result from the dispersal of
hydration heat, this may occur in an age between 1 and 5 days after casting depending on environmental
conditions, the shape of the structural elements, the nature of the formwork and the type of the cement
used. Values of fct,ef may be obtained by using the equations in 8.2.5, adopting the resistance of concrete
to compression at the age when the occurrence of cracking may occur. When this age cannot be
accurately defined, the adoption of a minimum value of resistance to tension of 3 MPa may be used.
k is a coefficient that considers the mechanisms that generate tension stresses:
a) in the case of intrinsic imposed deformations:
in the case of shapes of section, in general: k = 0.8;
in rectangular sections: k = 0.8 for h 0.3 m
k = 0.5 for h 0.8 m
interpolate linearly the values of k with values of h between 0.3 m and

0.8 m;
b) in the case of extrinsic imposed deformations k = 1.0
kc is a coefficient that considers the nature of stress distribution in sections immediately before cracking
with the following values:
kc = 1.0 for pure tension;
kc = 0.4 for simple bending;
kc = 0.4 for the ribs of prestressed structural elements or elements under compression-bending
in hollow sections (cellular or caisson);
kc = 0.8 for a tensioned flange of prestressed structural elements or elements under

compression-bending in hollow sections (cellular or caisson);
the value of kc may be interpolated between 0.4 (corresponding to simple bending) and zero,
when the depth of the tensioned area, calculated in the stage II under internal forces and
moments that lead to the beginning of cracking does not exceed the smaller of the two values:
h/2 and 0.5 m.;
17.3.5.2.3 Surface reinforcement
The minimum lateral reinforcement should be 0.10% Ac,web on each face of the web of the beam and be made
up with high bonding bars (1 2.25) with spaces that do not exceed 20 cm in accordance to provisions in
17.3.3.2.
In beams with depth equal to or lower than 60 cm the use of surface reinforcement is not necessary.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
17.3.5.2.4 Tensioned or compression reinforcements
The sum total of tensioned and compressive reinforcements (As + As) should not exceed 4% Ac, calculated in
the part outside the area of the splices.
17.3.5.3 Limit values for longitudinal reinforcements of columns
17.3.5.3.1 Minimum Values
The minimum longitudinal reinforcement should be:
As,min = (0.15 Nd/fyd) 0.004 Ac
17.3.5.3.2 Maximum Values
As, mx = 8.0% Ac
The larger possible reinforcements in columns should be 8% of the gross section, including the overlapping of
the existing reinforcement in splices, in compliance with 18.4.2.2.
17.4 Linear elements subjected to shearing forces - Ultimate Limit State
17.4.1 Basic Hypothesis
The provisions below are applicable to reinforced or prestressed linear elements subjected to shearing forces
eventually combined with other internal forces and moments.
They are not applicable to elements having volume, slabs, deep-beams and short corbels and are dealt with in
other sections of this Code.
The conditions defined by this Code for linear elements admit two calculation models that presuppose an
analogy with truss and parallel chord models associated to complementary resistance mechanisms developed
in the inner part of the structural element and translated by an additional component Vc.
17.4.1.1 General Conditions
17.4.1.1.1 All the linear elements subjected to a shearing force, except in the cases listed in 17.4.1.1.2,
should contain a minimum transversal reinforcement made up of stirrups and with geometrical ratio:
Asw fct,m
sw = 0,2
bw s sen f ywk
where
Asw is the area of the transversal section of stirrups;
s is the space among stirrups measured along the longitudinal axis of the structural element;
is the inclination of stirrups in regard to the longitudinal axis of the structural element;
bw is the mean width of web, measured along the effective depth of section; the restriction listed in
17.4.1.1.2 should be complied with;
fywk is the resistance to steel yield of the transversal reinforcement;
fct,m is defined in 8.2.5.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
17.4.1.1.2 Exceptions regarding the subsection above:
a) the structural linear elements having bw > 5 d (where d is the effective depth of section) should be
considered as slabs (see 19.4);
b) the ribs of ribbed slabs described in13.2.4.2-a) and b) may also be considered as slabs. In this case the
sum total of the width of the ribs in the part under consideration should be considered as the base and the
transversal reinforcement may be exempted when the provisions in 19.4.1 are complied with;
c) the columns and linear elements of foundation that are prevailingly submitted to compression and that
meet simultaneously the following conditions in a most unfavorable combination of actions in an ultimate
limit state when the section in stage I is used to calculate, the following conditions should be complied
with:
stress fctk;should not be exceeded in any point
VSd Vc, and Vc is established in 17.4.2.2.
In this case the minimum transversal reinforcement is defined in section 18.
17.4.1.1.3 The transversal reinforcement (Asw) may be made up of stirrups (closed in the diagonal support
zone enclosing the longitudinal reinforcement) or by the composition of stirrups and bent-up bars,. However
when bent-up bars are used they should not support more than 60% of the total resistance load of the
reinforcement.
17.4.1.1.4 Welded vertical bars combined with closed stirrups may be used if the resistance proportion
established in 17.4.1.1.3 is complied with and when these bars are anchored in accordance with 9.4.6.2.
However, when these bars are not combined with stirrups in the proportion shown in 17.4.1.1.3 the welded
longitudinal elements should mandatorilly make up the totality of the tensioned longitudinal reinforcement.
17.4.1.1.5 The inclination angle of the transversal reinforcement with the longitudinal axis of the structural
element should range between 45 90.
17.4.1.1.6 The maximum and minimum spaces among the elements in reinforcement should comply with
requirements of section 18.
17.4.1.2 Conditions related to internal forces and moments
17.4.1.2.1 Loads near supports
To calculate transversal reinforcements in cases of direct support (if the load and support reactions are
applied in opposite faces of the structural element, compressing it) the following provisions have to be
complied with:
a) the shear force generated by the distributed load may be considered, in the part between the support and
the section located at a d/2 distance of the face of the support; as constant and equal to that in this
section;
b) the shear force caused by a concentrated load applied at a distance of a 2d from the theoretical axis of
the support may, in this part of length a, be reduced multiplying it by a/(2d). However, this reduction does
not apply to shear forces caused by prestressing inclined tendons.
The reductions shown in this section are not applicable to verify the resistance to diagonal compression of
concrete. In the case of indirect supports these reductions also cannot be used.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
17.4.1.2.2 Effect of tangential components of prestress forces
The value VSd should consider the effect of the projection of prestress force in its direction with the design
value corresponding to the t time considered. However, when this effect is favorable the longitudinal
reinforcement of tension at the tensioned face by bending should satisfy the condition:
Ap fpyd + As fyd VSd
17.4.1.2.3 Structural elements with variable depth
The shear force that is resisted by the web of beams with variable depth may be evaluated by:
VSd VSd,red = [ M Sd / z VSd,red (cot g) / 2]tg c + [ M Sd / z VSd,red (cot g) / 2]tg t
where:
VSd,red is the reduced shear force considering the effect of variable depth;
c is the angle between the compression chord and the longitudinal axis of the structural element;
t is the angle between the tensioned reinforcement and the longitudinal axis of the structural element;
is the inclination angle of compression struts considered in the design of the shearing force;
z is the lever arm of the internal resulting forces.
The signals of c and t should be obtained considering the direction of the compression final forces and of the
bending tension with the simultaneous shear force.
The expression above considers the reduction of the bending compression force when there is a simultaneous
shearing force.
17.4.2 Verification of the ultimate limit state
17.4.2.1 Design resistance
The resistance of the structural element in a specific transversal section should be considered as satisfactory
when the following conditions are verified simultaneously:
VSd VRd2
VSd VRd3 = Vc + Vsw
where:
VSd is the design internal shearing force in the section;
VRd2 is the design resistance shearing force relative to the ruin of the compressed diagonals of the
concrete according to the process shown in 17.4.2.2 or 17.4.2.3;
VRd3 = Vc + Vsw, is the design resistance shearing force relative to the ruin of the tension diagonal where
Vc is the part of the shearing force absorbed by mechanisms complementary to the truss and Vsw is the
resistance portion by the transversal reinforcement in accordance with the process shown in 17.4.2.2 or
17.4.2.3.
In the supports zones the design should take into consideration the shearing forces acting in their respective
faces taking into consideration the reductions foreseen in 17.4.1.2.1.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
17.4.2.2 Design Model I
The model I admits inclined compression diagonals of = 45 in regard to the longitudinal axis of the
structural elements and it also assumes that the complementary part, Vc has a constant value that is
independent from VSd.
a) verification of the diagonal compression of concrete:
VRd2 = 0.27 v2 fcd bw d
where:
v2 = (1 - fck / 250)
b) calculation of transversal reinforcement:
VRd3 = Vc +Vsw
where:
Vsw = (Asw / s) 0.9 d fywd (sen + cos )
Vc = 0 in the tensioned structural elements when the neutral axis is located outside the section;
Vc = Vc0 in simple bending and in the tensioned-bending with the neutral axis crossing the section;
Vc = Vc0 (1+ Mo / MSd,max ) 2Vc0 in the compression-bending
Vc0 = 0.6 fctd bw d
fctd = fctk,inf/c
where:
bw is the smaller width of the section within the effective depth of the section d; however, in the case of
prestressed structural elements when there are injected sheaths with diameter > bw/8, the resistance
width to be considered should be (bw - 1/2), in the position of the web in which this difference is the
most unfavorable except in regard to the level that defines the tensioned chord of the beam;
d is the effective depth of section equal to the distance from the compressed edge to the gravity center of
the tensioned reinforcement; however, in the case of prestressed structural elements with tendons
distributed along the depth, d does not need to be considered with a value smaller than 0.8h, whenever
there is a reinforcement near to the tensioned face so as to meet provisions in 17.4.1.2.2;
s is the space between the elements of transversal reinforcements Asw, measured according to the
longitudinal axis of structural elements;
fywd is the stress in the passive transversal reinforcement limited to value fyd in the case of stirrups and to
70% of this value in the case of bent-up bars; in both cases values higher than 435 MPa cannot be used;
however, in the case of active transversal reinforcements the increase of stress due to shearing forces
can neither exceed the difference between fpyd and the prestressing stress, nor be higher than 435 MPa;
is the inclination angle of transversal reinforcements in regard to the longitudinal axis of structural
elements and 45 90;
M0 is the value of the bending moment that annuls the normal stress of compression in the edge of the
section (tensioned by Md,max ) caused by the normal forces of different and simultaneous origins as VSd,
this stress is calculated with values of f and p equal to 1.0 and 0.9 respectively; the moments

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
corresponding to these normal forces should not be considered in the calculation of this stress as they
are already considered in MSd; only the prestress isostactic moments should be considered;
MSd,max is the design bending moment maximum in the stretch under analysis that may be taken as
having the maximum value in the half-stretch under consideration (for this calculation the prestressing
isostactic moments are not considered, only the hiperstatic ones are taken into consideration);
c) Displacement parallel to the longitudinal axis of the envelop line of the tensioned chord tensile force in the
diagram of force:
When the tensioned longitudinal reinforcement is determined through the equilibrium of forces in the normal
section in the axis of the structural element, the effects caused by the oblique cracking can be replaced in the
calculation by the displacement parallel to the longitudinal axis of the envelope line of the tensioned chord
tensile force in the diagram of force as given by the expression:
VSd ,mx
al = d (1 + cotg ) cotg
2 (VSd ,mx Vc )
where:
al 0.5d, in general;
al 0.2d, for 45 inclinated stirrups
This displacement may be approximately replaced by the corresponding displacement parallel to the
longitudinal axis of the envelope line of the tensioned chord tensile force in the diagram of bending moments.
The displacement parallel to the longitudinal axis of the envelope line of the tensioned chord tensile force in
the diagram of force may also be obtained by simply increasing the force of tension in each section with the
expression:
M Sd 1
R Sd,cor = + VSd (cotg cotg )
z 2
17.4.2.3 Design model II
Model II admits compressive diagonals inclined of in regard to the longitudinal axis of the structural element
with ranging freely among 30 and 45. It also admits that the complementing part Vc be reduced with the
increase of VSd.
a) verification of the diagonal compression of concrete:
VRd2 = 0.54 v2 fcd bw d sen (cotg + cotg )

2
with: v2 = (1 fck/250) and fck, in megapascal.
b) design of transversal reinforcement:
VRd3 = Vc +Vsw
where:
Vsw = (Asw / s) 0.9 d fywd (cotg + cotg ) sen
Vc = 0, in tensioned structural elements when the neutral axis is located outside the section;
Vc = Vc1, in simple bending and in bending-tension with the neutral axis crossing the section;

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Vc = Vc1 (1+ M0 / MSd,max) < 2Vc1 in the compression-bending with:
Vc1 = Vc0 when VSd Vc0
Vc1 = 0 when VSd = VRd2 , linearly interpolating for intermediate values.
Observations and limitations listed in 17.4.2.2 are maintained;
c) displacement of the diagram of bending moments:
If the conditions established in 17.4.2.2-c), are to be maintained, the displacement of the diagram of bending
moments applying the process described in this section should be:
a l = 0,5 d (cotg cotg )
where:
al 0.5d, in general;
al 0.2d, for 45 inclined stirrups
The alternative given in 17.4.2.2-c) is still valid for model II.
17.5 Linear elements subjected to torsion - Ultimate limit state
17.5.1 Uniform torsion
The conditions established by this Code presuppose a resistance model constituted by a spatial truss defined
based on a structural element of hollow section equivalent to the structural element to be dimensioned.
The compressive diagonals of this truss made up by concrete elements has an inclination that may be
considered in the design to be within 30 45.
17.5.1.2 General conditions
Whenever torsion is necessary to the equilibrium of the structural element, a reinforcement aiming to resist the
tension internal forces caused by torsion should exist. This reinforcement should be made up of vertical
stirrups normal to the axis of the structural element and by longitudinal bars distributed along the perimeter of
the resistance section calculated in accordance with the provisions in this section and with the geometric
minimum ratio given by the expression:
Asw f
sl = sw = 0,2 ctm
bw s f ywk
When the torsion is not necessary for the equilibrium, which is the case of compatibility torsion, it is possible to
ignore it whenever the structural element has the adequate capacity of plastic adaptation and that all the other
internal forces and moments are designed without considering the effects caused by it. In areas where the
length of the element subjected to torsion is smaller or equal to 2 h so as to guarantee a reasonable level of
plastic adaptation, it is necessary to comply with the minimum torsion reinforcement and limit the shearing
force so that: Vsd 0.7 VRd2.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
17.5.1.3 Resistance of structural element - Pure torsion
It is admitted that once the resistance of the structural element in a specific section is complied with when the
following conditions occur simultaneously:
TSd TRd,2
TSd TRd,3
TSd TRd,4
where:
TRd,2 represents the limit given by the resistance of compressed diagonals of the concrete;
TRd,3 represents the limit defined by the portion resisted by stirrups normal to the axis of the structural
element;
TRd,4 represents the limit defined by the portion resisted by the longitudinal bars that are parallel to the
axis of the structural element.
17.5.1.4 Geometry of the resistant section
17.5.1.4.1 Gross convex polygonal section
The equivalent hollow section is defined based on the gross section with the equivalent wall thickness he
given by:
A
he
u
he 2 c 1
where:
A is the gross section area;
u is the perimeter of the gross section;
c1 is the distance between the axis of the longitudinal corner bar and the lateral face of the structural
element.
17.5.1.4.2 Section made up of rectangles
The total moment of torsion should be distributed among the rectangles according to their linear elastic rigidity.
Each rectangle should be verified one by one with the equivalent hollow section as defined in 17.5.1.4.1.
Therefore, the torsion moment for each rectangle i (TSdi) is given by:
3
a i bi
T Sdi = TSd
ai3 bi
where:
a is the smaller side of the rectangle;
b is the larger side of the rectangle.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
17.5.1.4.3 Hollow sections
The smallest thickness of the wall should be considered as being between:
a) the real thickness of the wall;
b) the equivalent thickness calculated supposing the gross section as having the same external contour of
the hollow section.
17.5.1.5 Verification of the diagonal compression of concrete
The resistance of the compressed diagonals of concrete is obtained by:
TRd2 = 0.50 v2 fcd Ae he sen 2
where:
v2 = 1 - fck / 250, with fck in megapascal.
where :
is the inclination angle of the diagonals of concrete within 30 45 ;
Ae is the area limited by the mean line of the wall in the hollow section, either real or equivalent, including
the hollow part;
he is the equivalent thickness of the wall of the hollow section, either real or equivalent, at a considered
point.
17.5.1.6 Design of reinforcements
The reinforcements located in the area corresponding to the equivalent wall are to be considered as effective
when:
a) the resistance of the stirrups normal to the axis of the structural element is obtained by:
TRd3= (A90 / s) fywd 2Ae cotg
where:
fywd is the design resistance value of the steel at yield of passive reinforcement limited to 435 MPa;
b) the resistance caused by longitudinal reinforcements may be obtained through:
TRd4= (Asl / ue) 2Ae fywd tg
where:
Asl is the sum total of the areas of the sections of longitudinal bars;
ue is the perimeter of Ae.
The longitudinal torsion reinforcement of the total area Asl, may be designed either distributed or
concentrated and it is mandatory to maintain constant the relation Asl/u, where u is a part of the
perimeter of the effective section corresponding to each bar or bundle of bars of area Asl.
In the polygonal section in each vertex of the torsioned stirrups at least one longitudinal bar should be
used.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
17.5.2 Torsion in thin wall open section elements
When the structural element under torsion can be assimilated to a thin wall open section the design should
consider besides the uniform torsion also the effects of bending-torsion.
17.5.2.2 General considerations
In general, the uniform torsion and bending-torsion manifest themselves in a compatible form dividing
between them external loads in a variable form along the structural element. Considering the good capacity of
plastic adaptation of structural elements to torsion, it is possible to ignore one of these mechanisms when that
which is under consideration does not have lower rigidity than the ignored one.
The rigidity values should be calculated considering the effects of cracking; it is admitted 0.15 of elastic rigidity
in the case of uniform torsion and 0.50 in the case of bending-torsion.
17.5.2.3 Rigidity to bending-torsion
When a more accurate calculation is lacking and when the section has parallel opposed walls or approximate
parallel walls (as the case of profiles I, C, Z, U and analogues) which can resist by differentiated bending
bending-torsion internal forces and moments, the structural rigidity of this profile, measured, for example, by
the spring coefficient in kilonewtons meters per radian (kNm/rad), may be calculated by the expression (see
figure 17.4):
r = T /
where:
= (a1 + a2) / z
where:
T is the external moment that causes torsion assumed applied at mid span;
z is the distance between the axis of the walls 1 and 2;
is the rotation of the section caused by differentiated bendings of opposite walls 1 and 2;
a1 is the deflection caused by the bending in wall 1 when undergoing force F = T/z;
a2 is the deflection caused by bending in wall 2 under force F = T/z in the opposite sign to that which is
applied to wall1.
In the calculation of the deflections a1 and a2 half of the elastic rigidity of the walls should be taken into
consideration.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
where:
bf is the collaboration width associated to each wall in accordance to 14.6.2.2.
Figure 17.4 - Bending-torsion of profiles having opposed walls
17.5.2.4 Resistance to bending-torsion
The resistance to bending-torsion of all structural elements may be calculated based on the resistance to
bending in opposite walls by the following expressions:
TRd = FRd,min z
where:
FRd,min = (FRd FSd)min
where:
FRd is the transversal force that exhausts the resistance of a single wall without the torsion effect;
FSd is the portion of the total transversal force applied to the structural element that pertains to the isolated
wall without the effect of torsion.
The value FRd,min is the smallest between the two walls under consideration.
17.6 Limit state of inclined cracking of webs Shearing force and torsion
Usually it is not necessary to verify the diagonal cracking of webs in concrete structural elements. In special
cases when it is considered as significant the spacing of transversal reinforcement should be limited to 15 cm.
17.7 Combined internal forces and moments
17.7.1 Bending and torsion
In structural elements subjected to torsion and to simple or compression-bending verifications may be done
separately for torsion and for normal internal forces and moments and it should comply with the provisions in
17.7.1.2 and 17.7.1.4.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
17.7.1.2 Longitudinal reinforcements
In the area tensioned by bending, torsion reinforcement should be added to the reinforcement needed for
normal internal forces and moments considering in each section the internal forces and moments acting
simultaneously.
17.7.1.3 Longitudinal reinforcement at compressed chord by bending
In compressed chords by bending, longitudinal torsion reinforcement may be reduced in accordance to

compression internal forces and moments that act in the effective depth h and in the portion of length u
corresponding to the bar or bundle of bars under consideration.
17.7.1.4 Resistance of compressed chords
In sections where the torsion acts simultaneously with intensive internal normal forces and moments that
reduce excessively the depth of the neutral axis, particularly in beams of cellular sections, the design
compression value for the principal stress should not be greater than 0.85 fcd.
This principal stress should be calculated as if it were in a plane state of stresses from the normal mean stress
that acts in the compressed bending chord and with the torsion tangential stress calculated by:
Td = Td / 2 Ae he
17.7.2 Torsion and shearing forces
In the combinations of torsion and shearing forces the design should foresee the inclination angles of the
concrete struts that coincide for the two internal forces and moments.
When model I is used (see 17.4.2.2) for shearing forces that consider = 45, this should also be the value
considered for torsion.
17.7.2.2 The resistance to diagonal compression of concrete should be calculated through the following
expression:
VSd T
+ Sd 1
VRd2 TRd2
where:
VSd and TSd are the design internal forces and moments that act simultaneously in the section.
17.7.2.3 The transversal reinforcement may be calculated by the addition of reinforcements calculated
separately for VSd and TSd.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
18 Detailing of linear elements
al - Displacements of the diagram of bending moments parallel to the axis of the element so as to replace the
effects caused by oblique cracking;
r - Radius of the internal curvature of a hook
st,mx - Transversal maximum space among successive legs of reinforcement made up of stirrups
As,apoio - Area of the transversal section of longitudinal reinforcement needed at the support of structural
elements
Asl - Sum of the areas of the section of torsioned longitudinal bars
As,vo - Area of the transversal section of tensioned reinforcements at span
Mapoio - Bending moment at supports
Mvo - Maximum positive bending moment at spans
RSd - Design tension force in reinforcement
VRd2 - Design value of shearing force relative to the ruin of compressed diagonals of concrete
18.2 General provisions regarding reinforcements
18.2.1 Layout of reinforcement
The layout of reinforcement should meet not only their structural functions but also the adequate conditions for
execution, especially regarding pouring and consolidation of concrete.
Spaces should be designed so as to introduce a vibrator and also avoid the segregation of the aggregate and
the occurrence of honeycomb in the inside of structural elements.
18.2.2 Curved bars
The internal diameter of the curvature of bent-up longitudinal reinforcement bars should not be lower than
10 for steel CA-25, 15 for CA-50 and 18 for CA-60 in order to resist the shearing or frame node forces.
If stresses in tensioned reinforcements determined by the internal forces and moments design is lower than
the design yield stress fyd, these diameters of the curvatures may be proportionally reduced although never to
values lower than those required for hooks.
If there are curved tensile bars in the same plane and the spaces between them is lower than twice the
minimum allowed (18.3.2.2), the minimum value of the diameter of the curvature established in this section
should be multiplied by the number of bars in this condition.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
When there is the possibility of occurring cracking in concrete at the plane of the bent bar and caused by
tension stresses normal to this plane, a transversal reinforcement should be placed or the diameter of the
curve of the bar should be increased.
18.2.3 Changes in the direction of reinforcements
Whenever there is the possibility of rectifying the tensioned bars in areas in which the resistance to these
displacements is caused by insufficient concrete cover, the placement of bars in their positions should be
guaranteed by means of conveniently placed stirrups or headpins. The replacement of a bar by two others
should be the prevailing solution and the replacement bars should be extended beyond their crossing and
anchored as in section 9 (see figure 18.1).
Figure 18.1 - Changing directions of reinforcement
18.2.4 Protection against buckling of bars
Whenever buckling may occur in reinforcement bars located near the surface of structural elements
precautions should be taken so as to avoid it.
The polygonal stirrups guarantee that buckling does not occur in longitudinal bars placed in their corners and
covered by them placed at a maximum distance of 20 t from the corner, if in this part length of 20 t there is
at most two bars and the one in the corner is not to be considered. Whenever there are more than two bars in
this part or bar outside it, supplementary stirrups should be used.
If the supplementary stirrup is made up of a straight bar with hooks at its extremities, it must cross the section
of the structural element and their hooks should involve the longitudinal bar. If there is more than one
longitudinal bar to be protected close to the same edge of the supplementary stirrup, its hook should involve a
main stirrup in a point that is near to one of the bars; this should be especially indicated in the design (see
figure 18.2).
Figure 18.2 - Protection against bar buckling

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
In the case of curved stirrups whose concavity is placed towards the inner side of the concrete there is no
need of supplementary stirrups. If the sections of the longitudinal bars are placed in a concave curve placed
towards the outside of the concrete, each longitudinal bar should be anchored by the hook of a straight stirrup
or by the corner of a polygonal stirrup.
18.3 Beams
18.3.1 Generalities
The provisions that follow regard isostatic beams in regard to l/h 3.0, and continuous beams having a
relation l/h 2.0 , in which l is the length of the theoretical span (or twice the theoretical length in the case of
cantilevers) and h the total depth of the beam.
Beams with relations smaller than l/h should be considered as deep-beams in accordance with section 22.
18.3.2 Longitudinal reinforcement
18.3.2.1 Minimum quantity
The minimum quantity of bending reinforcement should be designed in accordance with 17.3.5.
18.3.2.2 Transversal distribution
The minimum free space between the faces of longitudinal bars measured in the plane of the transversal
section should be equal to or higher than the larger of the following values:
a) in the horizontal direction (ah):
20 mm;
diameter of the bar, bundle or threaded connection;
1.2 times the characteristic maximum dimension of coarse aggregate
b) in the vertical direction (av):
20 mm;
0.5 times the characteristic maximum dimension of coarse aggregate
For bundles of bars the diameter of the bundle should be considered as n = n .
These values are also applicable in areas of splicing with juxtaposed bars.
In all cases the provisions in 18.2.1 should be complied with.
18.3.2.3 Longitudinal distribution
18.3.2.3.1 Tensioned reinforcement in simple bending anchored by bonding
The part of the end of the tensioned bar considered as anchorage begins in the theoretical section where its
stress s starts to diminish (the internal force of the reinforcement starts to be transferred to the concrete). It
should extend to at least 10 besides the theoretical point of null stress s ,and may never be shorter than
the needed length determined in 9.4.2.5. Therefore, in the longitudinal tensioned reinforcement of the

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
structural elements subjected to simple bending, the anchorage part of the bar should begin in point A (figure
18.3) of the displacement parallel longitudinal axis of the envelop line of the tensioned chord tensile force in
the diagram of force RSd = MSd/z of length al, as established in 17.4.2. This diagram is equivalent to the
corrected forces in diagram RSd,cor.. If the bar is not bont the part of the anchorage should be prolonged
beyond B, at a minimum of 10 .
If the bar is bent, the beginning of the bending may coincide with point B (see figure 18.3).
Figure 18.3 Curtailment of longitudinal tension reiforcement by the resistant diagram
In the intermediary points among A and B the linear resistance diagram should cover the internal forces and
moments diagram (see figure 18.3).
If point A is in the face of the support or beyond it and the force RSd diminishes towards the center of the
support, the length of anchorage should be measured from this face and should comply with provisions in
18.3.2.4-b).
18.3.2.3.2 Bars placed in flanges
For bars placed in flanges or slabs and that are part of the reinforcement of beams the interruption points of
bars is obtained using the same process described above plus an additional length equal to the distance of
bars to the nearer face of the web.
18.3.2.4 Tensioned reinforcements in support sections
Tension internal forces near supports of simple or continuous beams should be resisted by longitudinal
reinforcement that comply with the strictest of the following conditions:
a) when positive moments occur, the reinforcement is obtained from dimensioning the section;
b) in extreme supports to guarantee anchorage of the compression diagonal, reinforcement capable of

resisting a tension force of RSd = (al/d) Vd + Nd , where Vd is the shearing force in the support and Nd is
the tension force that eventually exists;

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
c) in extreme or intermediate supports by prolonging part of the tensioned reinforcement of the span (As, vo),
corresponding to the maximum positive moment of the span (Mvo), so as:
As,apoio 1/3 (As,vo) if Mapoio is null or negative and of absolute value Mapoio 0.5 Mvo;
As,apoio 1/4 (As,vo) if Mapoio is negative and of absolut value or for Mapoio> 0.5 Mvo
18.3.2.4.1 Anchorage of tensioned reinforcement at the support
As established in 18.3.2.4-a), the anchorages have to comply with the criteria in figure 18.3.
As established in 18.3.2.4-b) and c), in extreme supports, reinforcement bars should be anchored from the
face of the support and have length equal to or longer than the larger of the following values:
lb,nec, in accordance with 9.4.2.5;
(r + 5,5 );
60 mm.
When the cover to bar along a hook is of at least 70 mm, measured perpendicular to the plane of the hook,
and the variable actions do not happen frequently with their maximum values, the first of the three values
above may be ignored prevailing the two other conditions.
As in 18.3.2.4-b) and c), at intermediary supports the length of the anchorage may be equal to 10 , whenever
there is no possibility of occurring positive moments in this area caused by unforeseen situations, especially
caused by wind and eventual settlements. Whenever such a possibility exists the bars should be continuous
or spliced over the support.
18.3.3 Transversal reinforcements for shearing force
The reinforcements having the purpose of resisting tension internal forces caused by shearing forces maybe
made up of stirrups either combined or not with bent bars or welded bars and should be designed in
accordance with provisions in 17.4.
18.3.3.2 Structural elements reinforced by stirrups
The stirrups for shearing forces should be closed through a horizontal leg involving the bars of the tensioned
longitudinal reinforcement and anchored at the opposite face. When this face may also be tensioned, the
stirrup should have a horizontal leg in this area or be complemented with an additional bar.
The diameter of the bar that makes up the stirrup should be larger or equal to 5 mm and should not exceed
1/10 of the width of the web of the beam. When the bar is smooth its diameter cannot be higher than 12 mm.
In the case of stirrups made up by welded wire fabric the minimum diameter may be reduced to 4.2 mm, when
the necessary precautions against corrosion of this reinforcement are complied with.
The minimum space between stirrups measured along the longitudinal axis of the structural element it should
be sufficient to allow the passage of the vibrator guaranteeing a good consolidation of the mass. The
maximum space should comply with the following conditions:
if Vd 0.67 VRd2 , then smax = 0.6 d 300 mm;
if Vd > 0.67 VRd2 , then smax = 0.3 d 200 mm.
The transversal spaces between successive legs of reinforcement constituted by stirrups cannot exceed the
following values:

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
if Vd 0.20 VRd2 , then st,max = d 800 mm;
if Vd > 0.20 VRd2 , then st,max = 0.6 d 350 mm.
Splicing is only allowed when the stirrups are made up of welded wire fabric or high bond bars.
18.3.3.3 Structural elements reinforced with bent bars
18.3.3.3.1 Anchorage
In the case of bent-up bars resistant to tension caused by shearing forces, the straight part of the anchorage
should be greater or equal to lb,nec (see 9.4.2.5).
18.3.3.3.2 Longitudinal spacing
The longitudinal spacing among bent-up bars cannot be greater than smax = 0,6 d (1+ cotg ), where is the
inclination angle of the bent-up bar.
18.3.4 Torsion reinforcements
The reinforcement aiming to resist the tension internal forces caused by torsion should be made up of stirrups
normal to the axis of the beam combined with longitudinal bars parallel to the same axis and should be
designed in accordance with provisions in 17.5.
The legs of the stirrups and the longitudinal reinforcements contained in the inner side of the notional wall of
the equivalent hollow section are considered as effective in regard to resistance (see 17.5.1.4).
The stirrups for torsion should be closed all along its contour involving the bars of the tensioned longitudinal
reinforcement and with the edges adequately anchored through 45 angle hooks.
The provisions in 18.3.3.2 should be complied with regarding the diameter of the bars that make up the stirrup
and their longitudinal spacing.
Longitudinal bars of torsion reinforcement may have a layout either distributed or concentrated along the
internal perimeter of the stirrups and having a maximum spacing of 350 mm.
The relation Asl /u, should be complied with where u is the part of the perimeter of the effective section
that corresponds to each bar or bundle of bars having the area of Asl, as required by dimensioning.
Polygonal sections should contain at least one bar in each vertex of the torsion stirrups.
18.3.5 Surface reinforcement
Surface reinforcement designed in accordance with 17.3.5.2.3 should have a spacing of the bars that does not
exceed d/3 and 20 cm.
18.3.6 Suspension reinforcements
Near the concentrated loads transmitted to the beam by other beams or discrete elements that are supported
along or on part of its height or hanged from it, suspension reinforcement should be placed.
18.3.7 Reinforcements that connect flange-web or talon-web
The connection planes between flanges and webs or talons and webs of beams should be verified in regard to
the tangential effects caused by variations in normal stresses along the length of the beam from the point of
view of resistance of concrete and also from the necessary reinforcement to resist the tensions caused by
these effects.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
The slab bending reinforcement that exists in the connection plane may be considered as part of the
connection reinforcement complementing, if necessary, the difference between them. The minimum
transversal section of this reinforcement that extends through all the effective width and is anchored in the
2
web should have an area of 1.5 cm per meter.
18.4 Columns
18.4.1 Introduction
The requirements that follow refer to columns whose larger dimension in the transversal section does not
exceed five times the smaller dimension are not valid for special zones (see section 21). When the first
condition is not complied with the column should be considered as a column-wall and the provisions in 18.5
should be applied.
18.4.2 Longitudinal reinforcements
18.4.2.1 Minimum diameter and ratio of reinforcement
The diameter of longitudinal bars may neither be lower than 10 mm nor higher than 1/8 of the smaller
transversal dimension.
The geometrical ratio of reinforcement should comply with the maximum and minimum values specified in
17.3.5.3.
18.4.2.2 Transversal distribution
The longitudinal reinforcement should be placed in the transversal section so as to guarantee an adequate
resistance of the structural element. In polygonal sections at least one bar in each vertex should exist; in
circular sections at least 6 bars should be distributed along the perimeter.
The minimum free space among the faces of the longitudinal bars measured in the plane of the transversal
section outside the area of the splices should be equal to or higher than the larger of the following values:
20 mm;
1.2 times the maximum characteristic dimension of the large aggregate.
For bundles of bars the diameter of the bundle should be considered as: n = n .
These values are also applicable to areas of bar splicing.
Whenever a pouring of concrete plane is foreseen, the consolidation through the lateral opening at the face of
the formwork, the spaces between the reinforcements should be sufficient to allow the passage of the vibrator.
The maximum space between axes of bars or of centers of bundles of bars should be smaller or equal to
twice the smaller dimension of the section in the part under consideration without exceeding 400 mm.
18.4.3 Transversal reinforcement
The transversal reinforcement of columns made up of stirrups and whenever applicable by complementary
headpins should be placed along all the height of the column and its placement in the area of crossing of
beams and slabs is mandatory.
The diameter of the stirrups in columns should not be smaller than 5 mm nor 1/4 of the diameter of the single
bar or of the diameter equivalent to the bundle that makes up the longitudinal reinforcement.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
The longitudinal spacing between stirrups measured along the direction of the axis of the column, to
guarantee its placement to avoid buckling of the longitudinal bars and to guarantee the splicing of the
longitudinal bars in the usual columns should be equal to or smaller than the following values:
200 mm;
smaller dimension of the section;
24 for CA-25, 12 for CA-50.
The value t < /4, may be adopted when reinforcements are made up with the same type of steel and the
spacing comply with the restrictions:
2 1
s mx = 90 000 t
f yk

with fyk expressed in megapascal.
When transversal reinforcements for shearing forces and torsion are needed these values should be
compared with the minimum specified in 18.3 for beams, choosing the smaller of the specified limits.
18.5 Wall-columns
When columns have larger dimensions in the transversal section that is to say, they are more than five times
larger than the smaller dimension, besides the requirements established in this sub-section, the provisions
established in section 15 in regard to internal forces and moments in the transversal direction caused by first
and second order effects, especially the localized second order effects should be complied with.
Transversal reinforcements of wall-columns should respect the minimum bending reinforcement of the plates
if this bending and the corresponding reinforcement are calculated. When this does not occur, the transversal
reinforcement should comply with the minimum of 25% the face of the longitudinal reinforcement at the face.
18.6 Prestressed tendons
18.6.1 Longitudinal layout
18.6.1.1 Profiles
Prestress reinforcement may be straight, curved, polygonal or have mixed profiles complying with the
requirement in regard to the reinforcement in the area of the supports complying with provisions 18.3.2.4-a)
and b). Intermediary supports should have a reinforcement that is an extension of the reinforcement of the
adjacent spans and should be capable of resisting a tension force equal to:
RSd = (al /d) Vd + Nd RSd,min = 0.2 Vd
The expression Vd is the maximum difference of the shearing force from one side to the other of the support
and Nd is the tension force that eventually exists. Reinforcement at this support is obtained by the largest of
the RSd calculated for each one of the sides of the support.
18.6.1.2 Curvature
Curvatures of prestressed reinforcements should comply with the minimum radius required in function of the
diameter of the wire, strand or bar or of the external diameter of the sheath.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
The definition of the minimum radius of curvature may be made experimentally after an adequate investigation
was made and documented. The radius of the adopted curvature does not have to be justified whenever it is
larger than 4 m, 8 m and 12 m respectively for wires, bars and strands.
When the curvature occurs in an area near to the face of the structural element, causing a thrust in the void,
reinforcement should be designed to guarantee the position of the tendon without affecting the integrity of the
concrete in this part.
18.6.1.3 Curvature in areas near anchorages
In areas near anchorages the minimum radius of curvature of wires, strands or bundles may be reduced
whenever duly proved by conclusive tests. In these areas the resistance of concrete against bursting or
splitting and the position of the tendon when it causes a thrust in the void should be guaranteed.
18.6.1.4 Fixing during construction
Appropriate devices should guarantee the permanence of prestress reinforcement in its position during
construction of the structural elements.
18.6.1.5 Straight ends
The prestressed tendons should have in their ends straight segments so as to allow the alignment of their
axes with the axes of the respective anchorage devices. The length of these segments should not be shorter
than 100 cm or 50 cm in the case of unbonded monostrands.
18.6.1.6 Extension of ends
The prestressed tendons should have extensions at their ends that extend beyond the active anchorages with
lengths adequate to the fixing of the prestressing apparatus.
18.6.1.7 Joints
Bars of prestressed reinforcements may be joined only with threaded connections.
Individual joints in wires, strands and tendons are allowed when using especially efficient devices duly proved
by frequent use or conclusive tests.
The type and the position of the joints should be perfectly characterized in the design.
18.6.1.8 Anchorages
The anchorages specified should comply with definitions in 9.4.7.
18.6.2 Transversal layout
18.6.2.1 Sheaths
18.6.2.1.1 Internal prestressing with bonded reinforcement
The sheaths of the prestress reinforcement should be metallic designed with adequate diameter so as to
ensure the movement of the tendons, the executive system used and capable to resist without significant
deformation the pressure of the fresh concrete and of the assembly loads. Besides, they must be waterproof
in regard to the paste and mortar when the concrete is being poured.
18.6.2.1.2 Internal prestressing with unbounded reinforcement
The sheaths may be made of plastic material with adequate protection of the reinforcement.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
18.6.2.1.3 External prestress
The sheaths may be made of plastic material that resist the weather and have an adequate protection of the
reinforcement.
18.6.2.2 Group of tendons during post-tensioning
Tendons in sheaths may constitute groups of two, three and four tendons in the straight stretches whenever
they do not form a line with more then two adjacent tendons. In the curved stretches only pairs may be used
whose curvatures are in parallel planes so as not to cause transversal pressure between them.
18.6.2.3 Minimum spacing
Elements of prestress reinforcement should be placed sufficiently far among them so as to guarantee their
perfect involvement by the concrete.
Placements in the horizontal direction aim to allow the free passage of the concrete and when a needle
vibrator is used they should enable its introduction and operation. The minimum values for the spacing are
shown in tables. 18.1 and 18.2.
Table 18.1 - Minimum spacing - Post-tensioning situation

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Table 18.2 - Minimum spacing

- Pre-tensioning situation

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
19 Dimensioning and verification of slabs
So as to simplify the understanding and the application of the concepts used in this section, the symbols more
frequently used or that could cause doubts are defined below.
The symbols presented in this section follow the same guidelines that were established in section 4. Thus, the
subscripted symbols have the same meaning as in 4.3
sr - Radial spaces between lines of punching reinforcement;
u - Perimeter of contour C - punching
u* - Reduced critical perimeter for columns placed at edges or corners;
u0 - Perimeter of contour C - punching
Asw - Area of punching reinforcement in a complete contour parallel to C
C - Contour of the area of application of loads;
C - External critical contour distant 2d of the contour C, in the plane of the slab
FSd - Design force or reaction of punching
K - Coefficient that defines the portion of MSd transmitted to the column-punching
MSd* - Design resultant moment from the eccentricity of reduced critical perimeter u* in regard to the center of
the column - punching
MSd1 - Design moment transmitted by slab to column at the edge in the plane perpendicular to the free edge;
MSd2 - Design moment transmitted by slab to the column at the edge in the plane parallel to the free edge;
Wp - Parameter referring to critical perimeter u, defined as a plastic resistance modulus of the critical
perimeter;
q - Coefficient that depends on type and kind of loading;
Pd - Shearing stress caused by the effect of prestressing tendons that cross the contour under consideration
and pass at a distance shorter than d/2 of the face of the column punching;
Rd1 - Design limit shearing resistance stress for a slab to be able to dispense with transversal reinforcement
so as to resist shearing forces;
Rd2 - Design limit shearing stress to verify the diagonal compression of the concrete in the connection slab-
column.
Rd3 - Design resistance to shearing stress;
Sd - Design internal shearing stress;
Sd,ef - Effective design internal shearing stress.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
19.2 Dimensioning and verification of slabs - Ultimate limit state
To determine the resistant internal forces and moments of sections of slabs subjected to internal normal
forces and bending moments the same criteria established in 17.2.1 to 17.2.3.should be used
In the support areas of the slabs good ductility should be guaranteed in compliance with 14.6.4.3.
o
If in the critical section used for dimensioning the direction of the reinforcement differs more than 15 from
those of the principal stresses this condition should be considered in the structural design.
19.3 Dimensioning and verification of slabs - Serviceability limit state
19.3.1 Limit state of deformation
The criteria in 17.3.2 should be complied with, considering the possibility of cracking (stage II).
19.3.2 Limit states of cracking, decompression or crack forming
The criteria used in 17.3.3 and 17.3.4.should be complied with.
19.3.3 Maximum and minimum longitudinal reinforcements
19.3.3.1 Basic Principles
The basic principles to be used to define the maximum and minimum reinforcements are supplied in 17.3.5.1.
As reinforced slabs having both directions have other possible resistance mechanisms, the minimum values of
the positive reinforcements are reduced as compared to the values given for linear structural elements.
19.3.3.2 Minimum Reinforcement
To improve the bending performance and ductility as well as to control cracking, minimum values of passive
reinforcement have to be used as defined in table 19.1. This reinforcement should be made up with bars
having high bonding characteristics or by welded wire fabrics.
In the case of flat slabs or slabs with drop panels with active unbounded reinforcement the positive passive
reinforcement should comply with the minimum values in table 19.1 and the negative passive reinforcement
located over the support should have a minimum value:
As 0.00075 h l
where:
h is the depth of the slab
l is the mean span of the slab measured in the direction of the reinforcement to be placed
This reinforcement should cover the area that is transversal to it, including the support area length 1.5 h
for each side.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Table 19.1 - Minimum values for bonded passive reinforcement
Structural
Structural elements with
elements without Structural elements with
Reinforcement unbonded active
active bonded active reinforcement
reinforcement
reinforcement
Negative s min 0.5p 0.67min

s min s min p 0.67min
Reinforcement (see 19.3.3.2)
Positive reinforcement
of slabs reinforced in s 0.67min s 0.67min p 0.5min s min 0.5p 0.5 min
two directions
Positive reinforcement
(main) of slabs
s min s min p 0.5min s min 0.5p 0.5min
reinforced in one
direction
Positive reinforcement As/s 20% of the main reinforcement

(secondary) of slabs
As/s 0.9 cm /m
2
-
reinforced in one
direction s 0.5 min
Where:
s = As/bw h e p = Ap/bw h.
Observation The values of min are shown in table 17.3.
19.3.3.3 Maximum Reinforcement
The maximum value of the bending reinforcement should comply with the limits given in 17.3.5.2 and 17.3.5.3.
19.4 Shearing force in slabs and linear elements with bw 5d
19.4.1 Slabs without reinforcement for shearing force
Solid or ribbed slabs as determined in 17.4.1.1.2-b), may dispense transversal reinforcement to resist to
tension internal forces caused by the shearing force, when the design shearing force complies with the
expression:
VSd VRd1
The design resistance to shearing is given by:
VRd1 = [Rd k (1.2 + 40 1) + 0.15 cp] bwd
where:
Rd = 0.25 fctd
fctd = fctk,inf / c
As1
1 = , is not greater than 0.02
bw d
cp = NSd / Ac

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
k is a coefficient that has the following values:
for elements where 50% of the bottom reinforcement does not reach the support: k = 1;
for the other situations: k = 1.6 - d, not smaller than 1, with d expressed in meters;
where:
Rd design resistance stress of concrete to shearing;
As1 is the area of the tensioned reinforcement that extends until at least d + lb,nec beyond the section
under consideration with lb,nec defined in 9.4.2.5 and figure 9.1;
bw is minimum width of the section along the effective depth d;
NSd is the longitudinal force in the section caused by prestress or loading (positive compression).
Figure 19.1 - Necessary anchorage length
In the zone of anchorage of pretensioned elements with previous bonding the equation that defines VRd1 is
applicable only when the requirements of anchorage are met as defined in 9.4.5. For the elements with
passive reinforcement the restrictions above are also applicable.
In the case of pretensioning the reduction of the effective prestress in the transmission length should be taken
into consideration.
The distribution of this reinforcement along the slab should comply with the provisions in 18.3.2.3.1,
considering for al the value 1.5d.
19.4.2 Slabs with reinforcement for shearing force
The criteria established in 17.4.2 should be applied.
The resistance of the stirrups may be considered as having the following maximum values and linear
interpolation is allowed:
250 MPa, for slabs with thickness up to 15 cm;
435 MPa (fywd ), for slabs with thickness larger than 35 cm.
19.5 Dimensioning of slabs for punching
19.5.1 Design Model
The design model corresponds to the verification against shearing in two or more critical surfaces defined in
the boundary of the concentrated forces.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
In the first critical surface (contour C), of the column or of the concentrated load the stress of the diagonal
compression stress of the concrete should be verified indirectly through the shearing stress.
In the second critical surface (contour C ) distant 2d from the column or of the concentrated load, the capacity
of the connection should be verified for punching associated to the resistance to diagonal tension. This
verification is also done through a shearing stress in the contour C .
If there is such a need the connection should be reinforced by a transversal reinforcement.
The third critical surface (contour C ) should only be verified when it is necessary the placement of a
transversal reinforcement.
19.5.2 Definition of the internal stress in the critical surfaces C and C
19.5.2.1 Internal column with symmetrical load (see figure 19.2)
Situation when the effect of the load may be considered as symmetric:
FSd
Sd =
ud
where:
d = (dx + dy)/2
where:
d is the effective depth of the slab along the critical contour C , external to the contour C of the area of
application of the force and distant from it 2d in the plane of the slab;
dx and dy are effective depth of the two orthogonal directions;
u is the perimeter of the critical outline C ;
ud is the area of the critical surface;
FSd is the design force or concentrated reaction.
The punching force FSd may be reduced from the distributed force applied in the opposite face of the slab
within the contour considered in the verification C or C .
Figure 19.2 - Critical perimeter in internal columns

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
19.5.2.2 Internal column with moment effect
When besides the vertical force there also is a transfer of moment from the slab to the column the asymmetric
effect should be taken into consideration according with the expression:
FSd K MSd
Sd = +
ud Wp d
where:
K is the coefficient that supplies the portion of MSd transmitted to the column through shearing, which
depends of the relation C1/C2.
The coefficient K assumes the values shown in table 19.2.
Table 19.2 - Values of K
C1/C2 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0

K 0.45 0.60 0.70 0.80
where:
C1 is the dimension of the column parallel to the eccentricity of the force;
C2 is the dimension of the column perpendicular to the eccentricity of the force.
The values of Wp should be calculated according to the following expressions:
For a rectangular column:
C12
Wp = + C1 C 2 + 4 C 2 d + 16 d 2 + 2 d C1
2
For a circular column:
W p = (D + 4d )
2
where:
D is the diameter of the column.
Wp may be designed ignoring the curvature of the corners to the critical perimeter using the expression:
u
W p = e dl
0
where:
dl is the infinitesimal length in the critical perimeter u;
e is the distance from dl to the axis that passes through the center of the column on which the
bending moment MSd.acts.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
19.5.2.3 Columns at edges
a) where there is no moment acting on the plane parallel to the free edge:
FSd K1 MSd 1
Sd = +
u*d W p1 d
where:
MSd1 = (MSd - MSd*) 0
where:
FSd is the reaction at the support;
u* is the reduced critical perimeter;
MSd the design moment in the plane perpendicular to the free edge;
MSd* is the design moment resultant from the eccentricity of the reduced critical perimeter u* in regard to
the center of the column;
WP1 is the modulus of plastic resistance perpendicular to the free edge calculated for the perimeter u.
The coefficient K1 assumes the values defined for K in the table 19.2 with C1 and C2 in compliance with figure
19.3.
Figure 19.3 - Critical perimeter in columns at edges
b) when a moment acts in the plane parallel to the free edge:
FSd K1 MSd 1 K 2 MSd 2

Sd = + +
u*d W p1 d Wp 2 d
where:
MSd2 is the design moment in the plane parallel to the free edge;
WP2 is the modulus of plastic resistance in the direction parallel to the free edge calculated by the
perimeter u.
Coefficient K2 assumes the values established for K in table 19.2, replacing C1/C2 per C2/2C1 (where C1 and
C2 are established in figure 19.3).

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
19.5.2.4 Columns at corners
When there is no moment acting in the plane parallel to the edge it is applicable the determinations for
columns at the edge.
As the columns at the corner present two free edges their verification must be done separately for each one
considering the bending moment whose plane is perpendicular to the adopted free edge.
In this case, K should be calculated as a function of the proportion C1/C2, where C1 and C2, respectively, are
the sides of the column perpendicular and parallel to the adopted free edge as in table 19.2 (see figure 19.4).
Figure 19.4 - Critical perimeter in columns at corners
19.5.2.5 Capital or drop panel
When there are capital or drop panels two verifications should be done in the critical outlines C1 and C2, as
shown in figures 19.5.
where:
d is the effective depth of the slab in contour C2;
dc is the effective depth of the slab at the face of the column;
da is the effective depth of the slab at contour C1;
l c is the distance between the edge of the capital or drop panel and the face of the column. Where:
l c 2(dc d) verifying the contour C2 is enough;

2(dc d) < l c 2dc verifying the contour C1 is enough;
l c > 2dc verifying the contours C1 e C2 is necessary.
Figure 19.5 - Definition of the effective depth for capital or drop panels

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
19.5.2.6 Special conditions for definition of critical contours
When contour C presents re-entrances, the critical countour outline C should be parallel to the polygon
circumscribed to contour C (see figure 19.6).
Figure 19.6 Critical perimeter with L shaped contour C
If the slab has an opening placed at a distance shorter than 8d from contour C the part of the critical contour
C between two straight lines that pass through the center of gravity of the application area of the force and
that are tangent to the contour of the opening should not be considered (see figure 19.7).
Figure 19.7 - Critical perimeter near openings in slabs
19.5.2.7 Interaction of the internal normal and tangential forces and moments
The verification of the influence of internal normal forces and moments caused by simple bending or
compression-bending of the slab for the resistance to punching does not need to be verified.
19.5.3 Definition of the resistance stress in critical surfaces C, C and C
19.5.3.1 Verification of the resistance stress of diagonal compression of concrete in the critical
surface C
This verification should be done at contour C in slabs submitted to punching whether they have or not
reinforcement.
Sd Rd2 = 0.27v fcd
where:
= (1 - fck/250), with fck expressed in megapascal;
Sd is designed as defined in 19.5.2.1, with u0 (perimeter of contour C) in the place of u.
The value of Rd2 may be extended in 20% due to the multiple states of stresses at an internal column when
the spans that reach this column do not differ by more than 50% and there are no openings near the column.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
19.5.3.2 Resistance stress in the critical surface C in structural elements or parts without
punching reinforcement
The resistance stress in the critical surface C should be calculated as follows:
Sd Rd1 = 0.13 (1 + 20 / d )(100 f ck )1/ 3
where:
= x y
d = (dx + dy) / 2
where:
d is the effective depth of the slab along the critical contour C at the area of the application of the force
expressed in centimeters;
is geometrical ratio of the bonded bending reinforcement (unbonded reinforcement should be ignored);
x e y are the ratios of reinforcements in the two orthogonal directions calculated as follows:
at the width equal to the dimension or loaded area of the column plus 3d for each one of the
sides;
if near the edge the distance until the edge when smaller than 3d prevails.
This verification should be made in the critical contour C or in C1' and C2' when there are capital or drop
panels or drop panels.
19.5.3.3 Resistance stress in the critical surface C in structural elements or parts with punching
reinforcements
The resistance tension in the critical surface C should be calculated as follows:
d A sw f ywd sen
Sd Rd 3 = 0.10 (1 + 20 / d ) (100 f ck )1 / 3 + 1.5
sr ud
where:
sr 0.75d
where:
sr is the radial spacing between lines of the punching reinforcement that are not greater than 0.75d;
Asw is the area of the punching reinforcement in a complete contour parallel to C ;
is the inclination angle between the axis of the punching reinforcement and the plane of the slab;
u is the critical perimeter or reduced critical perimeter in the case of columns at the edge or corner.
fywd is the design resistance of the punching reinforcement when not greater than 300 MPa for connectors
or 250 MPa for stirrups (CA-50 or CA-60 steel). For slabs with thickness larger than 15 cm these values
may be augmented as established in 19.4.2.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
This reinforcement should be made, prevailingly with three or more lines of connectors of the stud type with
enlarged edges placed according to the radius from the perimeter of the column. Each one of the edges
should be anchored outside the plane of the corresponding bending reinforcement plane.
19.5.3.4 Definition of the critical surface C
When it is necessary to use a transversal reinforcement it should be extended in parallel contours to C until,
in a contour C 2d far from the last contour of the reinforcement (see figures19.8 and 19.9) in a contour, the
reinforcement is not needed anymore, that is to say sd Rd1 (19.5.3.2).
Figure 19.8 - Placement of the punching reinforcement in plan and contour of the critical surface C
Figure 19.9 - Placement of the punching reinforcement in section
When a punching reinforcement is needed three verifications should be done:
stress resistance to compression of the concrete in the contour C as defined in 19.5.3.1;
tension resistance to punching in contour C considering the punctioned reinforcement as in 19.5.3.3;
stress resistance to punching in contour C , without punction reinforcement in compliance with 19.5.3.2.
19.5.3.5 Mandatory punction reinforcement
When the global stability of the structure depends on the resistance of the slab to punching a punching
reinforcement should be used even if Sd is lower than Rd1 . This reinforcement should balance a minimum of
50% of FSd .

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
19.5.4 Progressive collapse
To guarantee the local ductility and the consequent protection against progressive collapse the bottom
bending reinforcement that crosses contour C should be sufficiently anchored beyond the contour C as
shown in figure 19.10, and should be as follows:
As fyd FSd
where:
As is the sum of all the areas of the bars that cross each of the faces of the column.
Figure 19.10 - Reinforcement against progressive collapse
19.5.5 Verification of prestressed structural elements
The verification should be done as follows:
Sd,ef = Sd Pd
where:
Pk inf,i sen i
Pd =
ud
where:
Pd is the stress due to the effect of the prestressing inclined tendons that cross the contour under
consideration and run at less than d/2 of the face of the column (see figure 19.11);
Pkinf,i is the prestress force of tendon i;
i is the inclination of the tendon i in regard to the plane of the slab in the contour under consideration;
u is the critical perimeter of the contour under consideration in which Sd,ef and Sd.are calculated.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Figure 19.11 - Favorable effect of inclined tendons

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
20 Detailing of slabs
20.1 General provisions
The reinforcement should be placed so as to guarantee their position during the pouring of concrete.
All bars of bending reinforcement should have diameters at most equal to h/8.
The bars of the bending main reinforcement should have spacing that may not exceed 2h or 20 cm the
smaller of these two values prevail in the area of the major bending moments.
The bending secondary reinforcement should be equal to or greater than 20% of the major reinforcement, and
should keep spacing among the bars of at most 33 cm. The splicing of these bars should comply with the
same criteria of joining bars of the major reinforcement.
The stirrups in ribbed slabs when needed should not have spacing exceeding 20 cm.
20.2 Free edges and openings
In free edges and near openings the minimum provisions contained in figure 20.1 should be complied with.
Figure 20.1 - Free edges and openings
20.3 Slabs without beams
20.3.1 Passive reinforcement
In slabs without beams whether solid or ribbed, calculated in accordance with the approximated process
shown in 14.7.8, the provisions contained in Figure 20.2 should be respected.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Figure 20.2 - Slabs without beams
At least two bottom bars should run continuously over the supports; the reinforcement should also protect
against progressive collapse as shown in 19.5.4.
In slabs with capital or drop panels, the interrupted bottom bars should penetrate at least 30 cm or 24 in the
capital or drop panel besides complying with the other provisions.
The anchorage conditions provided in section 9 should also be complied with.
20.3.2 Prestressed slabs
20.3.2.1 Maximum spacing among tendons
A maximum space of 6 h, not exceeding 120 cm should be kept among tendons or bundles of tendons.
20.3.2.2 Maximum width to place tendons in an external support strips
Tendons placed in the external support strips should be contained in a portion of slabs so that the width of the
latter does not exceed the dimension in plan of the support column, considered transversally to the
longitudinal direction of the strips, plus 3.5 times the thickness of the slab for each one of the sides of the
column.
20.3.2.3 Minimum space among tendons or bundles of tendons
Among tendons or bundles of tendons, or among tendons and passive reinforcements a minimum spacing of
5 cm should be kept.
20.3.2.4 Minimum cover
The minimum cover of the tendons in regard to the face of the slabs openings should be 7.5 cm.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
20.3.2.5 Deviation
The deviation of tendon or bundle of tendons in the plane of the slab should produce a maximum inclination of
1/10 in the imaginary chord that ties the beginning to the end of this part keeping its development in
accordance with a parabolic curve in plan. All along the deviation the set of tendons or bundles should be
placed so as to keep a distance of 5 cm between tendons in the central area of the curve.
When the deviation exceeds the specified limits, reinforcement capable of resisting the force caused by this
deviation should be used.
20.3.2.6 Passive and active reinforcements
The passive reinforcement against progressive collapse is not necessary if at least one tendon in each
orthogonal direction passes across the inner side of the longitudinal reinforcement contained in the transversal
section of the columns or support elements of slabs with capital or drop panels in commercial or residential
buildings.
It is mandatory to place at least four bars in the tensioned face on the support of the prestressed slabs with
drop panels; these bars should be placed in a width that may not exceed the width of the support plus three
times the total depth of the slab. The bars should have at most 30 cm spacing among them and placed at a
minimum distance equal to 1/6 of the free span existing among supports in the direction of the reinforcement
and measured from the face of the support.
In prestress slabs having unbonded mono-strands four tendons at maximum may be placed in bundles.
20.4 Punching reinforcement
When necessary, the reinforcement to resist punching should be made of vertical stirrups or studs; when
possible the use of studs should be chosen.
The diameter of the stirrups reinforcement may not exceed h/20 and a mechanical contact between
longitudinal bars and the corners of the stirrups (mechanical anchorage) should exist.
The minimum zones where the punching reinforcement should be placed as well as regulated distances to be
complied with are shown in figure 20.3.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Figure 20.3 - Punching reinforcement

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
21 Special zones
21.1 Introduction
Considering the effects of this Code special zones are those that are not covered by the models described
formally due to the inapplicability of the hypothesis of a plane section in these zones.
21.2 Zones of introduction of concentrated loads
21.2.1 Contact pressure in reduced area
If there is a load in a reduced area, reinforcement able to resist all the tension internal forces should be used
whenever the possibility of crack in the concrete may endanger the resistance of the structural element.
When the load acts in an area that is smaller than that of the surface of the structural element the resistance
of the concrete may be considered as increased but it cannot exceed the design resistant value corresponding
to crushing given by the expression:
FRd = A c 0 f cd A c1 / A c 0 3.3 f cd A c 0
where:
Ac0 is the reduced area uniformly loaded;
Ac1 is the maximum area with the same shape and the same gravity center than Ac0, inscribed in area Ac2;
Ac2 is a total area situated in the same plane as Ac0
If Ac0 is rectangular, the proportion between the sides should not be greater than 2.
The values given by this equation should be reduced if the load is not uniformly distributed or if shearing
internal forces exist. This expression is not applicable to prestressed anchorages whose safety should be
guaranteed by certification tests of the system.
Figure 21.1 illustrates some cases in which cracking may damage resistance of the structural element and
where a reinforcement should be used so as to resist the tension internal forces.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Figure 21.1 - Areas of localized pressure
21.2.2 Concrete hinges
These are the hinges obtained through a reduced nucleus of concrete transmitting internal forces that may be
reduced to a force and whose inclination should not exceed 1/8 as shown in figure 21.2.
Figure 21.2 Zone of hinge of concrete
21.2.3 Zone of introduction of prestressing
To design these zones, three-dimensional models should be considered, as the dimensions of the support
surfaces of the anchorage are small as compared to the transversal section of the structural element.
These zones may be calculated with the help of the method of struts and ties and should be analyzed and
designed considering:
a) the global equilibrium of the zone;
b) the effects of the transversal tension (bursting) due to anchorages taken one by one or as a set;

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
c) the effects of compression in this area (crushing).
21.2.4 Loads applied on surfaces of structural elements
Loads applied through metallic devices, anchored bolts, etc., are included in this subsection and they may
correspond to compressive, tension, shearing or other combined internal forces.
The verification of local effects in the case of compression should comply with the provisions of 21.2.1. In the
case of tension the pulling out should be verified and in the case of shearing, the crushing in the edge of the
concrete when in contact with the anchored bolts in accordance with the applicable sections of this Code and
the technical specialized bibliography.
Special care should be taken in the design and the detailing of the reinforcement of the structural element so
as to obtain the transfer and continuity of the resistance of the tension forces introduced by the anchored bolts
thus guaranteeing the equilibrium of the set. Figure 21.3 shows such an example.
Figure 21.3 - Pressures close to an embedded bolt in a concrete structural element
21.3 Holes and openings
21.3.1 Generalities
Structures whose design requires the existence of openings should be designed and detailed considering the
disturbances of stresses that concentrate around these openings; therefore besides reinforcements to resist
tension internal forces already mentioned in this Code, complementary reinforcements placed in the contour
and in the corners of the openings should also be used.
The limits of the dimension of holes and openings may be consulted in section 13.
21.3.2 Walls and deep-beams
Whenever openings are placed in zones less subjected to internal forces and do not significantly modify the
functioning of the structural element it is enough to use a compatibilization reinforcement of the opening with
the whole set. If not, a specific model of design should be adopted for the case under consideration based, for
example, on the method of finite elements or of the struts and ties (see figure 21.4).

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Figure 21.4 - Openings in deep-beams of reinforced concrete
21.3.3 Openings that cross beams in the direction of the height
The openings in beams, contained in their principal plane, with holes to allow vertical tubing in buildings
(see21.5) cannot have diameter larger than 1/3 of the width of these beams in the zones near these holes.
The reduction of their bearing capacity against shearing and bending in the area of the opening should be
verified.
The minimum distance of a hole to the nearer face of the beam should be at least equal to 5 cm and twice the
cover foreseen for this face. The remaining section in this area having diminished the area occupied by the
hole should be capable to resist internal forces foreseen in the design, besides allowing a good concrete
pouring.
In the case of being necessary a set of holes, the holes should be aligned and the distance between their
faces should be at least 5 cm or the diameter of the hole and each spacing should contain at least one stirrup.
In the case of structural elements submitted to torsion these limits should be adjusted so as to allow an
adequate functioning.
Figure 21.5 - Vertical opening in beams

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
21.3.4 Openings in slabs
In the case of openings in slabs the following conditions should be complied with in any situation that may
occur and also comply with the provisions in section 13.
a) the section of concrete remaining from the central part or over the support of the slab should be able to
equilibrate the internal forces in the ultimate limit state that correspond to this section without openings;
b) sections of interrupted reinforcements should be replaced by duly anchored equivalent sections of

reinforcing;
c) in the case of openings in areas nearby columns, in flat or drop panel slabs, the model of the design
should foresee the equilibrium of the acting shearing forces in these areas.
21.4 Nodes in frames and connections between walls
Caused by the change in the direction of the structural elements the resistance of the set depends on the
resistance to tension of the concrete and of the placement of the reinforcement, which should be considered
in the dimensioning.
21.5 Connection of precast structural elements
The provisions in ABNT NBR 9062 should be complied with.
21.6 Concrete joints
The design for a concrete construction joint should indicate in an accurate way the place and the configuration
of its surface.
Whenever the bonding and rugosity between the new concrete and the existing one are not ensured binding
reinforcements duly anchored in zones capable to resist tension internal forces should be foreseen.
22 Special elements
22.1 Introduction
For the effects of this Code special elements are structural elements characterized by a behavior that does
not comply with the hypothesis of plane sections, as they are not sufficiently long so as to dissipate localized
disturbances. Deep-beams, corbels, brackets and dapped ends as well as for foundation blocks are such type
of elements.
Special elements should be designed and dimensioned using appropriate theoretical models whenever they
are not analyzed in this Code.
As these elements are very important for structures, the design of internal forces and moments should be
factored by an additional coefficient n, in compliance with ABNT NBR 8681.
22.2 Deep-beams
22.2.1 Concept
Deep-beams are considered as such whenever the ratio span-height l/h is lower than two in beams over two
supports and smaller than 3 in continuous beams. They may support either superior or inferior loads (see
figure 22.1).

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Figure 22.1 - Two most common types of deep-beams regarding loading
22.2.2 Structural behavior
The structural behavior of deep-beams has some specific characteristics; prevailingly, they have inefficiencies
in bending and shearing when compared with usual beams.
As deep-beams being high, they have stability problems as rigid bodies and, sometimes, of elastic stability.
Bracings or rigid supports are nearly always needed.
Disturbances caused by concentrated loads, openings or thickenings should be taken into consideration.
These disturbances may significantly influence the behavior and resistance of the structural element.
22.2.3 Design model
To design and dimension deep-beams, plane elastic or non-linear models can be used as well as strut and tie
models are allowed. Whichever the chosen model, it should adequately take into consideration the aspects
defined in 22.2.2.
22.2.4 Detailing
22.2.4.1 Bending reinforcement
In the deep-beams, tensioned ties cannot be concentrated either in one or in a few layers of reinforcements,
as they have to cover all the effectively tensioned zone in accordance with the chosen design model.
In beams that have two supports as shown in figure 22.2, this reinforcement should be distributed up to height
level 0,15 h.
It should be taken into consideration the fact that in continuous deep-beams the height of distribution of the
negative reinforcement at the supports is still higher.
22.2.4.2 Anchorage of (positive) bending reinforcement at supports
Bending reinforcement should be totally extended until attaining the supports and be well anchored there.
Hooks in the vertical plane should not be used; hoops and headpins on the horizontal plane should have
preference or special devices (see figure 22.2).
22.2.4.3 Transversal reinforcement
Transversal reinforcement should be designed considering provisions in 22.2.2 and complying with the
minimum value 0.075% bh per face.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
In the case of loads at the lower part of the beam this reinforcement should be capable of suspending the
whole applied load. (see figure 22.2).
These reinforcements should involve the horizontal, major or secondary reinforcements.
Figure 22.2 - Typical reinforcement of deep-beams with h l
22.3 Corbels and dapped ends
22.3.1 Corbels and dapped ends
22.3.1.1 Concept
Corbels are cantilevered elements in which the distance (a) of the applied load to the face of the support is
smaller or equal to the effective depth (d) of the corbel (see figure 22.3).
Corbels are short when 0.5 d a d and very short when a < 0.5 d.
When a > d it should be considered as a cantilever beam and not as a corbel.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Figure 22.3 Strut and tie model for short corbels
22.3.1.2 Structural behavior
Short corbels have a typical behavior that may be described as a strut and tie model. The tie at the top of the
corbel is anchored at one side in the strut under vertical external loads Fd and at the other side in the column
or support. The inclined strut extends from the load until the face of the column or support using all the
available height of the corbel (see figure 22.3). Some aspects are fundamental for the success of this
behavior:
a) adequate anchorage of the tie wrapping the strut, just under the support device;
b) the ratio of the reinforcement of the tie to be considered in the design must have a upper limit to its top so
as to guarantee the yield before concrete is ruptured;
c) verification of the equivalent resistance to compression by the strut or shearing force at the face of the
column so as to guarantee with adequate safety that a brittle rupture through the strut is avoided. To
verify the strut, the opening of the load under the support plate may be considered in according to
indications in figure 22.3 and has to be limited to a maximum inclination 1:2 in regard to the vertical plane
in the extreme points A and C (or E) of the enlarged supporting area;
d) it is fundamental to consider the horizontal internal forces to dimension the corbels and their consequent
unfavorable effects in the inclination of the resultant Fd (see figure 22.3). The ABNT NBR 9062 defines
the minimum values for these internal forces;
e) in general, where there are horizontal or transversal loads or eccentricities on the vertical loads in the
width of the console it is considered that there is a torsion in the corbel; the observable structural
behavior in this case, is that of a strut and tie model outside the medium plane of the corbel usually with
thinner struts and ties, that is to say, a spatial truss observed in the torsion of beams does not occur as
there is not sufficient length for it to take place.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
The very short corbels have a behavior similar to those of short corbels but the differences should not be
ignored. Struts get curved or form arches in the plane of the corbel and as a consequence, increases the
importance of the horizontal hoops reinforcement that now have a significant participation in the resistance of
the corbel and not only in its ductility.
22.3.1.3 Design model
To design and dimension corbels, plane linear or not-linear models can be used (except not plane for torsion),
strut and ties or shear friction- models; each case has its own field of application.
Whichever the model adopted, it should include the fundamental aspects determined in 22.3.1.2 and have
undergone experimental tests or be based on basic models that have already been widely proved by tests.
22.3.1.4 Detailing
22.3.1.4.1 Tie reinforcement
As the tie is very short from the external face of the corbel until the opposed face of the column (or support), it
is essential to take care of the anchorage of the reinforcement foreseen for this tie at its two edges, especially
in the side nearer to the edge of the corbel.
In this face no hook in the vertical plane should be used so as to avoid ruins caused by the rupture of a corner
or of the lateral cover of the hook. These vertical hooks may only be accepted in slab corbels.
In areas under concentrated loads a more efficient anchorage should be used with hairpins in the horizontal
plane or transversal bars welded to the reinforcement of the tie or still welded metallic plates at the ends of the
bars of the reinforcement (tie) (see figure 22.4), in accordance with 9.4.7.1.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Figure 22.4 - Typical reinforcement for short corbels
22.3.1.4.2 Support devices
The position and the dimensions of support devices should be adopted so as to allow the tie to wrap around
the strut as in the detail of the plan of the tie (see figure 22.4) taking into account the unfavorable effects of the
inclined resultant of the loads on the support plate due to horizontal forces.
22.3.1.4.3 Reinforcement of splicing
The design of short corbels or very short corbels without loop reinforcement is not allowed. It is fundamental to
enable a more ductile rupture of the corbel and avoid the reduction of the rupture load.
22.3.1.4.4 Suspension reinforcement
When there is an indirect load a suspension reinforcement should be foreseen for the entire applied load.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
22.3.2 Dapped ends
22.3.2.1 Concept
The dapped ends are protuberances that project themselves in the upper part of the end of a beam with the
purpose to support it in a corbel constructed at the face of a column or in the lower region of the end of
another beam. Usually both corbel and dapped end have depths somewhat shorter than the half of the depth
of the beam; the same concepts and geometric limitations valid for corbels also have to be complied with in
the case of dapped ends.
22.3.2.2 Behavior
Dapped ends have a structural behavior that is similar to those of the corbels and may also be described by a
strut and tie model. The more important differences are:
a) struts usually are more inclined because they should seek support in suspension reinforcements inside
the beams at the opposed edge in regard to the point of the applied load (see figure 22.5);
b) the main reinforcement has to penetrate the beam searching for anchorage in the strut due to the
shearing of the beam;
c) suspension reinforcement should be designed for total force Fd..
Figure 22.5 Strut and tie model for dapped ends
22.3.2.3 Design model
To design and dimension the same principles established for corbels may be used whenever the necessary
corrections are done to compensate for the differences determined in 22.3.2.2.
22.3.2.4 Detailing
The provisions of 22.3.1.4, except 22.3.1.4.4, are applicable as dapped ends loses their functions in the case
of indirect loads.
The provisions in 22.3.2.4.2 to 22.3.2.4.5. also have to be complied with.
This reinforcement should be made up of stirrups along all the depth of the beam whenever possible, and are
to be concentrated in its end in compliance with figure 22.5.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
22.3.2.4.3 Anchorage of principal reinforcement
Principal reinforcement should be anchored from their crossing with the first strut of the beam in its total depth.
22.3.2.4.4 Anchorage of the lower reinforcement of beams
The bending reinforcement of beams should be well anchored in the zone in which the suspension
reinforcement is applied.
If this part is not large enough, the use of horizontal headpins of welded transversal bars is recommended.
22.3.2.4.5 Special cases
If bent-up bars are to be used to lift the load or longitudinal prestressed reinforcement of the beam the model
for the design should be adapted to it.
22.4 Footings
22.4.1 Concept
Footings are volume structures used to transmit to the soil the loads of the foundation whenever there is a
direct foundation.
When the expression as follows occurs, footings are considered as being rigid. In opposite cases footings are
considered as being flexible:
h (a ap)/3
where:
h is the height of the footing;
a is the dimension of the skid in a specific direction;
ap is the dimension of the column in the same direction.
For rigid footings a plane distribution of the normal stresses in the contact footing-soil may be used whenever
there is not more detailed information available.
For flexible footings or extreme cases of foundations on rocks, even with rigid footings this hypothesis should
be reconsidered.
The structural behavior of footings, once eliminated the complexity of the interaction soil-structure through the
hypothesis in 22.4.1, may be described separating the footings in rigid and flexible.
22.4.2.2 Rigid footings
Their structural behavior may be characterized as follows:
a) flexure in two directions admitting that for each one of them the tension-bending is uniformly distributed in
the corresponding width of the footing. This hypothesis does not apply in the cases of compression-
bending which is more concentrated in the zone of the column which is supported by the footing and it is
not applicable in the case of very elongated footings in regard to the shape of the column;

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
b) shearing forces also in two directions without rupture due to diagonal tension but rather a diagonal
compression to be verified as in 19.5.3.1. This takes place because rigid footings remain within the
hypothetical punching cone therefore there is no physical possibility of punching.
22.4.2.3 Flexible footings
Although more rare, these footings are used in foundations having small loads and relatively weak soils. Their
behavior is characterized by:
a) flexure in the two directions, as it is impossible to admit tension bending uniformly distributed in the
corresponding width of the footing. The concentration of the bending near the column should be
estimated;
b) shearing that can be described by the phenomenon of punching (see 19.5).
The plane distribution of stresses in the contact footing-soil should be verified.
22.4.3 Design model
For the design and dimensioning of footings linearly or by three-dimensional strut and ties, models should be
used and whenever applicable, bending models may also be used. These models have to include the aspects
described in 22.4.2; only exceptionally the models of design should include the interaction soil-structure.
22.4.4 Detailing
22.4.4.1 Rigid footings
22.4.4.1.1 Bending reinforcement
The bending reinforcement should be uniformly distributed along the width of the footing extending totally from
face its face and ending in a hook on both its extremities.
For bars with 20 mm hooks having 135 or 180 should be used. For bars with 25mm shearing in the
horizontal plane should be verified as the loosening of all the mesh of the reinforcement may occur.
22.4.4.1.2 Dowel or extended reinforcement bar of columns
Footings should be sufficiently high as to allow the anchorage of dowel or extended reinforcement bar. In this
anchorage the favorable effect of the transversal compression to the bars should be taken into consideration
as they result from the bending of the footing (see section 9).
22.4.4.1.3 Flexible footings
The requirements in regard to slabs and punching should be complied with (see sections 19 and 20).
22.5 Blocks on piles
22.5.1 Concept
Blocks are volumetric structures used to transmit to the piles the loads of the foundation and they may be
considered rigid or flexible by criteria that are analogous to those used for footings.
In the case of a set of rigid blocks and piles with spaces of 2,5 to 3 where is the diameter of the pile) a
plane distribution of the loads on the piles may be admitted.
For flexible blocks or, in radical cases of short piles supported by a very rigid substract this hypothesis should
be reviewed.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
22.5.2.1 Rigid block
The structural behavior is characterized by:
a) flexure in two directions but with tension essentially concentrated on the lines over the top of the piles
(reticulate defined by the axis of the piles with width of stripes equal to 1.2 times their diameter);
b) loads transmitted from the column to the piles essentially by compression of struts with complex shapes
and dimensions;
c) shearing forces also in two directions that do not present rupture by diagonal tensions but rather by
compression of the struts in an analogous way to the footings.
22.5.2.2 Flexible blocks
For this kind of block a more complete analysis should be done from the distribution of the internal forces and
moments in the piles, of the tension ties until the need to verify the punching.
22.5.3 Design model
For the design and dimensioning of blocks, linear or not three-dimensional models are accepted, strut and tie
three-dimensional models may be used, the latter, however, are preferred as they better define the distribution
of the internal forces by the ties. These models should comply with the aspects described in 22.5.2.
Whenever there are significant horizontal internal forces or strong asymmetry the model should consider the
interaction soil-structure.
22.5.4 Detailing
22.5.4.1 Rigid blocks
22.5.4.1.1 Bending reinforcement
Bending reinforcement should be essentially placed (more than 85%) in the stripes defined by the piles in
equilibrium proportions in regard to their respective struts.
The bars should extend from one face to the other of the block and then end in hooks in both ends. For bars
with 20 mm hooks of 135 or 180 should be used.
The anchorage of the reinforcements of each one of these stripes should be guaranteed and measured from
the face of the piles. The favorable effect of transversal compression of bars may be considered having being
caused by the compression of the struts (see section 9).
22.5.4.1.2 Distribution reinforcement
To control cracking an additional reinforcement in a mesh uniformly distributed in two directions for the
maximum of 20% of the total internal forces should be foreseen, thus completing the main reinforcement,
calculated with a design resistance equal to 80% of the fyd.
If the distribution of reinforcement is designed for more than 25% of the total internal forces or if the spacing
between the piles is larger than 3 , suspension reinforcement should be foreseen for the portion of the load
to be equilibrated.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
22.5.4.1.4 Dowel or extended reinforcement of columns
The block should be sufficiently high so as to allow the anchorage of dowel or extended reinforcements. In this
anchorage the favorable effect of the transversal compression of the bars caused by the bending of the
footing may be considered (see section 9).
22.5.4.2 Flexible blocks
They should comply with the requirements in regard to slabs and punching (see sections 19 and 20).

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
23 Dynamic Actions and Fatigue
So as to simplify the understanding and, therefore the use of the concepts defined in this section, the more
frequently used symbols that could generate doubts are defined as follows.
The symbols in this section follow the same criteria established in section 4. Therefore, the subscripted
symbols have the same meaning as explained in 4.3.
f - frequency
fcrit - critical frequency
23.2 Generalities
Dynamic actions may cause serviceability limit states and ultimate limit states due to excessive vibration or
fatigue of the materials.
23.3 Limit State of Excessive Vibrations
The analysis of the vibrations may be made in a linear method in the case of usual structures.
To ensure a satisfactory behavior of the structures submitted to vibrations, the vibrations of the frequency the
structure itself (f) have to be separated from the critical frequency (fcrit) that depends on the purpose of the
building itself.
f > 1.2 fcrit
The behavior of the structures that are submitted to cyclic dynamic actions that cause vibrations may be
modified through alterations in some factors as, for example, dynamic actions, natural frequency (through
changes in the rigidity of the structure or of the vibrating mass) and increase in the damping characteristics.
When the critical action is originated in a machine, the critical frequency becomes that of the machine
operation.
In this case, maybe it is not enough to keep away the two frequencies, that of the machine and the critical
one. Especially when the machine is turned on during the acceleration process, generally it is necessary to
increase the mass or to damp the structure so as to absorb part of the energy involved.
In special cases when the provisions described above cannot be met, a more accurate dynamic analysis has
to be done in compliance with the international codes while the specific Brazilian Code has not been regulated
yet.
In the lack of experimentally determined values, the values indicated in table 23.1 for fcrit may be adopted.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Table 23.1 - Critical frequency in some special cases of structures submitted to vibrations by actions
of people
fcrit
Case
Hz
Sportive gymnasium 8.0
Dancing halls or halls for concert with no fixed 7.0
chairs
Offices 3.0 to 4.0
Concert halls with fixed chairs 3.4
Passageway for pedestrians or cyclists 1.6 to 4.5
23.4 Ultimate limit state caused by resonance or dynamic amplification
In general the dynamic amplification may be determined through a linear elastic method. When the impact
coefficient is defined in the specific Brazilian Code that is going to be the value to be used.
23.5 Ultimate limit state of fatigue
23.5.1 Cyclical action
The fatigue is a phenomenon associated to repeated actions, which may be understood as a process of
progressive and permanent modifications in the inner structure of a material submitted to oscillation of
stresses caused by these actions.
This Code does not deal with actions of high intensity able to cause damages with less than 20,000 repetitions.
The actions with medium and low intensity and repetitions up to 2,000,000 cycles are focused in the
provisions in this section. To consider the specter of actions it is admitted that it may be excluded those with
vehicles having total loads up to 30 KN in the case of highway bridges.
In the case of a combination of actions of a specific spectrum of loads the Palmgren-Miner rule is to be
complied with, that is to say, it is supposed that the damages from fatigue accumulate linearly with the
quantity of cycles applied at a certain level of stresses; The expression as follows should be complied with:
ni
1
Ni
where:
ni is the number of repetitions applied under a specific stress condition;
Ni is the number of repetitions that could cause rupture from fatigue for the same condition of applied
stresses.
23.5.2 Combination of actions to be considered
Although the phenomenon of fatigue is controlled by the accumulation of the damaging effect of repeated
internal forces and moments the verification of fatigue may be done considering a sole level of internal forces
and moments that is expressed by a frequent combination of actions (see section 11) as follows:

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
m n
Fd,ser = i =1
Fgik + 1 Fq1k +
j= 2
2j Fqjk
To verify the fatigue the value of the reduction factor 1 should be considered according to the type of
construction and to the structural element.
For highway bridges:
1 = 0.5 for verification of beams;
1 = 0.7 for verification of the transversals;
1 = 0.8 for verification of the deck slabs.
For railway bridges:
1 = 1.0.
For beams that support traveling cranes:
1 = 1.0.
In the special cases of traveling cranes of less frequent operation whenever the number of cycles is
6
significantly lower than 2 x 10 , the resistance to fatigue may be increased as determined in 23.5.5.
23.5.3 Design model
To verify the fatigue in concrete or steel the internal forces and moments may be calculated according to an
elastic procedure.
The calculation of the stresses caused by a compression-bending should be done in stage II where the
resistance to tension of concrete is ignored.
The calculation of stresses caused by shearing force on beams should be done by the use of models 1 or 2
shown in 17.4.2.2 and 17.4.2.3 respectively, with a reduction of the contribution of concrete as follows:
in model 1 the value of Vc should be multiplied by the reduction factor 0.5;
in model 2 the inclination of the diagonals of compression , should be corrected by the equation:
tg cor = tg 1
where :
f = 1.0
c = 1.4
s = 1.0
For the calculation of internal forces and moments verification of stresses it is admitted the elastic linear model
with = 10 (relation of the modulus of elasticity for steel and concrete).
To calculate the stresses in the steel of a passive or active bonded reinforcement, the linear elastic behavior
may be considered using the compatibility of the deformations and multiplying the steel stress by factor s to
obtain the bonding difference between prestressed steel and steel of passive reinforcement.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Ap
1+
As
s = 1
Ap
1+ s
As p
where:
As is the area of the passive reinforcement;
Ap is the area of the active reinforcement;
s is the smaller diameter of the steel of a passive reinforcement in the section under consideration;
p is the diameter of the prestressed steel (for bundles, eq = 1,6 Ap , where: Ap is the area of the
transversal section of the bundle);
is the relation between the resistance to bond of prestressed steel and that of the steel of passive
reinforcement (high bond).
Values of in post tension:
= 0.2 for smooth prestressed steel;
= 0.4 for strand;
= 0.6 for indented steel;
= 1.0 for ribbed bars.
Values of in pre-tension:
= 0.6 for strands;
= 0.8 for indented steel.
The criteria for the verification of fatigue caused by shearing force on beams are based on the reduction of the
contribution of concrete and of alternative options estimated based on the reduction of the resistance to
7
tension of concrete under cyclical load which is equivalent to use for 10 cycles 50% of the static resistance to
tension. This is equal to reducing the Vc value of the contribution of the concrete to 50 % of its static value.
23.5.4 Verification of fatigue in concrete
23.5.4.1 Compressive concrete
This verification for the concrete under compression is complied with if:
c f c,max fcd,fad
where:
fcd,fad = 0.45 fcd
1
c =
(
1,5 0,5 c1 / c 2 )

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
where:
c is a factor that takes into consideration the gradient of compression stress in concrete;
c1 is the smaller modulus value of the compression stress at a distance of up to 300 mm of the face
under the relevant combination of loads (figure23.1);
c2 is the larger modulus value of the compression stress at a distance of up to 300 mm of the face
under the same combination of loads used to calculate c1 (figure 23.1).
Figure 23.1 - Definition of stresses c1 and c2
23.5.4.2 Tensioned concrete
The verification of the fatigue in tensioned concrete is complied with if:
f ct,max fctd,fad
where:
fctd, fad = 0.3 fctd,inf
23.5.5 Verification of fatigue in reinforcement
This verification is complied with when the maximum variation of the calculated stress s, with a frequent
combination of loads responds to:
f Ss fsd,fad
where the values of fsd,fad are shown in table 23.2.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
1)
Table 23.2 - Parameters for curves S-N (Woeller) for steels within concrete
Passive reinforcement, CA-50 steel

Values of fsd,fad,min, for 2x10 cycles
6
MPa

2)
Situation mm Type
10 12.5 16 20 22 25 32 40
Straight or bent bars with
190 190 190 185 180 175 165 150 T1
D 25
Straight or bent bars with:
D < 25
105 105 105 105 100 95 90 85 T1
D = 5 < 20 mm
D = 8 20 mm
Stirrups
85 85 85 - - - - - T1
D = 3 10 mm
Maritime environment
65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 T4
Class 4
Welded bars (took and butt welding) and
85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 T4
mechanical connectors
Active reinforcement
Values of fpd,fad,min, for 2x10 cycles
6
Situation
MPa
Pre-tensioned, straight wire or strand 150 T1
Post-tensioned, curved tendons 110 T2
Straight tendons 150 T1
Mechanical and anchorage connectors (situation of

70 T3
a lubricated strand)
1)
to certify productive processes and warrant the values in this table bar tests in open air are accepted. The fluctuation of
stresses should be measured based on the maximum stress of 80% of the nominal yield stress and the frequency of 5
Hz to 10 Hz.
2)
See table 23.3.
Table 23.3 - Types of S-N curves
Type N* k1 k2
6
T1 10 5 9
6
T2 10 3 7
6
T3 10 3 5
7
T4 10 3 5

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
The function of the steel resistance to fatigue represented in scale log. (see figure 23.2) is expressed in
segments of straight lines of form (fSd,fad) x N = constant.
m
Figure 23.2 - Shape of the characteristic resistance curves to fatigue (S-N curves) for steel
A larger fatigue than the one of the straight bar should not be taken into consideration.
Whenever it is possible to prove experimentally that the steel to be used in the structure presents
characteristics of resistance to fatigue higher than those shown here, the use of these characteristics in the
design is allowed.
Whenever there are brands of the manufacturer the latter should indicate the consequent values of resistance
to fatigue resulting from an eventual stress concentration caused by the relieve shape of the brand on the bar.
It is considered that the values presented for fatigue resistance of steel in passive reinforcement refer to high
bond ribbed bars in which the transversal and longitudinal relieves do not cross each other nor present:
r
< 0,5
h
where:
h is the height of the relief;
r is the radius of the curve of indentation concurrence in relation to the body of the bar.
In the lack of specific experimental data that prove that bars which do not comply with this configuration as
shown in table 23.2, it is allowed to use them with a reduction of 30% in the limit stress of fluctuation defined
in table 23.2.
23.6 Serviceability limit states
The modifications caused by the repetition of the internal forces and moments may significantly alter the
structures from the point of view of their behavior in service especially in regard to the appearance of cracks
that did not exist under static actions and intensifying already existing cracks and the increase of deformations.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
The increase of deformations is progressive under cyclic dynamic actions and is added to the increase of the
deformations caused by creep. In the lack of conclusive experimental data the cyclical effect may be
calculated by the following expression:
an = a1[1,5 0,5 exp ( 0,05 n 0,25 )]
where:
th
an is the deformation in the n cycle due to a maximum load;
a1 is the deformation in the same cycle due to a maximum load;
n is the number of cycles.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
24 Plain concrete
ea Additional eccentricity
ex , ey Eccentricities in directions x , y
exa , eya Additional eccentricities in directions x , y
Ae Effective area
c Specific deformation (strain)of concrete
c,lim Compression strain of concrete at rupture
ct Tension strain of concrete
ct,lim - Tension strain of concrete at rupture
cmd Design mean compression stress of concrete
TRd Design resistance shearing stress in torsion
wRd Design resistance shearing stress to shear force
Rd Design resistance shearing stress
24.2 Application
The structural plain concrete should comply with some basic conditions such as lateral confinement (case of
piles or pipes), compression in all the transversal section (in the case of arches), a continuous vertical support
on the ground or in another structural element (in the case of columns, walls, blocks or pilasters).
It is not allowed the use of plain concrete in structures that may undergo sisms or explosions and in cases
where ductility is an important quality of the structure.
24.3 Materials and properties
The requirements for concrete should comply with section 8; and concrete may be used from class C10
(ABNT NBR 8953) up.
24.4 Joints and construction provisions
Expansion joints should be foreseen for, at least, every 15 m. Whenever larger spacing is necessary, the
design should also consider the effects of thermal shrinkage of concrete (originated by hydratation heat), of
hydraulic shrinkage and of decreases in temperature.
Any existing reinforcement in plain concrete should end at least at a distance of 6 cm of the joints.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Concrete interruptions may only be made at the joints.
The lateral stability of the elements made up of plain concrete should be ensured with use of bracing (see
section 15).
24.5 Structural design
24.5.1 Generalities
Structural elements made up of plain concrete have to be designed in compliance with methods of limit states
and using the same partial safety factors for reinforced concrete (see sections 10 and 11).
Resistance to tension in concrete may be considered in design whenever it is under the effect of factored
actions that do not exceed ultimate values, both, in tension and compression.
In case of long duration loadings, the creep in concrete should be considered in compliance with section 8.
24.5.2 Design resistance stresses
24.5.2.1 The maximum stress in fibers of plain concrete due to loads and factored internal forces should
not exceed the values of design resistance stresses. Whenever structural plain concrete is used c = 1.2 x 1.4
= 1.68 should be adopted. In case of tension, this maximum stress should be based on the lower
fctk,inf
characteristic value of resistance to tension as in section 8.2.5 so that: fctd =
c
24.5.2.2 The values of design resistance stresses (limit values of stresses determined with the acting
design internal forces and moments) are as follows:
extreme fiber to compression cRd = 0.85 fcd;
extreme fiber to tension ctRd = 0.85 fctd.
24.5.2.3 Values of design resistance shearing stress relative to the shear force in linear elements are as
follows:
wRd = 0.30 fctd in plain bending or bending-tension;
wRd = 0.30 fctd (1 + 3 cmd / fck) in bending-compression.
where the determination of influence of compressive external normal force is given by the factor:
(1 + 3 cmd / fck) 2
24.5.2.4 The value of the design resistance shearing stress in slabs made up of plain concrete and
submitted to bending or to bending-tension should be calculated by:
Rd = 0.30 fctd 1.0 MPa
24.5.2.5 The value of design resistance shearing stress in structural elements submitted to plain torsion
should be designed using:
TRd = 0.30 fctd 1.0 MPa
Curved elements or elements that are submitted to torsion of equilibrium should not be made of plain concrete.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
24.5.2.6 The value of the design resistance shearing stress regarding punching in the contour C
(19.5.2.6), should be calculated by:
Rd = 0,30 fctd 1.0 MPa
24.5.3 Dimensioning
The works made up of plain concrete may have distribution reinforcement that should not be considered in the
design of resistance internal forces, however it may be considered in order to decrease cracking effects.
Concrete elements with reinforcement smaller than the minimum should be dimensioned as if they were made
up of plain concrete. This does not apply to reinforcement used to transfer internal forces and moments to
elements made up of plain concrete.
The provisions in section 6 and 7 regarding durability should be complied with.
To design stresses due to bending, compression-bending and tangential internal forces the total transversal
sections of the elements should be taken into consideration except in the case of concrete poured on the
ground where total depth h should be 5 cm smaller than the real depth.
24.5.4 Stresses and deformations in bending
24.5.4.1 Diagram stress-deformation of concrete
Using the hypotheses of design defined in 24.5.2 the deformations in the extreme fibers should be limited by:
c c,lim = 0.0035;
ct ct,lim = 0.00035.
In order to simplify design, it may be assumed that the diagram stress-deformation has the configuration of a
rectangle-parable, both, in compression and tension. The creep of concrete should be considered for long
duration loadings (figure 24.1).
Figure 24.1 - Diagram of design stress-deformation of concrete considering creep
24.5.4.2 Limits of mean deformations
Also, the mean deformations should be limited as follows:

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
in compression, with small eccentricity, at the fiber distant 0.43 h from the most compressed
one: c 0.002;
in tension, with small eccentricity, at the fiber distant 0.43h from the most tensioned one: ct 0.0002.
24.5.4.3 Design resistance stresses
As an additional simplification, constant values in design resistance stresses may be used are as follows
for tensioned zone: ctRd = 0.85 fctd;
for compressed zone: the linear diagram with stresses with peak cRd = 0.85 fcd.
24.5.5 Shearing stresses
24.5.5.1 The shearing stresses wd for the rectangular section should be calculated using (see 24.5.2.3):
wd = (3 VSd) / (2 b h) Rd
where:
h is the total depth of the transversal section of the structural element.
24.5.5.2 The maximum shearing stress wd should be calculated for the shearing force at a distance h from
the face of the support. For sections closer to the support the same value of shearing force is assumed.
24.5.5.3 In the case of slabs no reduction to the value of shearing force in the supports should be done
and the shearing stresses should be (see 24.5.2.4):
wd Rd
24.5.6 Torsion
The stresses caused by torsion should be calculated through elasticity theory formulas and its effects added
to those originated by other internal forces and moments so as to be analyzed as multiple state of stress.
In elements submitted to torsion or to plain or compression-bending, the stresses should be calculated

separately for torsion (Td) and for shearing force (wd), having to comply with the following:
for torsion: Td TRd;
for shearing force: wd wRd;
for torsion and shearing force: wd / wRd + Td / TRd 1.
24.5.7 Design of sections submitted to compression and shearing force
The cases of sections compressed by normal force and sections submitted to compression and to shearing
force acting simultaneously are considered (inclined compressive force).
24.5.7.2 Simplified design of compressed sections
In sections of plain concrete elements submitted to compression force Nd, applied at a point G with
eccentricities ex and ey, regarding the axes x and y respectively (see figure 24.2), the design should be done
applying this force at point G1(e1x, e1y) resulting in the most unfavorable between the two following ones:

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
G1x (ex + exa , ey) or
G1y (ex , ey + eya)
where:
exa = 0.05 hx 2 cm;
eya = 0.05 hy 2 cm.
where:
hx and hy are the maximum dimensions of the section.
Figure 24.2 - Section subjected to compression-bending
The stress d should be calculated adopting an uniform distribution of stresses in the effective triangular
section of area Ae (see figure 24.2) having barycenter at the virtual application point G1 of the normal force
considering non-active the rest of the section. The safety condition should be calculated through:
Sd = NSd / Ae cRd = 0.s85 fcd
24.5.7.3 Simplified design of sections submitted to compression and shearing force
In a section of an element made up of plain concrete on which an inclined compression force acts with its
calculation components NSd and VSd, applied at G point, the virtual application point G1 and the effective area
Ae are calculated as defined in 24.5.7.2. The safety conditions should be designed through:
Sd = NSd / Ae cRd = 0.85fcd
wd = VSd / Ae wRd
24.5.8 Global stability
Global stability should be verified for all the structure.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
24.6 Structural elements of plain concrete
24.6.1 Wall-columns
Wall-columns made up of plain concrete of rectangular section may be dimensioned by the equation given as
follows whenever the resultant of all the design loads are within the mean limits of one-third of the thickness of
the wall-column:
N Sd N Rd = 0,63 f cd Ac [1 (l / 32 h ) ]
2
Where:
= 1.0 where there are no restrictions to rotations at the top and base of the wall-column;
= 0.8 when there are restrictions against rotation at the top, base, or in both extremities of the column-
wall.
where:
l is the vertical distance between supports;
h is the total depth of the transversal section of the wall-column;
is the factor that defines the boundary conditions at the supports.
The horizontal length of the wall-column to be considered for each vertical load concentrated at the top cannot
exceed:
the distance from center to center between loads;
distance between supports plus four times the thickness of the wall-column.
The thickness of the wall-column cannot be lower than:
1/24 of the total height of the vertical length without support;
10 cm;
15 cm in the case of wall-columns that are walls of foundations or combined footings.
In openings of doors or windows at least two bars of = 10 mm should be designed and they have to extend
50 cm from reentrant angles.
The total stability of the set and the joints between panels should be ensured.
24.6.2 Foundation blocks
Plain concrete cannot be used for blocks on piles.
The base area of foundation blocks should be determined based on an acceptable stress of the ground for
non-majored loads. The mean thickness of the block should not be smaller than 20 cm.
The dimensioning of transversal sections should be calculated by the method of limit states. The factored
bending moment should be determined in the critical section that can be considered as being at the face of
the column or wall.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
The factored shearing force should be calculated for the critical section at the face of a column, pilaster or wall
and should not exceed:
VSd Ac wRd
24.6.3 Columns
Columns made up of plain concrete should be designed in the same way as the wall columns (see 24.6.1) and
whenever there are no lateral actions, the acting load should be within or at the limit of the central nucleus of
inertia of the section. In case of simultaneous lateral actions, as for example, wind, the sections should be
verified without taking into consideration the concrete resistance to tension. In this case, the compressed part
of the section should contain the center of gravity.
The maximum stress of compression in the ultimate limit state, with factored actions, cannot exceed the value
of cRd.
The smallest dimension of columns should be 20 cm or 1/10 of its height.
24.6.4 Arches
Arches made up of plain concrete should be designed so that whenever in ultimate limit state tension stresses
do not appear in any of the transversal sections.
Global stability of the arch should be ensured, and an increase of bending moments by second order effects
to a maximum of 10% over first order moments may be assumed.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
25 Interfaces of design with construction, use and maintenance
25.1 Design acceptance
The contracting party should receive the design whenever the requirements in this Code are complied with,
specially the provisions in section 5.
When non-conformities are found, a term of temporary acceptance should be issued including all pending
actions.
In the lack of technical capacity of the contracting party in accepting the design, it should appoint a legally
capacitated person for the acceptance.
Once the pending actions are solved, a document of definitive acceptance of the design should be issued.
25.2 Receiving concrete and steel
Concrete and steel have to be received whenever all the requirements of ABNT NBR 12655,
ABNT NBR 7480, ABNT NBR 7481, ABNT NBR 7482 and ABNT NBR 7483.are complied with.
25.3 Existence of non-conformities in constructed works
25.3.1 Corrective actions
When there are non-conformities, the following correcting actions should be adopted:
a) revision of the design so as to determine whether the whole or part of the structure may be considered as
accepted, taking into consideration the values obtained in tests;
b) in case of no acceptance, samples of the structure should be tested in compliance with provisions in
ABNT NBR 7680, if there is also lack of resistance in the concrete whose results should be estimated in
accordance with ABNT NBR 12655 a new verification of the structure towards its acceptance may be
made following provisions in 12.4.1;
c) if the non-conformity is not eliminated, the provisions in 25.3.3 are to be applied. There are cases for
which a load test may also be recommended, whenever there is no risk of brittle rupture.
25.3.2 Load tests of the structure
Load tests should be planned aiming to represent the combination of loadings that determined in the analytical
verification a non-conformity. Whenever there is non-conformity indicating the possibility of brittle rupture, load
tests are not recommendable. This test should be done under a continuous monitoring of the load and of the
response of the structure, in order of not damaging the structure unnecessarily during the test.
Peculiarities of acceptance and resistance tests are:
a) acceptation tests aim to confirm that the global performance of the structure is in conformity with the
provisions of the design. The load is applied up to values that range between the characteristic value and
the value of the design for ULS. Requirements for displacements, degree of non-linearity and residual
deformations may be established after the test;
b) resistance tests aim to show that the structure or the structural element has at least the resistance
adopted for the design. Whenever an evaluation of only one element is desirable, it is enough to place the
load until the design value for ULS. As it has already been emphasized, attention is necessary in order of
not damaging the structure unnecessarily.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
25.3.3 Definitive non-conformity
Once non-conformity of part or of the whole of the structure is determined, one of the following alternatives
should be chosen:
a) determine the restrictions of usage of the structure;
b) prepare the design of complementation;
c) decide for partial or total demolition.
25.4 Manual of usage, inspection and maintenance
Depending on the size of the construction and of the environmental aggression and after all the information
about design, materials, products and construction of the building is gathered a manual of usage, inspection
and maintenance has to be written by a capacitated professional, hired by the contracting party. This manual
should specify in a clear and objective way the basic requirements for the use and preventive maintenance
needed to ensure the foreseen required life of the structure as determined in ABNT NBR 5674.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Annex A
(informative)
Effect of time on structural concrete
A.1 Generalities
The provisions in this annex are informative and may, whenever lacking better data, be used in the design of
structures with concrete of group 1 of ABNT NBR 8953 that are included in this Code. Other values may be
used whenever they were experimentally proved through tests made in compliance with the specific Brazilian
Code considering variations in the characteristics and properties of components of the concrete or whenever
supported by international Codes or technical bibliography.
A.2 Deformation of concrete
A.2.1 Introduction
When there is no barrier to free deformation of concrete and when at time t0, a constant stress in interval t t0,
is applied; its total deformation in time t is equal to:
c (t) = c (t0) + cc (t) + cs (t)
where:
c (t0) = c (t0) / Eci (t0) is immediate deformation at the time of loading with Eci (t0) calculated for j = t0, by
1/2
the expression Eci(t0) = 5 600 fckj ;
cc (t) = [c (t0) / Eci28] (t, t0) is deformation by creep in the interval of time (t, t0), with Eci28 calculated by
the same expression as that used for j = 28 days;
cs (t) is deformation by shrinkage in an interval of time (t, t0).
A.2.2 Creep of concrete
A.2.2.1 Generalities
The deformation caused by creep of concrete (cc) has two parts, a fast and a slower one. The fast
deformation (cca) is irreversible and takes place during the first 24 hours after the load that originated it is
applied. The slower deformation is in its turn, made up of two other parcels: the irreversible slow deformation
(ccf) and the reversible slow deformation (ccd).
cc = cca + ccf + ccd
c,tot = c + cc = c (1 + )
= a + f + d
where:
a is the fast deformation coefficient;

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
f is the irreversible slow deformation coefficient;
d is the reversible slow deformation coefficient.
A.2.2.2 Hypotheses
To calculate the effects of creep whenever stresses in concrete are those of service, the following hypothesis
are assumed:
a) the deformation by creep cc varies linearly with the applied stress;
b) for increments of stress applied in different instants, there is the superposition of the respective creep
effects;
c) the fast deformation produces constant deformations along time; the values of coefficient a are function
of the relation between the resistance of the concrete at the moment of load application and its final
resistance;
d) the reversible slow deformation coefficient d depends only of the duration of loading; its final value and its
development along time are independent of age of the concrete at the moment load is applied;
e) the irreversible slow deformation coefficient f depends of :
relative humidity of environment (U);
consistency of concrete when poured;
notional thickness of element hfic (see A.2.4);
notional age of concrete (see A.2.4) at the instant (t0) of the application of load;
notional age of concrete at the instant under consideration (t);
f) for the same concrete, the irreversible slow deformation curves in function of time, correspondent to
different ages of the concrete at the moment of the load are obtained, in relation to each other, by a
parallel displacement to the axis of deformations as in figure A.1.
Figure A.1 - Variation of ccf (t)

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
A.2.2.3 Value of Creep
At instant t the deformation caused by creep is given by:
(t,t 0 )
c
cc (t,t 0 ) = cca + ccd + ccf =
E c 28
1/2
with Ec28 designed for j = 28 days, by the expression: Ec28 = Eci,28 = 5 600 fck
The creep coefficient (t,t0), is also valid for tension and is given by:
( t , t 0 ) = a + f [ f (t ) f (t 0 )] + d d
where:
t is the notional age of concrete at the considered instant, in days;
t0 is the notional age of concrete whenever single loading is done, in days;
t0i is the notional age of concrete whenever the loading is done, in days;
a is the coefficient of fast creep, determined by the expression:
f (t )
a = 0,8 1 c 0
f c (t )
where:
f c (t 0 )
is the function of the increase of concrete resistance, as defined in 12.3;
fc ( t )
f = 1c 2c is the final value of the irreversible slow deformation coefficient;
1c is the coefficient dependent on the relative humidity of the environment U, in percentage and on
the consistency of the concrete shown in table A.1;
2c is the coefficient dependent on the notional thickness of hfic of the element, defined in A.2.4.
42 + hfic
2c =
20 + hfic
where:
hfic is the notional thickness, in centimeters (A.2.4);
f(t) or f (t0) is the irreversible slow deformation coefficient, function of the age of concrete (see
figure A.2);
d is the final value of the reversible slow deformation coefficient, considered equal to 0.4;
d(t) is the reversible slow deformation coefficient, function of time (t t0) elapsed after loading.
t t 0 + 20
d (t ) =
t t 0 + 70

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
t 2 + At + B
f (t ) =
t 2 + Ct + D
where:
3 2
A = 42h 350h + 588h + 113;
3 2
B = 768h 3060h + 3234h 23;
3 2
C = 200h + 13h + 1090h + 183;
3 2
D = 7579h 31916h + 35343h + 1931;
h is the notional thickness in meters, for values of h outside the interval (0.05 h 1.6), the
corresponding extremes are adopted;
t is the time, in days (t 3).
Figure A.2 - Variation of f(t)
A.2.3 Shrinkage of concrete
A.2.3.1 Basic Hypotheses
The value of shrinkage of concrete depends on:
a) relative humidity of the environment;
b) consistency of concrete at pouring;
c) notional thickness of the element.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
A.2.3.2 Value of shrinkage
Between the instants t0 and t the shrinkage is given by:
cs (t, t0) = cs [ s(t) s(t0)]
where:
cs = 1s 2s
cs is the final value of shrinkage;
1s is the coefficient dependent on the relative humidity of the air and of the consistency of concrete (see
table A.1);
2s is the coefficient dependent on the notional thickness of the element:
33 + 2hfic
2s =
20,8 + 3h fic
where:
hfic is the notional thickness expressed in centimeters (A.2.4);
s(t) or s(t0) is the coefficient regarding retraction in the instant t or t0 (figure A.3);
t is the notional age of concrete at the instant under consideration, in days;
t0 is the notional age of the concrete at the instant in which the effect of shrinkage of the element begins
to be considered, in days.
Table A.1 - Usual numeric values to determine creep and shrinkage
Creep Shrinkage
1c 10 1s
1) 3) 4 2) 3)
Humidity

4)
Environment U Slump in accordance with ABNT NBR NM 67
% cm
0-4 5-9 10 - 15 0-4 5-9 10 - 15
In water - 0.6 0.8 1.0 + 1.0 + 1.0 + 1.0 30.0
In a very humid
environment immediately 90 1.0 1.3 1.6 1.0 1.3 1.6 5.0
above water
Generally in open air 70 1.5 2.0 2.5 2.5 3.2 4.0 1.5
In dry environments 40 2.3 3.0 3.8 4.0 5.2 6.5 1.0

1)
1c = 4.45 0.035U for slumps in intervals ranging from 5 cm to 9 cm and U 90%.
2)
1041s= 6.16 (U/484) + (U2/ 1 590) for slumps ranging from 5 cm to 9 cm and U 90%.
3)
The values of 1c and 1s for U 90% and decreases ranging from 0 cm and 4 cm are 25% lower and for decreases
ranging from 10 cm and 15 cm they are 25% larger.
4)
= 1 + exp ( 7.8 + 0.1 U) for U 90 %.
Observations
1 For calculaiton purposes the same expressions and the same numeric values may be used in case of tension
2 For calculation the values of creep and shrinkage, the consistency of concrete corresponds to the one obtained with the same mix
without the addition of super-plastifiers and super-fluidificants.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
3 2
t t t
+ A + B
s (t ) = 100 100 100
3 2
t t t
+ C + D +E
100 100 100
where:
A = 40;
3 2
B = 116h 282h + 220h 4.8;
3
C = 2.5h 8.8h + 40.7;
3 2
D = 75h + 585h + 496h 6.8;
4 3 2
E = 169h + 88h + 584h 39h + 0.8;
h is the notional thickness, in meters; for values of h outside the interval (0.05 h 1.6) the correspondent
extremes are adopted.
t is the time, expressed in days (t 3).
Figure A.3 - Variation of s(t)
A.2.4 Notional age and thickness
A.2.4.1 Notional age of concrete
The age to be considered is the notional age ( tef), expressed in days, when the hardening is done at
environment temperature of 20C and, in other cases , when there is no cure by steam, the age to be
considered is the notional age given by:

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Ti + 10
t = i
30
t ef ,i
where:
t is the notional age, in days;
is the coefficient dependent on the hardening speed of concrete; in the lack of experimental data, the
use of the values in table A.2 is allowed;
Ti is the daily mean temperature of the environment expressed in Celsius degrees;
tef,i is the period, in days, during which the mean daily temperature of the environment Ti may be
assumed as constant.
Observation This expression does not apply when steam cure was applied.
Table A.2 - Values of creep and shrinkage in function of hardening speed of concrete

Portland Cement (CP)
Creep Shrinkage
Slow hardening (CP III and CP IV, (all resistance classes) 1
Normal hardening (CP I and CP II, all classes of resistance) 2 1
Fast hardening (CP V-ARI) 3
Where:
CP I and CP I-S - Common Portland Cement;
CP II-E, CP II-F and CP II-Z - Blended Portland Cement;
CP III - High furnace Portland Cement;
CP IV - Pozzolan Portland Cement;
CP V-ARI - Initial high resistance Portland cement;
RS - Portland Cement resistant to sulphates (specific property of some types of mentioned cement).
A.2.4.2 Notional thickness of elements
The notional thickness is defined as follows:
2Ac
hfic =
u ar
where:
is the coefficient dependent on the relative humidity of the environment (U%) (see table A.1), where:
= 1 + exp ( 7.8 + 0.1U);
Ac is the area of the transversal section of the element;
uar is the portion of the external perimeter of transversal section of the element in contact with the air.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
A.2.5 Total deformation of concrete
When there is variation of stresses along the interval, induced by external actions or agents having different
rheologic properties (including reinforcement, concretes of different ages, etc.) the total deformation in the
concrete may be calculated by:
t
c ( t 0 ) c (t 0 ) c 1 ( , t 0 )
c (t ) = +
E c (t 0 ) E c 28
(t , t 0 ) + cs (t , t 0 ) +
=t 0

E c
+
E c 28
d
in which the three first terms represent the not impeded and the integral deformations, the effects of the
variation in stresses that occurred in the interval.
It may be replaced by:
1 (t , t 0 ) 1 (t , t 0 )
c (t ) = c (t 0 ) + + cs (t , t 0 ) + c (t , t 0 ) +
E c (t 0 ) E c 28 E c (t 0 ) E c 28
In the expressions of c(t):
c (t, t0) is the total variation of stress in concrete at the interval (t, t0);
is the characteristic coefficient with variable value according to each case.
To calculate the losses of prestress in usual cases where the element may be considered as having been
concreted in one single procedure and the prestress as in one single application, = 0. 5 may be
adopted and Ec(t0) = Ec28 assumed in accordance with provisions in 9.6.3.4.2. It is important to observe
that sub-section considering that the creep coefficient of concrete: = a + f + d is an irreversible slow
deformation coefficient with properties defined for: f.
In other usual cases = 0.8 may be considered keeping Ec (t0) Ec28 .
This approximation has the advantage of considering as a unique function without separating a, f, and d.
It is possible to separate a, f, and d, however, in order to do this it is necessary to apply the integral
expression to the problem being studied. The simplified expression is not applicable in this case.
Special attention should be given in situations when the foundations are deformable or part of the structure
does not present slow deformation, as in the case of metallic ties.
A.3 Deformation in reinforcement

A.3.1 Whenever the reinforcement is required in a situation analogous to the one described in A.2.1, its
deformation is obtained by:
s (t 0 ) s (t 0 )
s (t ) = + (t , t 0 )
Es Es
where:
s (t0) / Es is the immediate deformation at the time of loading;
[s (t0) / Es] (t, t0) is the deformation caused by creep that occurred at interval of time (t, t0) and
considered always when s (t0) > 0.5 fptk.

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
A.3.2 Whenever the free deformation caused by creep is hindered in a situation analogous to the one
described in A.2.5 for concrete, the total deformation may be calculated through:
s (t 0 ) s ( t 0 ) s (t , t 0 )
s (t ) = + (t , t 0 ) + [1 + (t, t 0 )]
Es Es Es
where:
s (t, t0) is the total variation of stress in the reinforcement at interval (t, t0).

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Annex B
(informative)
General Table of Contents
Item Page
1 Objective.................................................................................................................................................1
2 Code references ....................................................................................................................................1
3 Definitions ..............................................................................................................................................4
3.1 Definitions of structural concrete ........................................................................................................4
3.2 Definitions of the limiting states ..........................................................................................................4
3.3 Definition regarding persons involved in the construction process ...............................................5
4 Symbols..................................................................................................................................................6
4.1 Generalities ............................................................................................................................................6
4.2 Basic Symbols .......................................................................................................................................6
4.2.1 Generalities ............................................................................................................................................6
4.2.2 Lower Case ............................................................................................................................................6
4.2.3 Upper Case.............................................................................................................................................7
4.2.4 Greek letters...........................................................................................................................................8
4.3 Subscripted symbols ..........................................................................................................................10
4.3.1 Generalities ..........................................................................................................................................10
4.3.2 Lower case letters ...............................................................................................................................10
4.3.3 Capital letters .......................................................................................................................................12
4.3.4 Numbers ...............................................................................................................................................12
5 General quality requirements for structures and evaluation of design conformity .....................13
5.1 Quality requirements of structures ...................................................................................................13
5.1.1 General conditions ..............................................................................................................................13
5.1.2 Classification of quality requirements of structures .......................................................................13
5.2 Design quality requirements ..............................................................................................................13
5.2.1 Quality of the chosen solution ...........................................................................................................13
5.2.2 Imposed conditions to design............................................................................................................13
5.2.3 Documentation of the chosen solution.............................................................................................14
5.3 Evaluation of design conformity........................................................................................................14
6 Guidelines for durability of concrete structures ..............................................................................15
6.1 Durability requirements ......................................................................................................................15
6.2 Design required life .............................................................................................................................15
6.3 Mechanisms of aging and deterioration ...........................................................................................15
6.3.1 Generalities ..........................................................................................................................................15
6.3.2 Prevailing deterioration mechanisms regarding concrete..............................................................15
6.3.3 Deterioration prevailing mechanisms regarding reinforcements ..................................................15
6.3.4 Deterioration mechanisms of the structure itself ............................................................................15
6.4 Environmental aggressions ...............................................................................................................16
7 Design criteria for durability...............................................................................................................17
7.1 Specific symbols for this section ......................................................................................................17
7.2 Drainage ...............................................................................................................................................17
7.3 Architectural and structural forms ....................................................................................................17
7.4 Quality of concrete covers .................................................................................................................17
7.5 Detailing of reinforcements ................................................................................................................19
7.6 Crack control .......................................................................................................................................19
7.7 Special measures ................................................................................................................................20
7.8 Preventive inspection and maintenance...........................................................................................20
8 Properties of materials........................................................................................................................21
8.2 Concrete ...............................................................................................................................................22

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
8.2.1 Classes .................................................................................................................................................22

8.2.2 Specific mass .......................................................................................................................................22
8.2.3 Coefficient of thermic expansion .......................................................................................................22
8.2.4 Strength to compression ....................................................................................................................22
8.2.5 Tension strength..................................................................................................................................22
8.2.6 Resistance in multiaxial states of stress ..........................................................................................23
8.2.7 Resistance to fatigue...........................................................................................................................23
8.2.8 Modulus of elasticity ...........................................................................................................................23
8.2.9 Poissons coefficient and transversal modulus of elasticity ..........................................................24
8.2.10 Diagram stress-strain ..........................................................................................................................24
8.2.11 Creep and shrinkage ...........................................................................................................................25
8.3 Steel for passive reinforcement .........................................................................................................26
8.3.1 Category ...............................................................................................................................................26
8.3.2 Type of surface ....................................................................................................................................26
8.3.3 Specific mass .......................................................................................................................................26
8.3.4 Coefficient of thermic expansion .......................................................................................................26
8.3.5 Modulus of Elasticity ...........................................................................................................................26
8.3.6 Diagram stress- strain, yield and tension to strength .....................................................................26
8.3.7 Ductility characteristics ......................................................................................................................27
8.3.9 Weldability ............................................................................................................................................27
8.4 Steel for active reinforcement ............................................................................................................27
8.4.1 Classification........................................................................................................................................27
8.4.2 Specific mass .......................................................................................................................................27
8.4.3 Coefficient of thermal expansion .......................................................................................................28
8.4.4 Modulus of elasticity ...........................................................................................................................28
8.4.5 Stress-strain diagram, yield and tension strength...........................................................................28
8.4.6 Characteristics of ductility..................................................................................................................28
8.4.8 Relaxation.............................................................................................................................................28
9 Joint behaviour of materials...............................................................................................................30
9.1 Specific symbols for this section.......................................................................................................30
9.2 General Dispositions ...........................................................................................................................31
9.2.1 Generalities ..........................................................................................................................................31
9.2.2 Prestress levels....................................................................................................................................31
9.3 Verification of bonding........................................................................................................................31
9.3.1 Position of bars during pouring of concrete ....................................................................................31
9.3.2 Values of strength to bond .................................................................................................................32
9.4 Anchorage of reinforcement...............................................................................................................33
9.4.1 General conditions ..............................................................................................................................33
9.4.2 Anchorage of passive reinforcements through bonding ................................................................33
9.4.3 Anchorage of bundles of bars through bonding..............................................................................36
9.4.4 Anchorage of welded wire fabric through bonding .........................................................................36
9.4.5 Anchorage of active reinforcements (prestressed wires and strands) through bonding............36
9.4.6 Anchorage of stirrups .........................................................................................................................37
9.4.7 Anchorage through mechanical devices ..........................................................................................38
9.5 Union or joints......................................................................................................................................39
9.5.1 Types.....................................................................................................................................................39
9.5.2 Lap splices ...........................................................................................................................................39
9.5.3 Union through mechanical devices ...................................................................................................41
9.5.4 Joints through welding .......................................................................................................................42
9.6 Prestressing .........................................................................................................................................43
9.6.1 Prestressing forces .............................................................................................................................43
9.6.2 Introduction of prestressing forces ...................................................................................................44
9.6.3 Losses of prestressing force..............................................................................................................45
10 Safety and limit states .........................................................................................................................50
10.1 Safety criteria .......................................................................................................................................50
10.2 Limit states ...........................................................................................................................................50
10.3 Ultimate limit states (ULS) ..................................................................................................................50

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
10.4 Serviceability limit states (SLS) .........................................................................................................50

11 Actions..................................................................................................................................................51
11.2 Actions to consider .............................................................................................................................51
11.2.1 Generalities ..........................................................................................................................................51
11.2.2 Classification of actions .....................................................................................................................52
11.3 Permanent actions ..............................................................................................................................52
11.3.1 Generalities ..........................................................................................................................................52
11.3.2 Direct permanent actions ...................................................................................................................52
11.3.3 Indirect permanent actions.................................................................................................................52
11.4 Variable actions ...................................................................................................................................56
11.4.1 Direct variable actions ........................................................................................................................56
11.4.2 Indirect variable actions .....................................................................................................................56
11.5 Exceptional actions.............................................................................................................................57
11.6 Values of actions .................................................................................................................................57
11.6.1 Characteristic values ..........................................................................................................................57
11.6.2 Representative values.........................................................................................................................58
11.6.3 Design values ......................................................................................................................................58
11.7 Partial safety factor of actions ...........................................................................................................58
11.7.1 Partial safety factors of actions at ultimate limit states (ULS) .......................................................58
11.7.2 Partial safety factor of actions in serviceability limit states (SLS) ................................................60
11.8 Combination of actions.......................................................................................................................60
11.8.1 Generalities ..........................................................................................................................................60
11.8.2 Ultimate combinations ........................................................................................................................60
11.8.3 Service combinations .........................................................................................................................62
12 Resistances..........................................................................................................................................63
12.2 Characteristic values ..........................................................................................................................63
12.3 Design values ......................................................................................................................................63
12.3.1 Design resistance................................................................................................................................63
12.3.2 Design resistance stresses ................................................................................................................63
12.3.3 Design resistance of concrete ...........................................................................................................63
12.4 Partial safety factors of resistances..................................................................................................64
12.4.1 Partial safety factors of resistances in the serviceability limit state (SLS)...................................65
12.5 Safety verification................................................................................................................................65
12.5.1 Safety constructive conditions ..........................................................................................................65
12.5.2 Analytic safety conditions ..................................................................................................................65
12.5.3 Design of resistance internal forces .................................................................................................65
12.5.4 Design internal forces and moments ................................................................................................65
13 Limits for dimensions, displacements and width of cracks ...........................................................66
13.2 Limit dimensions .................................................................................................................................66
13.2.1 Introduction..........................................................................................................................................66
13.2.2 Beams and deep-beams .....................................................................................................................66
13.2.3 Columns and wall-columns ................................................................................................................66
13.2.4 Slabs .....................................................................................................................................................67
13.2.5 Holes and openings ............................................................................................................................67
13.2.6 Embedded pipes..................................................................................................................................68
13.3 Limit displacements ............................................................................................................................69
13.4 Control of cracking and protection of reinforcement ......................................................................71
13.4.1 Introduction..........................................................................................................................................71
13.4.2 Limit for cracks and protection of reinforcements regarding durability .......................................71
13.4.3 Control of cracks regarding sensorial acceptability and usage.....................................................72
14 Structural analysis ..............................................................................................................................73
14.2 General principles of structural analysis..........................................................................................73
14.2.1 Objectives of structural analysis .......................................................................................................73
14.2.2 Necessary premises to structural analysis ......................................................................................73

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
14.3 Basic hypotheses ................................................................................................................................74

14.3.1 Equilibrium conditions ........................................................................................................................74
14.3.2 Compatibility conditions .....................................................................................................................74
14.3.3 Monotonical loads ...............................................................................................................................74
14.4 Structural elements .............................................................................................................................74
14.4.1 Linear elements....................................................................................................................................74
14.4.2 Surface elements .................................................................................................................................75
14.5 Types of structural analysis ...............................................................................................................75
14.5.1 Generalities ..........................................................................................................................................75
14.5.2 Linear analysis .....................................................................................................................................75
14.5.3 Linear analysis with redistribution ....................................................................................................76
14.5.4 Plastic analysis ....................................................................................................................................76
14.5.5 Non-linear analysis ..............................................................................................................................76
14.5.6 Analysis through physical models ....................................................................................................76
14.6 Structures of linear elements .............................................................................................................77
14.6.1 Basic hypothesis .................................................................................................................................77
14.6.2 Characterization of geometry .............................................................................................................77
14.6.3 Rounding of the diagram of bending moments................................................................................80
14.6.4 Linear analysis with or without redistribution..................................................................................81
14.6.7 Usual structures of buildings - Allowed approximations ................................................................82
14.7 Structures with plate elements...........................................................................................................84
14.7.1 Basic hypothesis .................................................................................................................................84
14.7.2 Characterization of the geometry.......................................................................................................84
14.7.3 Linear analysis with or without redistribution..................................................................................84
14.7.6 Solid slabs ............................................................................................................................................85
14.7.7 Ribbed slabs.........................................................................................................................................86
14.7.8 Flat and drop panel slabs ...................................................................................................................86
14.8 Structures containing other elements ...............................................................................................87
14.8.1 Deep-beams and wall-columns ..........................................................................................................87
14.8.2 Blocks ...................................................................................................................................................87
15 Instability and second order effects ..................................................................................................88
15.1 Specific symbols for this section.......................................................................................................88
15.2 Field of application and fundamental concepts ...............................................................................88
15.3 Basic principle for calculation............................................................................................................89
15.3.1 Moment-curvature relations ...............................................................................................................89
15.3.2 Geometrical imperfections .................................................................................................................90
15.4 Definition and classification of structures ........................................................................................90
15.4.1 Global, local and localized second order effects .............................................................................90
15.4.2 Sway and non-sway structures ..........................................................................................................91
15.4.3 Bracing..................................................................................................................................................91
15.4.4 Isolated elements.................................................................................................................................91
15.5 Exemption of consideration of second order global internal forces and moments.....................92
15.5.1 Generalities ..........................................................................................................................................92
15.5.2 Instability parameter............................................................................................................................92
15.5.3 Coefficient z ........................................................................................................................................93
15.6 Analysis of structures of fixed nodes................................................................................................93
15.7 Analysis of structures of mobile nodes ............................................................................................94
15.7.1 Generalities ..........................................................................................................................................94
15.7.2 Non-linear analysis with second order..............................................................................................94
15.7.3 Approximate consideration of the physical non-linearity ...............................................................94
15.7.4 Analysis of the second order local effects .......................................................................................94
15.8 Analysis of isolated elements ............................................................................................................94
15.8.1 Generalities ..........................................................................................................................................94
15.8.2 Exemption from analysis of second order local effects ..................................................................95
15.8.3 Determination of second order local effects ....................................................................................96

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
15.8.4 Consideration of creep .......................................................................................................................98

15.9 Analysis of the wall-columns .............................................................................................................98
15.9.1 Generalities ..........................................................................................................................................98
15.9.2 Exemption of the analysis of localized second order effects.........................................................99
15.9.3 Approximated process for consideration of localized second order effects................................99
15.10 Lateral instability of beams ..............................................................................................................100
16 General principles of dimensioning, verification and detailing....................................................102
16.1 Purpose ..............................................................................................................................................102
16.2 General principles .............................................................................................................................102
16.2.1 Generalities ........................................................................................................................................102
16.2.2 Global and local approach................................................................................................................102
16.2.3 Safety in regard to the ULS ..............................................................................................................102
16.2.4 Safety in regard to SLS (performance in service) ..........................................................................103
16.3 Design criteria....................................................................................................................................103
16.4 Durability ............................................................................................................................................104
16.5 Case of cyclic loads ..........................................................................................................................104
17 Dimensioning and verification of linear elements .........................................................................105
17.1 Specific symbols for this section ....................................................................................................105
17.2 Linear elements subjected to normal internal forces and moments - Ultimate limit state........107
17.2.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................107
17.2.2 Basic hypothesis ...............................................................................................................................107
17.2.3 Ductility in beams..............................................................................................................................108
17.2.4 Active and passive reinforcements .................................................................................................109
17.2.5 Approximated processes for dimensioning compression-bending ............................................110
17.3 Linear elements subjected to normal internal forces and moments - Serviceability limit
state ....................................................................................................................................................112
17.3.1 Generalities ........................................................................................................................................112
17.3.2 Limit state of deformation ................................................................................................................112
17.3.3 Limit state of cracking ......................................................................................................................114
17.3.4 Limit state of decompression and crack formation .......................................................................116
17.3.5 Maximum and minimum longitudinal reinforcements...................................................................116
17.4 Linear elements subjected to shearing forces - Ultimate Limit State..........................................119
17.4.1 Basic Hypothesis...............................................................................................................................119
17.4.2 Verification of the ultimate limit state .............................................................................................121
17.5 Linear elements subjected to torsion - Ultimate limit state ..........................................................124
17.5.1 Uniform torsion..................................................................................................................................124
17.5.2 Torsion in thin wall open section elements....................................................................................127
17.6 Limit state of inclined cracking of webs Shearing force and torsion .......................................128
17.7 Combined internal forces and moments.........................................................................................128
17.7.1 Bending and torsion..........................................................................................................................128
17.7.2 Torsion and shearing forces ............................................................................................................129
18 Detailing of linear elements..............................................................................................................130
18.2 General provisions regarding reinforcements ...............................................................................130
18.2.1 Layout of reinforcement ...................................................................................................................130
18.2.2 Curved bars........................................................................................................................................130
18.2.3 Changes in the direction of reinforcements ...................................................................................131
18.2.4 Protection against buckling of bars ................................................................................................131
18.3 Beams .................................................................................................................................................132
18.3.1 Generalities ........................................................................................................................................132
18.3.2 Longitudinal reinforcement ..............................................................................................................132
18.3.3 Transversal reinforcements for shearing force .............................................................................134
18.3.4 Torsion reinforcements ....................................................................................................................135
18.3.5 Surface reinforcement ......................................................................................................................135
18.3.6 Suspension reinforcements .............................................................................................................135
18.3.7 Reinforcements that connect flange-web or talon-web ................................................................135
18.4 Columns .............................................................................................................................................136
18.4.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................136
18.4.2 Longitudinal reinforcements ............................................................................................................136

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
18.4.3 Transversal reinforcement................................................................................................................136

18.5 Wall-columns......................................................................................................................................137
18.6 Prestressed tendons .........................................................................................................................137
18.6.1 Longitudinal layout............................................................................................................................137
18.6.2 Transversal layout .............................................................................................................................138
19 Dimensioning and verification of slabs...........................................................................................141
19.1 Specific symbols for this section.....................................................................................................141
19.2 Dimensioning and verification of slabs - Ultimate limit state ......................................................142
19.3 Dimensioning and verification of slabs - Serviceability limit state .............................................142
19.3.1 Limit state of deformation.................................................................................................................142
19.3.2 Limit states of cracking, decompression or crack forming ..........................................................142
19.3.3 Maximum and minimum longitudinal reinforcements ...................................................................142
19.4 Shearing force in slabs and linear elements with bw 5d .............................................................143
19.4.1 Slabs without reinforcement for shearing force.............................................................................143
19.4.2 Slabs with reinforcement for shearing force ..................................................................................144
19.5 Dimensioning of slabs for punching ...............................................................................................144
19.5.1 Design Model......................................................................................................................................144
19.5.2 Definition of the internal stress in the critical surfaces C and C ................................................145
19.5.3 Definition of the resistance stress in critical surfaces C, C and C ...........................................149
19.5.4 Progressive collapse .........................................................................................................................152
19.5.5 Verification of prestressed structural elements .............................................................................152
20 Detailing of slabs ...............................................................................................................................154
20.1 General provisions ............................................................................................................................154
20.2 Free edges and openings .................................................................................................................154
20.3 Slabs without beams .........................................................................................................................154
20.3.1 Passive reinforcement ......................................................................................................................154
20.3.2 Prestressed slabs ..............................................................................................................................155
20.4 Punching reinforcement ...................................................................................................................156
21 Special zones .....................................................................................................................................158
21.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................158
21.2 Zones of introduction of concentrated loads .................................................................................158
21.2.1 Contact pressure in reduced area....................................................................................................158
21.2.2 Concrete hinges.................................................................................................................................159
21.2.3 Zone of introduction of prestressing...............................................................................................159
21.2.4 Loads applied on surfaces of structural elements.........................................................................160
21.3 Holes and openings...........................................................................................................................160
21.3.1 Generalities ........................................................................................................................................160
21.3.2 Walls and deep-beams ......................................................................................................................160
21.3.3 Openings that cross beams in the direction of the height ............................................................161
21.3.4 Openings in slabs ..............................................................................................................................162
21.4 Nodes in frames and connections between walls..........................................................................162
21.5 Connection of precast structural elements ....................................................................................162
21.6 Concrete joints...................................................................................................................................162
22 Special elements................................................................................................................................162
22.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................162
22.2 Deep-beams........................................................................................................................................162
22.2.1 Concept...............................................................................................................................................162
22.2.2 Structural behavior ............................................................................................................................163
22.2.3 Design model .....................................................................................................................................163
22.2.4 Detailing ..............................................................................................................................................163
22.3 Consoles and dapped ends ..............................................................................................................164
22.3.1 Corbels and dapped ends.................................................................................................................164
22.3.2 Dapped ends ......................................................................................................................................168
22.4 Footings..............................................................................................................................................169
22.4.1 Concept...............................................................................................................................................169
22.4.2 Structural behavior ............................................................................................................................169
22.4.3 Design model .....................................................................................................................................170

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
22.4.4 Detailing..............................................................................................................................................170
22.5 Blocks on piles ..................................................................................................................................170
22.5.1 Concept ..............................................................................................................................................170
22.5.2 Structural behavior............................................................................................................................171
22.5.3 Design model .....................................................................................................................................171
22.5.4 Detailing..............................................................................................................................................171
23 Dynamic Actions and Fatigue ..........................................................................................................173
23.2 Generalities ........................................................................................................................................173
23.3 Limit State of Excessive Vibrations.................................................................................................173
23.4 Ultimate limit state caused by resonance or dynamic amplification ...........................................174
23.5 Ultimate limit state of fatigue ...........................................................................................................174
23.5.1 Cyclical action ...................................................................................................................................174
23.5.2 Combination of actions to be considered.......................................................................................174
23.5.3 Design model .....................................................................................................................................175
23.5.4 Verification of fatigue in concrete ...................................................................................................176
23.5.5 Verification of fatigue in reinforcement ..........................................................................................177
23.6 Serviceability limit states.......................................................................... Erro! Indicador no definido.
24 Plain concrete ....................................................................................................................................181
24.2 Application .........................................................................................................................................181
24.3 Materials and properties ...................................................................................................................181
24.4 Joints and construction provisions ................................................................................................181
24.5 Structural design ...............................................................................................................................182
24.5.1 Generalities ........................................................................................................................................182
24.5.2 Design resistance stresses ..............................................................................................................182
24.5.3 Dimensioning .....................................................................................................................................183
24.5.4 Stresses and deformations in bending ...........................................................................................183
24.5.5 Shearing stresses..............................................................................................................................184
24.5.6 Torsion................................................................................................................................................184
24.5.7 Design of sections submitted to compression and shearing force .............................................184
24.5.8 Global stability...................................................................................................................................185
24.6 Structural elements of plain concrete .............................................................................................186
24.6.1 Wall-columns .....................................................................................................................................186
24.6.2 Foundation blocks.............................................................................................................................186
24.6.3 Columns .............................................................................................................................................187
24.6.4 Arches.................................................................................................................................................187
25 Interfaces of design with construction, use and maintenance.....................................................188
25.1 Design acceptance ............................................................................................................................188
25.2 Receiving concrete and steel ...........................................................................................................188
25.3 Existence of non-conformities in constructed works ...................................................................188
25.3.1 Corrective actions .............................................................................................................................188
25.3.2 Load tests of the structure ...............................................................................................................188
25.3.3 Definitive non-conformity .................................................................................................................189
25.4 Manual of usage, inspection and maintenance..............................................................................189
Annex A (informative) Effect of time on structural concrete ....................................................................190
A.1 Generalities ........................................................................................................................................190
A.2 Deformation of concrete ...................................................................................................................190
A.2.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................190
A.2.2 Creep of concrete ..............................................................................................................................190
A.2.3 Shrinkage of concrete.......................................................................................................................193
A.2.4 Notional age and thickness ..............................................................................................................195
A.2.5 Total deformation of concrete..........................................................................................................197
A.3 Deformation in reinforcement ..........................................................................................................197
Annex B (informative) General Contents ....................................................................................................199
Annex C (informative) Figures and Tables contents .................................................................................209
C.1 Figures................................................................................................................................................209

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
C.2 Tables..................................................................................................................................................208
Annex D (informative) Alphabetic Index ................................................................................................ 20911

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Annex C
(informative)
Figures and tables
C.1 Figures
Page
Figure 3.1 Limit state of partial decompression ...............................................................................................5
Figure 8.1 Resistance in multiaxial states of stress .......................................................................................23
Figure 8.2 Idealized diagram stress-strain .....................................................................................................24
Figure 8.3 Bilinear stress-strain diagram in tension .......................................................................................25
Figure 8.4 Diagram stress-strain for steel in passive reinforcement .............................................................27
Figure 8.5 Stress-strain diagram for steel in active reinforcement ................................................................28
Figure 9.1 Anchorage with welded transversal bars ......................................................................................34
Figure 9.2 Anchorage of transversal reinforcement through welded bars .....................................................38
Figure 9.3 Joints considered as in same transversal section ........................................................................39
Figure 9.4 Transversal reinforcement in joints ...............................................................................................41
Figure 9.5 Joints through welding ..................................................................................................................42
Figure 9.6 Introduction of prestressing ..........................................................................................................45
Figure 11.1 Global geometrical imperfections .................................................................................................54
Figure 11.2 Local geometrical imperfections ...................................................................................................55
Figure 13.1 Limit dimensions for slab openings exempting verification ..........................................................68
Figure 14.1 Rigid portions ................................................................................................................................77
Figure 14.2 Width of the collaborating flange ..................................................................................................78
Figure 14.3 Effective width with opening .........................................................................................................79
Figure 14.4 Effective depth and width of transversal sections ........................................................................79
Figure 14.5 Effective span ...............................................................................................................................80
Figure 14.6 Rounding of the diagram of bending moments ............................................................................80
Figure 14.7 Rotation capacity of plastic hinges ...............................................................................................82
Figure 14.8 Approximation in extreme supports ..............................................................................................83
Figure 14.9 Strips of slabs for internal forces and moments distribution in multiple frames ...........................87
Figure 15.1 Moment-curvature relation ............................................................................................................90
Figure 15.2 Localized second order effects .....................................................................................................91
Figure 15.3 Equivalent length le .......................................................................................................................99
Figure 15.4 Approximate evaluation of localized second order effects .........................................................100
Figure 17.1 Domains of ultimate limit states of transversal sections .............................................................108
Figure 17.2 Design of reinforcement characterized by the parameter s ......................................................111
Figure 17.3 Concrete envelope of reinforcement ..........................................................................................115
Figure 17.4 Bending-torsion of profiles having opposed walls ......................................................................128
Figure 18.1 Changing directions of reinforcement .........................................................................................131
Figure 18.2 Protection against bar buckling ..................................................................................................131
Figure 18.3 Curtailment of longitudinal tension reinforcement by the resistant diagram ...............................133
Figure 19.1 Necessary anchorage length ......................................................................................................144
Figure 19.2 Critical perimeter in internal columns .........................................................................................145
Figure 19.3 Critical perimeter in columns at edges .......................................................................................147
Figure 19.4 Critical perimeter in columns at corners .....................................................................................148
Figure 19.5 Definition of the effective depth for capital or drop panels .........................................................148
Figure 19.6 Critical perimeter with L shaped contour C..................................................................................149
Figure 19.7 Critical perimeter near openings in slabs ...................................................................................149
Figure 19.8 Placement of the punching reinforcement in plain and contour of the critical surface C ..........151
Figure 19.9 Placement of the punching reinforcement in section ..................................................................151
Figure 19.10 Reinforcement against progressive collapse ..............................................................................152
Figure 19.11 Favorable effect of inclined tendons ...........................................................................................152
Figure 20.1 Free edges and openings ...........................................................................................................153
Figure 20.2 Slabs without beams ...................................................................................................................154
Figure 20.3 Punching reinforcement ..............................................................................................................156

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Figure 21.1 Areas of localized pressure .......................................................................................................158

Figure 21.2 Zone of hinge of concrete .........................................................................................................158
Figure 21.3 Pressures close to an embedded bolt in a concrete structural element ...................................159
Figure 21.4 Openings in deep-beams of reinforced concrete ......................................................................160
Figure 21.5 Vertical openings in beams .......................................................................................................161
Figure 22.1 Two most common types of deep-beams regarding loading ....................................................162
Figure 22.2 Typical reinforcement of deep-beams with h l .......................................................................163
Figure 22.3 Strut and tie model for short corbels .........................................................................................164
Figure 22.4 Typical reinforcement for short corbels .....................................................................................166
Figure 22.5 Strut and tie model for dapped ends ........................................................................................167
Figure 23.1 Definition of stresses c1 and c2 ..............................................................................................176
Figure 23.2 Shape of the characteristic resistance curves to fatigue (S-N curves) for steel .......................178
Figure 24.1 Diagram of design stress-deformation of concrete considering creep .....................................182
Figure 24.2 Section subjected to compression-bending ..............................................................................184
Figure A.1 Variation of ccf (t) ......................................................................................................................190
Figure A.2 Variation of f(t) .........................................................................................................................192
Figure A.3 Variation s(t) ............................................................................................................................194
C.2 Tables
Page
Table 6.1 Classes of environmental aggressions .......................................................................................16
Table 7.1 Correspondence among classes of aggression and qualities of concrete .................................18
Table 7.2 Correspondence among classes of environmental aggression and nominal cover
forc = 10mm ..............................................................................................................................19
Table 8.1 Characteristic upper values of shrinkage strain cs(t,t0) and of creep coefficient (t,t0) ...........25
Table 8.2 Relationship between 1 and b ..................................................................................................26
Table 8.3 Values of 1000, in percentage ....................................................................................................29
Table 9.1 Diameter of bending pins (D) ......................................................................................................34
Table 9.2 Diameter of bending pins for stirrups ..........................................................................................38
Table 9.3 Maximal proportion of jointed tensioned bars .............................................................................40
Table 9.4 Values of coefficient 0t ..............................................................................................................40
Table 11.1 Coefficient f = f1.f3 ....................................................................................................................59
Table 11.2 Values of coefficient f2 ...............................................................................................................59
Table 11.3 Ultimate combinations .................................................................................................................61
Table 11.4 Service combinations ..................................................................................................................62
Table 12.1 Coefficient values c and s ..........................................................................................................64
Table 13.1 Values of the additional coefficient n ..........................................................................................66
Table 13.2 Limits for displacements .............................................................................................................70
Table 13.3 Durability requirements regarding cracks and protection of the reinforcement in accordance to
classes of environmental aggressions ........................................................................................72
Table 15.1 Values of fl ...............................................................................................................................101
Table 17.1 Values of coefficient in function of time ..................................................................................113
Table 17.2 Maximum values of diameter and spaces with high bond bars ................................................116
Table 17.3 Minimum rations for bending reinforcement for beams ............................................................117
Table 18.1 Minimum space - Post-tensioning situation ..............................................................................139
Table 18.2 Minimum space - Pre-tensioning situation ................................................................................140
Table 19.1 Minimum values for bonded passive reinforcement .................................................................143
Table 19.2 Values of K ................................................................................................................................146
Table 23.1 Critical frequency in some special cases of structures submitted to vibrations by actions of
people .......................................................................................................................................173
Table 23.2 Parameters for curves S-N (Woeller) for steels within concrete ...............................................177
Table 23.3 Types of S-N curve ....................................................................................................................177
Table A.1 Usual numeric values to determine creep and shrinkage .........................................................193
Table A.2 Values of creep and shrinkage in function of hardening speed of concrete .............................195

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Annex D
(informative)
Alphabetic Index
Actions ..............................................................................................................................................................11
Action of water ..........................................................................................................................................11.4.1.3
Action of wind ..........................................................................................................................................11.4.1.2
Combination of actions .............................................................. 11.8, tables 11.3, table 11.4, table 13.3, 15.3.1
Cyclic actions ...............................................................................................................................................23.5.1
Dynamic actions ................................................................................................................................................23
Exceptional actions .........................................................................................................................................11.5
Partial safety factor of actions ........................................................................................................................11.7
Permanent actions .....................................................................................................11.3, 11.6.1. and table 11.3
Values of actions ............................................................................................................................................11.6
Characteristic values..............................................................................................................................11.6.1
Design values ........................................................................................................................................11.6.3
Representative values ..........................................................................................................................11.6.2
Variable actions ....................................................................................11.4, 11.6.1.2, table 11.3 and table 11.4
Addictives......................................................................................................................................................7.4.4
Aggregate ...................................................................................................................................................7.4.7.6
Anchorage .......................................................................................................................................................9.4
Arches ..........................................................................................................................................14.4.1.4, 24.6.4
Beams
Anchorage of the lower reinforcement of beams ...................................................................................22.3.2.4.4
Approximate evaluation of the deflection in beams ..................................................................................17.3.2.1
Calculation of the time dependent deflection of beams of reinforced concrete ..............................17.3.2.1.2
Deflection in beams with active reinforcement ...............................................................................17.3.2.1.3
Immediate deflection in beams of reinforced concrete ...................................................................17.3.2.1.1
Beams (definition) .....................................................................................................................................14.4.1.1
Beams (detailing) ............................................................................................................................................18.3
Generalities ...........................................................................................................................................18.3.1
Longitudinal reinforcement ....................................................................................................................18.3.2
Longitudinal distribution ..............................................................................................................18.3.2.3
Minimum quantity ........................................................................................................................18.3.2.1
Tensioned reinforcements in support sections ...........................................................................18.3.2.4
Transversal distribution ...............................................................................................................18.3.2.2
Transversal reinforcements for shearing force .....................................................................................18.3.3
Generalities .................................................................................................................................18.3.3.1
Reinforcement that connects flange-web and talon-web ..............................................................18.3.7
Structural elements reinforced by stirrups ..................................................................................18.3.3.2
Structural elements reinforced with bent bars ............................................................................18.3.3.3
Surface reinforcement ...................................................................................................................18.3.5
Suspension reinforcement .............................................................................................................18.3.6
Torsion reinforcement ....................................................................................................................18.3.4
Continuous beams ...................................................................................................................................14.6.7.1
Dimensioning ......................................................................................................................................................17
Ductility in beams ........................................................................................................................................17.2.3
Holes that cross beams in the direction of their height ...............................................................................21.3.3
Holes that cross beams in the direction of their width ..............................................................................13.2.5.1
Lateral instability of beams ...........................................................................................................................15.10
Limit values for longitudinal reinforcements of beams .............................................................................17.3.5 2
Structures of linear elements ..........................................................................................................................14.6
Basic hypothesis ...................................................................................................................................14.6.1
Characterization of geometry ................................................................................................................14.6.2
Rigid parts ....................................................................................................................................14.6.2.1

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Collaborating width in beams of T sections ................................................................................ 14.6.2.2

Haunches and sudden variation of sections ............................................................................... 14.6.2.3
Effective spans of beams ............................................................................................................ 14.6.2.4
Walls and deep-beams ............................................................................................................................... 21.3.2
Bending
Approximated processes for the dimensioning of linear elements to compression-bending ..................... 17.2.5
Normal compression-bending ........................................................................................................... 17.2.5.1
Oblique compression-bending ........................................................................................................... 17.2.5.2
Bending and torsion (linear elements) ........................................................................................................ 17.7.1
Minimum values for bending reinforcements for beams .......................................................................table 17.3
Stresses and deformations in bending (plain concrete) ............................................................................. 24.5.4
Tension reinforcement in simple bending anchored by bonding .......................................................... 18.3.2.3.1
Blocks ............................................................................................................................. 14.8.2, 22.5 and 24.6.2
Bonding ................................................................................................................................................... 9.3, 9.4
Buckling
Lateral instability of beams .......................................................................................................................... 15.10
Protection against buckling of bars ............................................................................................................. 18.2.4
Bundles of bars
Anchorage of bundles of bars through bonding .............................................................................................9.4.3
Splicing joints in bundles of bars ............................................................................................................... 9.5.2.5
Minimum space among tendons or bundles of tendons in slabs without beams .................................... 20.3.2.3
Capacitated professional ............................................................................................................... 5.3.1 e 25.4
Capital or drop panels
Punching .................................................................................................................................................. 19.5.2.5
Slabs ........................................................................................................................................................... 14.7.8
Cement ..........................................................................................................................................................7.4.3
Theoretical curve of resistance to compression of the concrete ................................................................ 12.3.3
Values of creep and shrinkage in function of hardening speed of concrete ........................A.2.4.1 and table A.2
Characteristics
Characteristic values of action .................................................................................................................... 11.6.1
Characteristic values of resistance ................................................................................................................12.2
Classes of environmental aggressions ............................................................see Environmental aggression
Coefficient
Additional coefficient of actions for columns and wall-columns ...........................................13.2.3 and table 13.1
Coefficient of redistribution of moments ............................................................................. 14.6.4.3 and 14.7.3.2
Coefficient of superficial conformation of steel ..............................................................................................8.3.2
Coefficient of thermal expansion of concrete ................................................................................................8.2.3
Coefficient of thermal expansion of steel (active reinforcement) ...................................................................8.4.3
Coefficient of thermal expansion of steel (passive reinforcement) ................................................................8.3.4
Creep coefficient of concrete .................................................................................................8.2.11 and Annex A
st nd
Factoring coefficient of 1 order global internal forces and moments to obtain the finals of 2 order ....... 15.5.3
Partial safety factors of actions ..............................................................................11.7 and tables 11.1 and 11.2
Partial safety factors of resistances ........................................................................................12.4 and table 12.1
Partial safety factors of ultimate limit states at the act of prestressing .................................................... 17.2.4.3
Poissons coefficient of concrete ...................................................................................................................8.2.9
Columns
Analysis of wall-columns .................................................................................................................................15.9
Approximated process for consideration of localized second order effects.......................................... 15.9.3
Exemption from analysis of second order local effects......................................................................... 15.9.2
Generalities ........................................................................................................................................... 15.9.1
Columns (definition) ................................................................................................................................. 14.4.1.2
Columns (detailing) .........................................................................................................................................18.4
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 18.4.1

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Longitudinal reinforcement ...................................................................................................................18.4.2

Minimum diameter and ratio of reinforcement ............................................................................18.4.2.1
Transversal distribution ..............................................................................................................18.4.2.2
Transversal reinforcements .................................................................................................................18.4.3
Columns of plain concrete ............................................................................................................................24.6.3
Considering creep .......................................................................................................................................15.8.4
Design criteria .................................................................................................................................................16.3
Determination of the second order local effects .........................................................................................15.8.3
Bars subjected to normal compression-bending ................................................................................15.8.3.1
General method .................................................................................................................................15.8.3.2
Approximated methods .....................................................................................................................15.8.3.3
Standard-column with approximated curvature .......................................................................15.8.3.3.2
Method standard-column with approximated rigidity ...........................................................15.8.3.3.3
Standard-column coupled to diagrams M, N, 1/r ............................................................................15.8.3.3.4
Standard-column of rectangular section submitted to oblique compression-bending ....................15.8.3.3.5
Dimensions ........................................................................................................................................................17
Dimensions of columns and wall-columns ....................................................................................11.7.1 e 13.2.3
Dowel or extended reinforcement bar of columns .........................................................22.4.4.1.2 and 22.5.4.1.4
Exemption of analysis of second order local effects ....................................................................................15.8.2
Limit values for longitudinal reinforcements of columns ...........................................................................17.3.5.3
Local imperfections ...........................................................................................................11.3.3.4.2 e 11.3.3.4.3
Transversal reinforcement ..........................................................................................................................18.4.3
Compression
Diagram stress-strain of concrete under compression .............................................................................8.2.10.1
Limit state of excessive compression (SLS-EC) ...........................................................................................3.2.7
Resistance to compression of concrete ........................................................................................................8.2.4
Verification of fatigue in concrete under compression...............................................................................23.5.4.1
Concrete ..........................................................................................................................................................8.2
Concrete hinges ..........................................................................................................................................21.2.2
Creep of concrete ........................................................................................................11.3.3.1 and Annex A, A.2
Definitions of structural concrete .......................................................................................................................3.1
Design resistance of concrete .....................................................................................................................12.3.3
Effect of time on structural concrete ........................................................................................................ Annex A
Plain concrete ....................................................................................................................................................24
Prevailing deterioration mechanisms regarding concrete .............................................................................6.3.2
Quality of concrete and cover ...........................................................................................................................7.4
Receiving of concrete and steel .....................................................................................................................25.2
Shrinkage of concrete ......................................................................................................... 11.3.3.2 and Annex A
Verification of fatigue in concrete ................................................................................................................23.5.4
Contact pressure in reduced area ...........................................................................................................21.2.1
Corbels .......................................................................................................................................................22.3.1
Cover of the reinforcement ...........................................................................................................7.4 e 20.3.2.4
Crackings and crack openings
Crack control (design criteria) ...........................................................................................................................7.6
Dimensioning and verification of linear elements
Limit state of cracking ...........................................................................................................................17.3.3
Control of cracking through limitation of estimated crack openings ............................................17.3.3.2
Control of cracking without the verification of crack opening .....................................................17.3.3.3
Limit state of decompression and crack formation ...............................................................................17.3.4
Limit state of inclined cracking of webs shearing force and torsion ......................................................17.6
Dimensioning and verification of slabs
Limit states of cracking and decompression or of crack formation ......................................................19.3.2
Limit state of crack formation (SLS-F) ...........................................................................................................3.2.2
Limit state of crack opening (SLS-W) ............................................................................................................3.2.3
Limits for dimensions, displacements and openings of cracks .........................................................................13
Crack control and reinforcement protection ............................................................................................13.4

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Creep
Characteristic upper values of shrinkage strain and of creep coefficient ................................................table 8.1
Creep and shrinkage .................................................................................................................................. 8.2.11
Creep of concrete ................................................................................................... Annex A, A.2.2 and 11.3.3.2
Dapped ends ............................................................................................................................................. 22.3.2
Deep-beams
Beams and deep-beams (dimensions) ....................................................................................................... 13.2.2
Deep-beams ...................................................................................................................................................22.2
Nodes in frames and connections between walls ...........................................................................................21.4
Structural analysis with deep-beams and wall-columns ............................................................................. 14.8.1
Walls and deep-beams ............................................................................................................................... 21.3.2
Deflection
Approximate evaluation of the deflection in beams ................................................................................. 17.3.2.1
Calculation of the time dependent deflection of beams of reinforced concrete ............................. 17.3.2.1.2
Deflection in beams with active reinforcement ............................................................................... 17.3.2.1.3
Immediate deflection in beams of reinforced concrete .................................................................. 17.3.2.1.1
Design
Design acceptance .........................................................................................................................................25.1
Design criteria regarding durability .....................................................................................................................7
Evaluation of design conformity ........................................................................................................................5.3
Interfaces of design with construction, use and maintenance ...........................................................................25
Quality requirements of design ........................................................................................................................5.2
Quality of the adopted solution ................................................................................................................5.2.1
Imposed conditions to design .................................................................................................................5.2.2
Documentation of the adopted solution ..................................................................................................5.2.3
Structural design (structures of plain concrete) ..............................................................................................24.5
Design values
Design internal forces and moments .......................................................................................................... 12.5.4
Design resistance ....................................................................................................................................... 12.5.3
Design resistance values ................................................................................................................................12.3
Design resistance stresses .................................................................................................................. 12.3.2
Design resistance of concrete .............................................................................................................. 12.3.3
Design values of actions ............................................................................................................................. 11.6.3
Design values of prestressing forces ......................................................................................................... 9.6.1.4
Diagram
Diagrams stress-strain for concrete .................................................... 8.2.10, 24.5.4.1, figures 8.2, 8.3 and 24.1
Diagram stress-strain for steel (active reinforcement) ........................................................... 8.4.5 and figure 8.5
Diagram stress-strain for steel (passive reinforcement) ........................................................ 8.3.6 and figure 8.4
Dimensioning and verification
Blocks on piles ................................................................................................................................................22.5
Concrete joints ................................................................................................................................................21.6
Corbels ........................................................................................................................................................ 22.3.1
Dapped ends ............................................................................................................................................... 22.3.2
Deep-beams ...................................................................................................................................................22.2
Elements of plain concrete ................................................................................................................................24
Fatigue (ULS) ..................................................................................................................................................23.5
Footings ..........................................................................................................................................................22.4
Frame nodes and joints between walls ...........................................................................................................21.4
Joints of precast structural elements ..............................................................................................................21.5
Linear elements subjected to combined internal forces and moments ..........................................................17.7
Linear elements subjected to normal forces and moments (SLS) ..................................................................17.3
Linear elements subjected to normal forces and moments (ULS) .................................................................17.2
Linear elements subjected to shearing force and torsion (SLS of inclined cracking of webs) .......................17.6
Linear elements subjected to shearing forces (ULS) ......................................................................................17.4
Linear elements subjected to torsion (ULS) ...................................................................................................17.5
Slabs (SLS) .....................................................................................................................................................19.3

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Slabs (ULS) ....................................................................................................................................................19.2

Slabs and linear elements with bw 5d subjected to shearing force .............................................................19.4
Slabs subjected to punching ...........................................................................................................................19.5
Zones of introduction of concentrated loads ..................................................................................................21.2
Zones with holes and openings ......................................................................................................................21.3
Displacement
Displacements ................................................................................................................................ see Deflection
Displacements of support .........................................................................................................................11.3.3.3
Limit displacements ................................................................................................................13.3 and table 13.2
Ductility
Ductility in beams ........................................................................................................................................17.2.3
Redistribution of moments and ductility conditions in structures of linear elements ................................14.6.4.3
Redistribution of moments and ductility conditions in structures with plate elements ..............................14.7.3.2
Durability of concrete structures
Design criteria for durability .................................................................................................................................7
Durability..........................................................................................................................................................16.4
Guidelines for durability of concrete structures ...................................................................................................6
Limit for cracks and protection of reinforcement regarding durability ..........................................................13.4.2
Efforts
Design resistance ........................................................................................................................................12.5.3
Design internal forces and moments ...........................................................................................................12.5.4
Embedded pipes ........................................................................................................................................13.2.6
Environmental aggressions ..........................................................................................................................6.4
Classes .................................................................................................................................................... table 6.1
Correspondence among classes of aggression and nominal cover for c=10 mm ................................ table 7.2
Correspondence among classes of aggression and qualities of concrete .............................................. table 7.1
Extension and pre-extension .......................... 3.1.3, 3.1.6, 3.1.8, 3.1.9, 8.3.9, 8.4.5, 9.6.3.2, 11.3.3.5, 17.2.2
Fatigue ..............................................................................................................................................................23
Limit state of excessive vibrations ..................................................................................................................23.3
Serviceability limit states ................................................................................................................................23.6
Resistance of concrete to fatigue ..................................................................................................................8.2.7
Resistance of steel to fatigue (active reinforcement) .....................................................................................8.4.7
Resistance of steel to fatigue (passive reinforcement) ..................................................................................8.3.8
Ultimate limit state caused by resonance or dynamic amplification ...............................................................23.4
Ultimate limit state of fatigue ..........................................................................................................................23.5
Cyclic actions ........................................................................................................................................23.5.1
Combination of actions to be considered ..............................................................................................23.5.2
Design model ........................................................................................................................................23.5.3
Verification of fatigue in concrete ..........................................................................................................23.5.4
Verification of fatigue in reinforcement ..................................................................................................23.5.5
Fixed and mobile nodes ....................................................................................................................15.6 e 15.7
Footings .........................................................................................................................................................22.4
Haunches
Haunches and sudden variation of sections .............................................................................................14.6.2.3
Haunches and sudden variation of thickness ..........................................................................................14.7.2.1
Hinges .........................................................................................................................................................21.2.2
Hooks
Hooks of tension reinforcement ..................................................................................................................9.4.2.3
Hooks of stirrups .........................................................................................................................................9.4.6.1
Instability and second order effects .............................................................................................................15

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Internal forces and moments

Design internal forces and moments .......................................................................................................... 12.5.4
Design internal forces and moments (plain concrete) ............................................................................. 24.5.2.2
Design of internal forces and moments of combination of actions ...........................................tables 11.3 e 11.4
Interaction of the internal normal and tangential forces and moments .................................................... 19.5.2.7
Linear elements subjected to combined internal forces and moments .........................................................17.7
Linear elements subjected to normal internal forces and moments ................................................................17.2
Linear elements subjected to normal internal forces and moments (SLS) .....................................................17.3
Linear elements subjected to shearing force and torsion (limit state of inclined cracking of webs) ...............17.6
Linear elements subjected to shearing forces (ULS) ......................................................................................17.4
Linear elements subjected to torsion (ELU) ...................................................................................................17.5
Shearing force in slabs and linear elements with bw 5d ..............................................................................19.4
Slabs subjected to punching ...........................................................................................................................19.5
Zones of introduction of concentrated loads ...................................................................................................21.2
Joints (concrete joints)
Concrete joints ................................................................................................................................................21.6
Joints and construction provisions (plain concrete) ........................................................................................24.4
Expansion joint ............................................................................................................................................ 3.1.10
Partial expansion joint ................................................................................................................................. 3.1.11
Joints ou union of bars ..................................................................................................................................9.5
Limit dimensions of structural elements ....................................................................................................13.2
Limit states ................................................................................ 3.2, 10.2, 10.3, 10.4, 17.3, 17.4, 17.5 and 17.6
Limit state of crack formation (SLS-F) ...........................................................................................................3.2.2
Limit state of crack opening (SLS-W) ............................................................................................................3.2.3
Limit state of decompression (SLS-D) ...........................................................................................................3.2.5
Limit state of excessive compression (SLS-EC) ............................................................................................3.2.7
Limit state of excessive deflection (SLS-D) ...................................................................................................3.2.4
Limit state of excessive vibrations (SLS-EV) .................................................................................................3.2.8
Limit state of partial decompression (SLS-PD) ...................................................................... 3.2.6 and figure 3.1
Ultimate limit state (ULS) ..................................................................................................... 3.2.1 and figure 17.1
Load
Consideration of variable loads in usual structures of buildings- Allowed approximations ..................... 14.6.7.3
Load tests of the structure .......................................................................................................................... 25.3.2
Variable loads foreseen in the use of the construction ............................................................................ 11.4.1.1
Zones of introduction of concentrated loads ...................................................................................................21.2
Load tests of the structure ...................................................................................................................... 25.3.2
Materials
Joint behavior of materials ...................................................................................................................................9
Plain concrete .................................................................................................................................................24.3
Properties of materials .........................................................................................................................................8
Mechanical devices
Union through mechanical devices ................................................................................................................9.5.3
Modulus of elasticity
Concrete
Modulus of elasticity ................................................................................................................................8.2.8
Poissons coefficient and transversal modulus of elasticity .....................................................................8.2.9
Stress-strain diagram ........................................................................................................................... 8.2.10
Steel for active reinforcement
Diagram stress-deformation, yield and tension strength .........................................................................8.4.5
Steel for passive reinforcement
Diagram stress-deformation, yield and tension strength .........................................................................8.3.6
Nodes in frames ............................................................................................................................................21.4

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Openings in the concrete ................ 13.2.5, 13.2.6, figure 13.1, 20.2, figure 20.1, 21.3, figures 21.4 and 21.5
Poissons coefficient ...................................................................................................................................8.2.9
Prestress
Active reinforcement (prestress) ....................................................................................................................3.1.6
Concrete with post-tensioned active reinforcement (delayed prestressing without bond) ............................3.1.8
Concrete with post-tensioned active reinforcement without bond (prestressing without bond) ....................3.1.9
Concrete with pre-tensioned active reinforcement (prestressing by initial bond) ..........................................3.1.7
Prestress............................................................................................................................9.6, 11.3.3.5 3 17.2.4.2
Introduction to prestressing forces .........................................................................................................9.6.2
Cases of post-tensioning .............................................................................................................9.6.2.2
Cases of pre-tensioning ...............................................................................................................9.6.2.3
Generalities ...................................................................................................................................9.6.2.1
Losses of prestressing force ...................................................................................................................9.6.3
Generalities ......................................................................................................................................6.3.1
Immediate losses of prestressing force ........................................................................................9.6.3.3
Initial losses of prestressing force ................................................................................................9.6.3.2
Progressive losses ........................................................................................................................9.6.3.4
Prestressing forces .................................................................................................................................9.6.1
Design values of prestressing forces ..............................................................................................9.6.1.4
Generalities .....................................................................................................................................9.6.1.1
Limit values of forces in prestressed reinforcement .......................................................................9.6.1.2
Representative values of prestressing forces .................................................................................9.6.1.3
Prestress levels .............................................................................................................................................9.2.2
Prestress tendons ..........................................................................................................................................18.6
Longitudinal design ..............................................................................................................................18.6.1
Anchorage ...................................................................................................................................18.6.1.8
Curvature near anchorages .......................................................................................................18.6.1.3
Curvatures ..................................................................................................................................18.6.1.2
Extension of ends .......................................................................................................................18.6.1.6
Fixing during construction ...........................................................................................................18.6.1.4
Joints ...........................................................................................................................................18.6.1.7
Profiles ........................................................................................................................................18.6.1.1
Straight ends ...............................................................................................................................18.6.1.5
Transversal layout ................................................................................................................................18.6.2
Group of tendons during post-tensioning ...................................................................................18.6.2.2
Minimum spacing .......................................................................................................................18.6.2.3
Sheaths .......................................................................................................................................18.6.2.1
Zones of introduction of prestressing ..........................................................................................................21.2.3
Punching
Dimensioning of punching slabs ....................................................................................................................19.5
Design model ........................................................................................................................................19.5.1
Definition of the internal stress in the critical surfaces C and C ..........................................................19.5.2
Capital or drop panel ..................................................................................................................19.5.2.5
Columns at corners ....................................................................................................................19.5.2.4
Columns at edges ......................................................................................................................19.5.2.3
Interaction of the internal normal and tangential forces and moments ......................................19.5.2.7
Internal column with moment effect ...........................................................................................19.5.2.2
Internal column with symmetrical load .......................................................................................19.5.2.1
Special conditions for definition of critical contours ...................................................................19.5.2.6
Definition of the critical surface C ....................................................................................................19.5.3.4
Resistance stress in the critical surface C in structural elements or parts with punching
reinforcement .............................................................................................................................19.5.3.3
Resistance stress in the critical surface C i n s tr uc t u r a l e lem en ts or p ar ts w i t ho ut pu nc hi n g
r e inf o r c em en t ........................................................................................................................19.5.3.2
Verification of the resistance stress of diagonal compression of concrete in the critical surface C
...................................................................................................................................................19.5.3.1
Definition of the resistance stress in critical surfaces C, C and C .....................................................19.5.3
Progressive collapse .............................................................................................................................19.5.4

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Verification of prestressed structural elements .................................................................................... 19.5.5

Plain concrete .......................................................................................................................................... 24.5.2.6
Punching reinforcement .................................................................................................................................20.4
Reduced area
Contact pressure in ..................................................................................................................................... 21.2.1
Reinforcement .......................................................... 17.2.4, 17.5.1.6, 17.7.1.2, 17.7.1.3, 18.2, 19.4.2, 20.3.2.6
Active reinforcement ................................................................................................................. 3.1.6, 8.4 and 9.6
Post-tensioned ....................................................................................................................... 3.1.8 and 3.1.9
Pre-tensioned ..........................................................................................................................................3.1.7
Anchorage ................................................................. 9.4, 18.3.2.4.1, 18.3.3.3.1, 22.2.4.2, 22.3.2.4.3, 22.3.2.4.4
Bonding .......................................................................................................................................... see Anchorage
Cover of reinforcement ............................................................................................................... 7.4 and 20.3.2.4
Deformation in reinforcement .......................................................................................................................... A.3
Detailing of reinforcement .................................................................................................................................7.5
Beams ......................................................................................................................................................18.3
Blocks on piles ..................................................................................................................................... 22.5.4
Columns ...................................................................................................................................................18.4
Corbels .............................................................................................................................................. 22.3.1.4
Dapped ends ..................................................................................................................................... 22.3.2.4
Deep-beams ......................................................................................................................................... 22.2.4
Design criteria for durability ........................................................................................................................7.5
Footings ................................................................................................................................................ 22.4.4
Linear elements .................................................................................................................................... 18.2.1
Prestressed slabs ................................................................................................................................. 20.3.2
Prestressed tendons ................................................................................................................................18.6
Punching reinforcement ...........................................................................................................................20.4
Slabs without beams and with passive reinforcement ......................................................................... 20.3.1
Wall columns ............................................................................................................................................18.5
Deterioration of reinforcement .......................................................................................................................6.3.3
Joints .................................................................................................................................................................9.5
Mandatory punching reinforcement ......................................................................................................... 19.5.3.5
Maximum and minimum longitudinal reinforcement ..................................................... 17.3.5, 19.3.3, table 19.1
Limit values for longitudinal reinforcements of beams ............................................... 17.3.5.2 and table 17.3
Limit values for longitudinal reinforcements of columns .................................................................... 17.3.5.3
Passive reinforcement ..................................................................................................................... 3.1.5 and 8.3
Protection of reinforcement .............................................................................................................................13.4
Reinforcement design ................................................................................................... 17, 19, 20, 21, 22 and 23
Surface reinforcement ......................................................................................................... 17.3.5.2.3 and 18.3.5
Verification of fatigue in reinforcement ........................................................................................................ 23.5.5
Relation water/cement ....................................................................................................................7.4 e table 1
Resistance
Concrete
Compression strength .............................................................................................................................8.2.4
Resistance to fatigue ...............................................................................................................................8.2.7
Resistance in multiaxial states of stress ............................................................................. 8.2.6 e figure 8.1
Tension strength ......................................................................................................................................8.2.5
Resistances .......................................................................................................................................................12
Characteristic values ...............................................................................................................................12.2
Design values ...........................................................................................................................................12.3
Design resistance ............................................................................................................................ 12.3.1
Design resistance of concrete ......................................................................................................... 12.3.3
Design resistance stresses ............................................................................................................. 12.3.2
Partial safety factors of resistances .........................................................................................................12.4
Partial safety factors of resistances in the serviceability limit state (SLS) ...................................... 12.4.2
Partial safety factors of resistances in the ultimate limit state (ULS) .............................................. 12.4.1
Safety verification .....................................................................................................................................12.5

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Analytic safety conditions .................................................................................................................12.5.2

Design internal forces and moments ...............................................................................................12.5.4
Design resistance ............................................................................................................................12.5.3
Safety constructive conditions .........................................................................................................12.5.1
Values of bond strength .....................................................................................................................9.3.2
Steel for active reinforcement
Diagram stress-deformation, yield and tension strength ........................................................................8.4.5
Resistance to fatigue .............................................................................................................................8.4.7
Steel for passive reinforcement
Diagram stress-deformation, yield and tension strength ........................................................................8.3.6
Resistance to fatigue ...............................................................................................................................8.3.8
Resonance .....................................................................................................................................................23.4
Ruin and rupture
Ultimate limit state (ULS) ...............................................................................................................................3.2.1
Resistant capacity of the structure .............................................................................................................5.1.2.1
Design domains ....................................................................................................................................figure 17.1
Safety
Safety and limit states ......................................................................................................................................10
Safety criteria ..................................................................................................................................................10.1
Safety in regard to SLS (performance in service) .......................................................................................16.2.4
Safety in regard to the ULS .........................................................................................................................16.2.3
Safety verification ..........................................................................................................................................12.5
Analytic safety conditions ......................................................................................................................12.5.2
Design internal forces and moments ....................................................................................................12.5.4
Design resistance ..................................................................................................................................12.5.3
Safety constructive conditions ..............................................................................................................12.5.1
Second order effects .......................................................................................................................................15
Analysis of second order local effects ..........................................................................................................15.7.4
Approximated process for consideration of localized second order effects ................................................15.9.3
Determination of second order local effects ................................................................................................15.8.3
Exemption of analysis of second order local effects ................................................................15.8.2 and 15.9.2
Global, local and localized second order effects .........................................................................................15.4.1
Sections
Domains of ultimate limit states of transversal sections .......................................................................figure 17.1
Geometry of the resistant sections ...........................................................................................................17.5.1.4
Gross convex polygonal sections ...................................................................................................17.5.1.4.1
Hollow sections ...............................................................................................................................17.5.1.4.3
Section made up of rectangles .......................................................................................................17.5.1.4.2
Service
Dimensioning and verification of slabs Ultimate limit state .........................................................................19.3
Serviceability limit states (fatigue) ..................................................................................................................23.6
Serviceability limit states (SLS) ......................................................................................................................10.4
Linear elements subjected to normal internal forces and moments Serviceability limit state .....................17.3
Partial safety factor of actions in serviceability limit states (SLS) ...............................................................11.7.2
Partial safety factors of resistances in the serviceability limit state (SLS) ...................................................12.4.2
Safety in regard to SLS (performance in service) .......................................................................................16.2.4
Service combinations (actions) ....................................................................................................................11.8.3
Classification ......................................................................................................................................11.8.3.1
Usual service combinations ...............................................................................................................11.8.3.2
Shearing and shearing force
Deep-beams and wall-columns ...................................................................................................................14.8.1
Fatigue calculation of stresses caused by shearing force on beams .......................................................23.5.3
Linear elements subjected to combined forces and moments .......................................................................17.7
Linear elements subjected to shearing force - (ULS) ....................................................................................17.4
Linear elements subjected to shearing force and torsion (limit state of inclined cracking of webs) ...............17.6
Plain concrete ....................................................................................................24.5.2, 24.5.5, 24.5.6 and 24.5.7

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Resistance to shearing of weld of welded transversal bars .................................................... 9.4.2.2 and 9.4.6.2
Ribbed slabs ............................................................................................................................................ 13.2.4.2
Shearing force in slabs and linear elements with bw 5d ...............................................................................19.4
Slabs submitted to punching ....................................................................................................................... 19.5.1
Slabs with reinforcement for shearing force ............................................................................................... 19.4.2
Slabs without reinforcement for shearing force .......................................................................................... 19.4.1
Special zones Loads applied on surfaces of structural elements ............................................................ 21.2.4
Transversal reinforcement for shearing force
Bent-up longitudinal reinforcement bars .............................................................................................. 18.2.2
Columns ............................................................................................................................................... 18.4.3
Beams .................................................................................................................................................. 18.3.3
Shocks (Dynamic actions) ...................................................................................................................... 11.4.2.3
Shrinkage ........................................................................................................................ 8.2.11, 11.3.3.1 e A.2.3
Slabs
Detailing of slabs ................................................................................................................................................20
Free edges and openings .........................................................................................................................20.2
General provisions ...................................................................................................................................20.1
Punching reinforcement ..........................................................................................................................20.4
Slabs without beams ................................................................................................................................20.3
Passive reinforcement .................................................................................................................... 20.3.1
Prestressed slabs ............................................................................................................................ 20.3.2
Dimensioning and verification of slabs (SLS) .................................................................................................19.3
Dimensioning and verification of slabs (ULS) .................................................................................................19.2
Dimensioning of slabs for punching ................................................................................................................19.5
Effective spans of slabs or plates ............................................................................................................ 14.7.2.2
Limit dimensions for slabs ......................................................................................................................... 13.2.4
Massive slabs .................................................................................................................................... 13.2.4.1
Ribbed slabs ...................................................................................................................................... 13.2.4.2
Maximum and minimum longitudinal reinforcement .................................................................................. 19.3.3
Openings in slabs ....................................................................................................................................... 21.3.4
Openings that cross slabs in the direction of their thickness ................................................................... 13.2.5.2
Shearing force in slabs and linear elements with bw 5d ..............................................................................19.4
Slabs with reinforcement for shearing force ......................................................................................... 19.4.2
Slabs without reinforcement for shearing force .................................................................................... 19.4.1
Structural analysis
Flat and drop panel slabs .................................................................................................................... 14.7.8
Massive slabs ....................................................................................................................................... 14.7.6
Ribbed slabs ......................................................................................................................................... 14.7.7
Slenderness ratio .............................................................................................................................................15
Slower deformation ............................................................................................................................see Creep
Spacing
Control of cracking without the verification of crack opening ........................................... 17.3.3.3 and table 17.2
Longitudinal spacing among bent bars of the transversal reinforcement for shearing force................. 18.3.3.3.2
Spacing between ribs of ribbed slabs ....................................................................................................... 13.2.4.2
Structural elements reinforced by stirrups ............................................................................................... 18.3.3.2
Surface reinforcement ............................................................................................................. 17.3.5.2.3 e 18.3.5
Transversal distribution of longitudinal reinforcement for beams ............................................................ 18.3.2.2
Special zones ..................................................................................................................................................21
Steel
Receiving concrete and steel ..........................................................................................................................25.2
Steel in active reinforcement .........................................................................................................................8.2.4
Steel in passive reinforcement........................................................................................................................8.2.3
Stirrups
Diameter of bending pins for stirrups........................................................................................................table 9.2

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Protection against buckling of bars ....................................................................................18.2.4 and figure 18.2

Punching reinforcement...................................................................................................................................20.4
Slabs with reinforcement for shearing force ................................................................................................19.4.2
Stirrup anchorage ..........................................................................................................................................9.4.6
Structural elements reinforced by stirrups
Beams ................................................................................................................................................18.3.3.2
Columns ................................................................................................................................................18.4.3
Linear elements subjected to shearing force (ULS) .............................................................17.4.1.1 e 17.4.2
Linear elements subjected to torsion (ULS) ......................................................................17.5.1.2 e 17.5.1.6
Suspension reinforcement for dapped ends ..........................................................................................22.3.2.4.2
Torsion reinforcement (beams) ...................................................................................................................18.3.4
Strain
Diagram stress-deformation ........................................................................................................... see Diagrams
Limit state of deformation of slabs ...............................................................................................................19.3.1
Linear elements subjected to normal internal forces and moments ...........................................................17.3.2
Strain due to creep of concrete ........................................................................................... 11.3.3.2 and Annex A
Strain specific of shrinkage of concrete .............................................................................. 11.3.3.1 and Annex A
Structural analysis ..........................................................................................................................................14
Structure
Definition and classification of structures ......................................................................................................15.4
Analysis of structures of fixed nodes ......................................................................................................15.6
Analysis of structures of mobile nodes ...................................................................................................15.7
Guidelines for durability of concrete structures ...................................................................................................6
Load tests of the structure ...........................................................................................................................25.3.2
Quality requirements of structures ....................................................................................................................5.1
Regular structures of buildings Allowed approximations ...........................................................................14.6.7
Structures of linear elements ..........................................................................................................................14.6
Structures with other elements .......................................................................................................................14.8
Surface
Surface reinforcement ........................................................................................................17.3.5.2.3 and 18.3.5
Suspension
Blocks on piles .......................................................................................................................................22.5.4.1.3
Corbels ..................................................................................................................................................22.3.1.4.4
Dapped ends .........................................................................................................................................22.3.2.4.2
Linear elements ...........................................................................................................................................18.3.6
Suspension reinforcement
Symbols ...........................................................................................................................................4.1, 4.2 e 4.3
Temperature
Non-uniform variations in temperature .....................................................................................................11.4.2.2
Uniform temperature variations ................................................................................................................11.4.2.1
Tension
Concrete tension strength .............................................................................................................................8.2.5
Diagram stress-deformation, yield and tension strength
Steel for active reinforcement .................................................................................................................8.4.5
Steel for passive reinforcement ..............................................................................................................8.3.6
Hooks of tension reinforcement (anchorage of passive reinforcements through bonding) ........................9.4.2.3
Limit values for longitudinal reinforcements of beams .............................................................................17.3.5 2
Linear elements Tension reinforcement in simple bending anchored by bonding .............................18.3.2.3.1
Linear elements Tensioned reinforcements in support sections ...........................................................18.3.2.4
Minimum values for tensioned reinforcements submitted to imposed deflections .........................17.3.5.2.2
Surface reinforcement .....................................................................................................................17.3.5.2.3
Tensioned and compression reinforcement ....................................................................................17.3.5.2.4
Tensioned reinforcement ...............................................................................................................17.3.5.2.1
Stress-strain diagram in tension ...............................................................................................................8.2.10.2
Verification of fatigue in tensioned concrete .............................................................................................23.5.4.2

ABNT NBR 6118:2003
Torsion
Combined internal forces and moments .........................................................................................................17.7
Bending and torsion ............................................................................................................................. 17.7.1
Generalities .................................................................................................................................. 17.7.1.1
Longitudinal reinforcement ........................................................................................................... 17.7.1.2
Longitudinal reinforcement at compressed chord by bending ..................................................... 17.7.1.3
Resistance of compressed chord ................................................................................................. 17.7.1.4
Torsion and shearing forces ................................................................................................................ 17.7.2
Generalities ................................................................................................................................... 17.7.2.1
Limit state of inclined cracking of webs shearing force and torsion ............................................................17.6
Linear elements subjected to torsion Ultimate limit state ............................................................................17.5
Torsion in thin wall open section elements .......................................................................................... 17.5.2
General considerations ................................................................................................................ 17.5.2.2
Generalities .................................................................................................................................. 17.5.2.1
Resistance to bending-torsion ...................................................................................................... 17.5.2.4
Rigidity to bending-torsion ............................................................................................................ 17.5.2.3
Uniform torsion ..................................................................................................................................... 17.5.1
Design of reinforcements ............................................................................................................. 17.5.1.6
General conditions ....................................................................................................................... 17.5.1.2
Generalities .................................................................................................................................. 17.5.1.1
Geometry of the resistant section ................................................................................................ 17.5.1.4
Resistance of structural element Pure torsion .......................................................................... 17.5.1.3
Verification of the diagonal compression of concrete .................................................................. 17.5.1.5
Torsion ........................................................................................................................................................ 24.5.6
Torsion reinforcement ................................................................................................................................. 18.3.4
Use
Control of cracks regarding sensorial acceptability and usage .................................................................. 13.4.3
Interfaces of design including construction, use and maintenance ...................................................................25
Manual of usage, inspection and maintenance ..............................................................................................25.4
Values
Characteristic values of actions .................................................................................................................. 11.6.1
Characteristic values of resistance ..................................................................................................................12.2
Design values of actions ............................................................................................................................ 11.6.3
Design values of prestressing forces ......................................................................................................... 9.6.1.4
Design values of resistance ............................................................................................................................12.3
Vibration
Limit state of excessive vibrations ..................................................................................................... 3.2.8 e 23.3
Wall-columns
Analysis of second order effects of wall-columns ...........................................................................................15.9
Columns and wall-columns (dimensions) ................................................................................................... 13.2.3
Nodes in frames and connections between walls ...........................................................................................21.4
Structural analysis with deep-beams and wall columns ............................................................................. 14.8.1
Wall-columns ............................................................................................................................ 14.4.2.4 and 18.5
Wall-columns in plain concrete ................................................................................................................... 24.6.1
Weld
Joints through weld ........................................................................................................................................9.5.4
Weldability ....................................................................................................................................................8.3.9
Width
Beams and deep-beams ............................................................................................................................. 13.2.2
Collaborating width in beams of T sections ........................................................................ 14.6.2.2 e figure 14.2
Effective width ..........................................................................................................................figures 14.3 e 14.4
Maximum width to place tendons in an external support strip of prestressed slabs ................................ 20.3.2.2
Wind
Action of wind ........................................................................................................................................... 11.4.1.2

NBR 6118 Design of Structural Concrete - Procedure

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

NBR 6118 Design of Structural Concrete - Procedure

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

ABNT NBR 6118:2003

ABNT 2004 Todos os direitos reservados i

ii ABNT 2004 Todos os direitos reservados

Design of concrete structures Procedures

ABNT NBR 5674:1999 - Maintenance of constructions - Procedures

ABNT NBR 5732:1991 - Plain Portland Cement - Specifications

ABNT NBR 5733:1991 - High strength Portland cement - Specifications

ABNT NBR 5735:1991 - Blast furnace Portland cement - Specifications

ABNT NBR 5736:1991 - Pozzolan Portland cement - Specifications

ABNT NBR 5737:1992 - Portland cement resistant to Sulfate - Specifications

ABNT 2004 Todos os direitos reservados 1

ABNT NBR 6120:1980 - Loads for design of structures of buildings - Procedures

ABNT NBR 6122:1996 - Design and execution of foundations - Procedures

ABNT NBR 6123:1988 - Forces from wind in buildings - Procedures

ABNT NBR 6153:1988 - Metallic products - Semi-oriented bending - Testing Methods

ABNT NBR 7190:1997 - Design of wooden structures

ABNT NBR 7482:1991 - Steel wires for prestressed concrete - Specifications

ABNT NBR 7483:1991 - Steel strands for prestressed concrete - Specifications

ABNT NBR 8681:2003 - Actions and safety in structures - Procedure

ABNT NBR 11578:1991 Blended Portland cement - Specifications

ABNT NBR 12654:1992 - Technological Control of materials included in concrete - Procedure

2 ABNT 2004 Todos os direitos reservados

ABNT NBR 12655:1996 - Concrete - Preparation, control and acceptance - Procedure

ABNT NBR 12989:1993 - White Portland cement - Specifications

ABNT NBR 13116:1994 - Low heat of hydration Portland cement - Specifications

ABNT NBR 14931:2003 - Execution of concrete structures Procedure

ABNT NBR 15200:2004 - Fire design of concrete structures - Procedure

ABNT NBR 15421:2006 - Design of seismic resistant structures Procedure

ABNT NBR NM 67:1998 - Concrete - Determination of consistency. Slump test.

ABNT 2004 Todos os direitos reservados 3

3.1 Definitions of structural concrete

3.2 Definitions of the limiting states

4 ABNT 2004 Todos os direitos reservados

Figure 3.1 - Limit state of partial decompression

3.3 Definition regarding persons involved in the construction process

ABNT 2004 Todos os direitos reservados 5

4.2 Basic Symbols

4.2.2 Lower case letters

- smallest dimension of rectangles

- Maximum displacement (deflection)

- Dimension or distance parallel to width

- Smallest dimension of a rectangle

bw - Width of the web of a beam

c - Cover of the reinforcement in regard to the face of the element

d Effective depth of section

f - Strength (see section 8)

6 ABNT 2004 Todos os direitos reservados

l - Total height of the structure or height of a story high column

- Number of aligned columns

r Internal curvature radius of the hook

s - Spacing of reinforcement bars

x - Height of the neutral axis

4.2.3 Upper case letters

A - Area of gross cross section

Ac - Area of concrete transversal section

As - Area of the transverse section of a longitudinal tension reinforcement

As - Area of the section of longitudinal compression reinforcement

D - Diameter of the bend of steel bars

E Modulus of elasticity (see section 8)

- Actions (see section 11)

G - Permanent actions (see section 11)

Gc - Transversal modulus of elasticity of concrete

Ic Moment of inertia of concrete section

ABNT 2004 Todos os direitos reservados 7